Bifurcations in Piecewise-smooth Continuous Systems (World Scientific Series on Nonlinear Science Series a)

BIFURCATIONS IN PIECEWISE-SMOOTH CONTINUOUS SYSTEMS WORLD SCIENTIFIC SERIES ON NONLINEAR SCIENCE Editor: Leon O. Chua...

Author: David John Warwick Simpson

23 downloads 863 Views 4MB Size Report

This content was uploaded by our users and we assume good faith they have the permission to share this book. If you own the copyright to this book and it is wrongfully on our website, we offer a simple DMCA procedure to remove your content from our site. Start by pressing the button below!
Report copyright / DMCA form

DOWNLOAD PDF

BIFURCATIONS IN PIECEWISE-SMOOTH CONTINUOUS SYSTEMS

WORLD SCIENTIFIC SERIES ON NONLINEAR SCIENCE Editor: Leon O. Chua University of California, Berkeley Series A.

MONOGRAPHS AND TREATISES*

Volume 53:

Bifurcation Theory and Applications T. Ma & S. Wang

Volume 54:

Dynamics of Crowd-Minds A. Adamatzky

Volume 55:

Control of Homoclinic Chaos by Weak Periodic Perturbations R. Chacón

Volume 56:

Strange Nonchaotic Attractors U. Feudel, S. Kuznetsov & A. Pikovsky

Volume 57:

A Nonlinear Dynamics Perspective of Wolfram's New Kind of Science L. O. Chua

Volume 58:

New Methods for Chaotic Dynamics N. A. Magnitskii & S. V. Sidorov

Volume 59:

Equations of Phase-Locked Loops J. Kudrewicz & S. Wasowicz

Volume 60:

Smooth and Nonsmooth High Dimensional Chaos and the Melnikov-Type Methods J. Awrejcewicz & M. M. Holicke

Volume 61:

A Gallery of Chua Attractors (with CD-ROM) E. Bilotta & P. Pantano

Volume 62:

Numerical Simulation of Waves and Fronts in Inhomogeneous Solids A. Berezovski, J. Engelbrecht & G. A. Maugin

Volume 63:

Advanced Topics on Cellular Self-Organizing Nets and Chaotic Nonlinear Dynamics to Model and Control Complex Systems R. Caponetto, L. Fortuna & M. Frasca

Volume 64:

Control of Chaos in Nonlinear Circuits and Systems B. W.-K. Ling, H. H.-C. Lu & H. K. Lam

Volume 65:

Chua’s Circuit Implementations: Yesterday, Today and Tomorrow L. Fortuna, M. Frasca & M. G. Xibilia

Volume 66:

Differential Geometry Applied to Dynamical Systems J.-M. Ginoux

Volume 67:

Determining Thresholds of Complete Synchronization, and Application A. Stefanski

Volume 68:

A Nonlinear Dynamics Perspective of Wolfram’ New Kind of Science (Volume III) L. O. Chua

Volume 69:

Bifurcations in Piecewise-Smooth Continuous Systems D. J. Warwick Simpson

*

To view the complete list of the published volumes in the series, please visit: http://www.worldscibooks.com/series/wssnsa_series.shtml

Lakshmi - Bifurcations in Piecewise-smooth.pmd 2

11/25/2009, 7:24 PM

NONLINEAR SCIENCE WORLD SCIENTIFIC SERIES ON

Series A

Vol. 70

Series Editor: Leon O. Chua

BIFURCATIONS IN PIECEWISE-SMOOTH CONTINUOUS SYSTEMS David John Warwick Simpson University of British Columbia, Canada

World Scientific NEW JERSEY

•

LONDON

•

SINGAPORE

•

BEIJING

•

SHANGHAI

•

HONG KONG

•

TA I P E I

•

CHENNAI

Published by World Scientific Publishing Co. Pte. Ltd. 5 Toh Tuck Link, Singapore 596224 USA office: 27 Warren Street, Suite 401-402, Hackensack, NJ 07601 UK office: 57 Shelton Street, Covent Garden, London WC2H 9HE

British Library Cataloguing-in-Publication Data A catalogue record for this book is available from the British Library.

BIFURCATIONS IN PIECEWISE-SMOOTH CONTINUOUS SYSTEMS World Scientific Series on Nonlinear Science, Series A — Vol. 69 Copyright © 2010 by World Scientific Publishing Co. Pte. Ltd. All rights reserved. This book, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form or by any means, electronic or mechanical, including photocopying, recording or any information storage and retrieval system now known or to be invented, without written permission from the Publisher.

For photocopying of material in this volume, please pay a copying fee through the Copyright Clearance Center, Inc., 222 Rosewood Drive, Danvers, MA 01923, USA. In this case permission to photocopy is not required from the publisher.

ISBN-13 978-981-4293-84-6 ISBN-10 981-4293-84-9

Printed in Singapore.

Lakshmi - Bifurcations in Piecewise-smooth.pmd 1

11/25/2009, 7:24 PM

November 26, 2009

15:34

World Scientific Book - 9in x 6in

Preface

Many real-world systems involve a discontinuity or sudden change, such as impacting in mechanical systems and switching in electrical circuits. Smooth dynamical systems generally do not provide ideal mathematical models for such situations. It becomes necessary to incorporate a nonsmooth component into the model. Often this yields a piecewise-smooth system. Studies of piecewise-smooth systems prior to about twenty years ago are quite rare. Perhaps this is because the 1970’s and 80’s saw significant advances in the theory of smooth dynamical systems, such as an understanding of chaos. Nowadays smooth dynamical systems theory has a firm footing (though many open questions remain, e.g. Hilbert’s 16th problem) and piecewise-smooth systems are a popular topic of research. The advancement of piecewise-smooth theory has been led most notably by the Bristol school which has recently produced a unique and important textbook in this area [di Bernardo et al. (2008a)]. Although numerically computed solutions of a mathematical model at particular parameter values can give some understanding of the dynamics associated with the model, a more complete understanding relies on determining parameter values at which the qualitative features of these solutions change in some fundamental way, i.e. bifurcations. Of particular interest in this book is the nature of those bifurcations that are unique to piecewise-smooth systems. For instance in a piecewise-smooth system an attracting solution may lose stability and undergo an instantaneous transition to chaos. This had been observed in DC/DC converters for some time, see for instance [Fossas and Olivar (1996)], but explained only recently by nonsmooth bifurcation theory [di Bernardo et al. (1998b); Yuan et al. (1998)]. Unlike period-doubling cascades, period-adding sequences (which v

bifurcations

November 26, 2009

vi

15:34


Bifurcations in Piecewise-Smooth, Continuous Systems

may occur in smooth systems) are not completely understood. However recent studies have explained such sequences in one-dimensional, piecewisesmooth maps [Avrutin et al. (2007); Halse et al. (2003); Kawczy´ nski and Strizhak (2000)]. Also, resonance tongues (or mode-locking regions) that display a curious lens-chain structure have been observed in models of DC/DC converters [Zhusubaliyev and Mosekilde (2003)] and in a trade cycle model [Sushko and Gardini (2006)]. A novel description of the dynamics near points of zero width of such tongues is described here in Chapter 6. Bifurcations unique to piecewise-smooth systems differ in many fundamental aspects to those in smooth systems. Often the dynamical behavior local to a bifurcation of a piecewise-smooth system is determined by only linear terms of an appropriate series expansion. This yields two immediate consequences. First, if nonlinear terms are put aside, the resulting approximation is piecewise-linear and relatively easy to study. This is because solutions of linear systems may be determined explicitly. In fact some researchers choose to study piecewise-linear approximations of smooth, nonlinear systems, for example [Bergami et al. (2006)]. Second, invariant sets that are created at such a bifurcation generically grow in size or separate linearly with respect to parameter values. This is different to the behavior of familiar smooth bifurcations, such as the Andronov-Hopf bifurcation [Kuznetsov (2004); Marsden and McCracken (1976)] at which a periodic orbit is created that grows in size as the square root of the bifurcation parameter. An important characteristic of any bifurcation is its codimension - the number of parameters that need to be varied in order for the bifurcation to occur. In an arbitrary parameter space of a dimension equal to the codimension of the bifurcation, an unfolding of a bifurcation is a description of all dynamical behavior that may generically occur near the bifurcation. A large component of this book is the unfolding of codimension-two bifurcations. The normal form of a local bifurcation is a simple system that exhibits all aspects of the unfolding. For smooth systems the concept of dimension reduction via center manifold analysis allows bifurcations in systems of any number of dimensions to be transformed to their normal forms. This technique is crucial to understanding complex dynamical systems of high dimension. However in piecewise-smooth systems a lack of differentiability often disallows dimension reduction. Consequently little is known about bifurcations in piecewise-smooth systems of arbitrary dimension. This book is essentially an updated and revised version of my PhD thesis [Simpson (2008)]. The book concerns piecewise-smooth systems that are

bifurcations

November 26, 2009

15:34


Preface

bifurcations

vii

continuous and autonomous. Both continuous-time systems (ODEs) and discrete-time systems (maps) are investigated. The smooth components of the systems will be assumed to contain no singularities that affect the dynamical behavior of interest (in particular, maps with a square-root or 3/2-type singularity [di Bernardo et al. (2001b)] are not considered). A brief overview of each chapter is now given. Chapter 1 provides a background. Section 1.1 discusses applications; the remaining sections derive the piecewise equations used in later chapters and summarize key results of previous researchers. A variety of terminology used below and throughout this book is introduced in this chapter. The next three chapters investigate piecewise-smooth, continuous ODE systems. Chapter 2 looks at discontinuous bifurcations in planar systems. Section 2.1 discusses periodic orbits. Section 2.2 studies a discontinuous analogue of a Hopf bifurcation. The main result of this section, Theorem 2.1, details the creation of a periodic orbit at this bifurcation in a general setting. A practical summary is given in Sec. 2.3 where it is shown that there are exactly four distinct discontinuous bifurcations in planar systems. Chapter 3 presents unfoldings of three different codimension-two, discontinuous bifurcations. In the order given they are the simultaneous occurrence of a (smooth) saddle-node bifurcation and a discontinuous bifurcation, the simultaneous occurrence of a Hopf bifurcation and a discontinuous bifurcation, and a discontinuous Hopf bifurcation of indeterminable criticality. The first unfolding is accomplished for a piecewise-smooth, continuous ODE system of arbitrary dimension. The second scenario is completely determined for a two-dimensional system, then a partial result is obtained in N dimensions. The third unfolding is carried out in two dimensions. Chapter 4 applies the theoretical results of the previous two chapters to a real physical system. The system studied is an eight-dimensional, cybernetic model of the continuous cultivation of Saccharomyces cerevisiae (a common yeast) formulated by Jones & Kompala [Jones and Kompala (1999)]. As detailed in Sec. 4.1, the model is piecewise-smooth, continuous, due to the key model assumption that the yeast switches between metabolic pathways in a manner that maximizes its growth rate. Nonsmoothness and other basic properties are discussed in Sec. 4.2. A bifurcation analysis is presented in Sec. 4.3. Here a variety of codimension-two, discontinuous bifurcations are found. These are shown to be in full agreement with the results of Chapter 3. Stable oscillations which arise via Hopf and discontinuous Hopf-like bifurcations are described in Sec. 4.4. These correspond to spontaneous oscillations observed in experiments. By a detailed inspection

November 26, 2009

viii

15:34



of time series plots, an explanation as to the cause of the oscillations is determined. The next three chapters study discrete-time systems. Chapter 5 analyzes codimension-two, border-collision bifurcations. It is convenient that the piecewise-smooth ODE systems that describe discontinuous bifurcations, have the same form as the piecewise-smooth maps describing bordercollision bifurcations. Much of the basic analysis of the continuous-time case may be carried over to the discrete-time case. This is most evident for the codimension-two, simultaneous occurrence of a saddle-node bifurcation and a border-collision bifurcation detailed in Sec. 5.1. Sec. 5.2 studies the simultaneous occurrence of a period-doubling bifurcation and a bordercollision bifurcation. A complete description is obtained in one dimension; a partial result is constructed for higher dimensions. Chapter 6 looks at periodic solutions of piecewise-smooth, continuous maps near border-collision bifurcations at a smooth switching manifold. Symbolic dynamics enable periodic solutions to be identified by symbol sequences that give their itinerary relative to the switching manifold. As a result, any periodic solution may be expressed as the solution to a linear system which is constructed in manner determined by the associated symbol sequence. Two important matrices appear in the given formulation of the linear system: the stability matrix and the border-collision matrix. Bifurcations of periodic solutions and thus resonance tongue boundaries are described in terms of the multipliers of the stability matrix and the singularity of the border-collision matrix. A new class of symbol sequences, called “rotational symbol sequences” is introduced in Sec. 6.4. Such symbol sequences correspond to periodic solutions that lie on an invariant circle. A reason for the success of the symbolic approach is that no assumptions need to be made about the existence of invariant circles. Algebraic properties of rotational symbol sequences are used to explain the lens-chain geometry of resonance tongues observed in two-parameter bifurcation diagrams (bifurcation sets). Points where adjacent lenses connect, i.e. where the resonance tongues have zero width, are termed “shrinking points”. A rigorous unfolding of shrinking points is performed in the final section. Chapter 7 studies border-collision bifurcations in a planar, piecewisesmooth, continuous map for which the multipliers associated with the fixed point are complex and “jump” from inside to outside the unit circle at the bifurcation. These bifurcations are shown to exhibit a wide variety of Neimark-Sacker-like and nonsmooth behavior. An invariant circle may be created at the bifurcation. Mode-locking on the invariant circle corresponds

bifurcations

November 26, 2009

15:34


Preface

bifurcations

ix

to a point in a resonance tongue. The theoretical results of the previous chapter are compared with numerically computed lens-chain-shaped resonance tongues. Additional complex phenomena are also discussed. A curve of shrinking points is seen to be a boundary between chaotic and non-chaotic dynamics. Periodic solutions with non-rotational symbol sequences are found to belong to resonance tongues that do not display a lens-chain structure. Unlike at a generic border-collision bifurcation in a one-dimensional, piecewise-smooth, continuous map, multiple attractors may coexist. Also, in some cases at the bifurcation the fixed point is a saddle and no invariant circle is created. There are four appendices. Appendix A contains proofs of lemmas and theorems that are deemed too lengthy for inclusion in the main text. The hope is that this segregation allows the general ideas of the book to be more easily assimilated. Extra figures intended as additional references are included in Appendix B. Appendix C overviews so-called adjugate matrices that are utilized throughout the book. Lastly Appendix D lists parameter values for the S. cerevisiae growth model studied in Chapter 4. A quick note with regards to notation: O(k) [o(k)] will be used to denote terms that are order k or larger [larger than order k] in all variables and parameters of a given expression. Finally, it should be noted that six research articles contain much of the work presented here. The codimension-one, discontinuous Hopf bifurcation discussed in Sec. 2.2 is the subject of [Simpson and Meiss (2007)]. Similarly, the coincidence of a Hopf bifurcation and a discontinuous bifurcation is described in [Simpson and Meiss (2008b)] and the coincidence of a period-doubling bifurcation and a border-collision bifurcation is described in [Simpson and Meiss (2009b)]. The bifurcation analysis of the S. cerevisiae model studied in Chapter 4 is presented in [Simpson et al. (2009)]. The N -dimensional unfoldings of Sec. 3.1 and Sec. 3.2 may also be found in this paper. Most of Chapter 6 and Chapter 7 may be found in [Simpson and Meiss (2009a)] and [Simpson and Meiss (2008a)] respectively. D. J. W. Simpson

November 26, 2009

15:34


This page intentionally left blank

bifurcations

November 26, 2009

15:34


Acknowledgments

This book could not have been accomplished without the help of numerous people who deserve more credit than I am able to give them here. The discussions and suggestions of Jim Meiss have been fundamental to all the material presented here. Many thanks go to Dhinakar Kompala concerning the application of the theoretical results to a biochemical model. I am also very grateful for the valuable help and comments of the remaining members of my PhD thesis committee, David Bortz, Jim Curry and Keith Julien. Special thanks to two professors who recently visited The University of Colorado, Holger Dullin and Robert MacKay, for many fruitful discussions relating to the dynamics of maps and the properties of slow manifolds. I am very appreciative of the ideas and comments of Bob Easton and Jim Howard who made special efforts to help me. Thanks also to graduate students, too many to name here, who I’ve shared an office with or worked with in the computer lab, for much miscellaneous help. Finally, thanks to friends, family and my wife Shannon (whose ability to find for me seemingly obscure but invaluable references knows no end) for love and support.

xi

bifurcations

November 26, 2009

15:34



bifurcations

November 26, 2009

15:34


bifurcations

Contents

Preface

v

Acknowledgments

xi

1.

Fundamentals of Piecewise-Smooth, Continuous Systems 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 1.9

2.

3.

4.

Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A Framework for Local Behavior . . . . Existence of Equilibria and Fixed Points The Observer Canonical Form . . . . . . Discontinuous Bifurcations . . . . . . . Border-Collision Bifurcations . . . . . . Poincaré Maps and Discontinuity Maps Period Adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Smooth Approximations . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

1 . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

3 8 12 14 18 20 24 29 31

Discontinuous Bifurcations in Planar Systems

33

2.1 2.2 2.3

34 41 46

Periodic Orbits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Focus-Focus Case in Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Summary and Classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Codimension-Two, Discontinuous Bifurcations

53

3.1 3.2 3.3

56 59 70

A Nonsmooth, Saddle-Node Bifurcation . . . . . . . . . . A Nonsmooth, Hopf Bifurcation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A Codimension-Two, Discontinuous Hopf Bifurcation . . .

The Growth of Saccharomyces cerevisiae

75

4.1

77

Mathematical Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xiii

November 26, 2009

15:34


xiv


4.2 4.3 4.4 5.

6.

Basic Mathematical Observations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bifurcation Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Simple and Complicated Stable Oscillations . . . . . . . .

82 83 89

Codimension-Two, Border-Collision Bifurcations

95

5.1 5.2

96 99

A Nonsmooth, Saddle-Node Bifurcation . . . . . . . . . . A Nonsmooth, Period-Doubling Bifurcation . . . . . . . .

Periodic Solutions and Resonance Tongues 6.1 6.2 6.3 6.4 6.5 6.6 6.7

7.

bifurcations

Symbolic Dynamics . . . . . . . . Describing and Locating Periodic Resonance Tongue Boundaries . Rotational Symbol Sequences . . Cardinality of Symbol Sequences Shrinking Points . . . . . . . . . Unfolding Shrinking Points . . .

107

. . . . . . Solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

Neimark-Sacker-Like Bifurcations 7.1 7.2 7.3 7.4 7.5 7.6

135

A Two-Dimensional Map . . . . . . . . . . Basic Dynamics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Limiting Parameter Values . . . . . . . . . Resonance Tongues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Complex Phenomena Relating to Resonance More Complex Phenomena . . . . . . . . .

Appendix A

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tongues . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

Selected Proofs

Lemma 1.3 . Theorem 1.1 Theorem 2.1 Theorem 3.1 Theorem 3.2 Theorem 3.3 Theorem 3.4 Theorem 5.2 Theorem 5.3 Lemma 6.9 . Theorem 6.1 Lemma 7.1 .

. . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . .

109 112 116 122 125 126 131

137 139 142 145 153 160 165

. . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . .

165 166 167 171 173 181 183 187 194 197 199 201

November 26, 2009

15:34


Contents

bifurcations

xv

Appendix B

Additional Figures

205

Appendix C

Adjugate Matrices

211

Appendix D

Parameter Values for S. cerevisiae

213

Bibliography

215

Index

237


November 26, 2009

15:34


Chapter 1

Fundamentals of Piecewise-Smooth, Continuous Systems

A system of ordinary differential equations (ODEs), x˙ = F (x), or a map, x0 = F (x), is said to be piecewise-smooth if the phase space can be partitioned into countably many regions where F has a different smooth (i.e. C k for some k ∈ N) functional form. Nonsmoothness occurs on codimensionone region boundaries which are called switching manifolds. The last two decades have seen an explosion of interest in piecewise-smooth systems. Some recent textbooks in this area include [di Bernardo et al. (2008a); Leine and Nijmeijer (2004); Zhusubaliyev and Mosekilde (2003); Tse (2003); Banerjee and Verghese (2001); Brogliato (1999)]. It is useful to classify piecewise-smooth, ODE systems by the severity of the discontinuities at the switching manifolds: (1) Hybrid systems. The system is a combination of differential equations and maps [Johansson (2003); Van der Schaft and Schumacher (2000)]. Such systems naturally arise when modeling hard impact phenomena [Wiercigroch and De Kraker (2000); Brogliato (1999); Popp (2000); Blazejczyk-Okolewska et al. (1999)]. This is because impacts result in the sudden velocity change of an object; when velocity is a system variable, a map is required to execute a jump in phase space. (2) Filippov systems. The vector field, F , is discontinuous at switching manifolds. These systems are named after Aleksei Filippov who was perhaps the first to resolve ambiguities arising from sliding which occurs when the vector field on both sides of a switching manifold points either towards or away from the switching manifold [Filippov (1964, 1988)]. (3) Piecewise-smooth, continuous systems. F is continuous throughout the phase space but the Jacobian of F is discontinuous 1

bifurcations

November 26, 2009

2

15:34



at the switching manifolds. (4) Systems with higher order discontinuities. Derivatives of F up to some degree n are continuous but of degree n+1 are not. Systems of this type are rarely encountered. As a general rule they exhibit the same bifurcations as smooth systems except nondegeneracy conditions dependent on high-order derivatives of F may not be computable. Piecewise-smooth maps may be classified in a similar manner but this is not done here since many interesting piecewise-smooth maps contain a square-root or 3/2-type singularity. Other formulations exist for nonsmooth systems such as mixed logic dynamical systems - a very general class of systems that use logic components [Ferrari-Trecate et al. (2003); Bemporad and Morari (1999)], linear complementarity systems - systems with inequality constraints [Heemels and Brogliato (2003); Heemels et al. (2000)], systems with differential inclusions [Deimling (1992)], and systems with delay [Sieber (2006); Sieber et al. (unpublished); Barton et al. (2006); Senthilkumar and Lakshmanan (2005)]. In piecewise-smooth systems the interaction of invariant sets with switching manifolds often produces bifurcations that are forbidden in smooth systems. These are collectively known as discontinuity induced bifurcations. Whereas period-doubling cascades are common in smooth systems, in piecewise-smooth systems periodic orbits may undergo what are called period-adding sequences or transition directly to chaos. Dynamical behavior local to a discontinuity induced bifurcation is often determined purely by linear terms of an appropriate piecewise series expansion. Consequently invariants commonly grow in size linearly with respect to a bifurcation parameter, such as the Hopf cycle in the discontinuous analogue of an Andronov-Hopf bifurcation, see Sec. 2.2. Much is known about discontinuity induced bifurcations in systems of low dimension (N = 1, 2). However, the technique of dimension reduction via center manifold analysis that is hugely useful in studying smooth systems does not apply at non-differentiable points in piecewise-smooth systems. More dimensions provide more allowable geometries and only scattered results exist for such bifurcations in systems of any dimension. Furthermore, in piecewise-smooth, continuous, ODE systems, invariant manifolds of equilibria may be conical instead of planar [Carmona et al. (2005b)]. Perhaps the most basic discontinuity induced bifurcations are those that arise from the perturbation of a piecewise-smooth, ODE system that has

bifurcations

November 26, 2009

15:34



bifurcations

3

an equilibrium located exactly on a switching manifold. Such bifurcations are commonly referred to as boundary equilibrium bifurcations. In hybrid or Filippov systems these bifurcations may involve what are known as pseudoequilibria due to a lack of continuity in the vector field (these are not discussed in this book, the reader is referred to [di Bernardo et al. (2008a); Kuznetsov et al. (2003); Giannakopoulos and Pliete (2001); di Bernardo et al. (2008b); Buzzi et al. (2006)]). In piecewise-smooth, continuous systems, they are further known as discontinuous bifurcations and are either analogues of familiar smooth bifurcations, or novel and unique to piecewisesmooth systems. The discrete analogue, that is a bifurcation resulting from the perturbation of a piecewise-smooth, continuous map with a fixed point on a switching manifold, is known as a border-collision bifurcation. The remainder of this chapter is organized as follows. Section 1.1 presents an overview of physical systems that have been modeled by piecewise-smooth systems. Section 1.2 introduces a general form commonly used to investigate discontinuous and border-collision bifurcations. Here it is shown that nonlinear terms do not affect structurally stable local dynamics. Equilibria and fixed points of the general form are then computed in Sec. 1.3. When particular non-degeneracy conditions are satisfied, the general form may be put into a canonical form involving companion matrices, Sec. 1.4. Section 1.5 summarizes current theory relating to discontinuous bifurcations. The discrete equivalent, border-collision bifurcations, are discussed in Sec. 1.6. Section 1.7 describes Poincaré maps of piecewisesmooth, ODE systems. Generically, the Poincaré maps are smooth unless a tangency occurs, in which case so-called discontinuity maps are used to control any singularities. Four common tangency scenarios are described in detail. The concept of sliding is also discussed in this section. Section 1.8 describes period-adding cascades and finally Sec. 1.9 discusses smooth approximations to piecewise-smooth systems.

1.1

Applications

This section discusses applications of piecewise-smooth systems. To be concordant with the focus of this book an emphasis is placed on physical systems that are well-modeled by piecewise-smooth, continuous, ODE systems and maps. However, also of interest are piecewise-smooth, discontinuous, ODE systems that exhibit oscillatory behavior and are of a form that leads to piecewise-smooth, continuous Poincaré maps. As detailed in

November 26, 2009

4

15:34


bifurcations


Sec. 1.7, Filippov systems with a corner collision or a sliding bifurcation generically lead to piecewise-smooth, continuous Poincaré maps, as do some non-autonomous systems. Piecewise-smooth systems are ideal for modeling circuits that contain a switching component such as a diode or a transistor [Banerjee and Verghese (2001); Zhusubaliyev and Mosekilde (2003); Tse (2003)]. Many times models are piecewise-linear, ODE systems. The absence of nonlinear terms allows for analytical expressions to be obtained for trajectories between switching manifolds which is particularly useful in the construction of Poincaré maps [Freire et al. (2007); Carmona et al. (2005a)]. Simple relay control systems are often well modeled by equations of the form x˙ = Ax + bu , ξ = g(x, t) ,

(1.1)

u = sgn(ξ) , where x is a vector of state variables (such as currents and voltages), ξ is the input signal to the relay element or switch, u is the output signal of the relay and the matrix A and the vector b are constants. The combined effect of feedback and nonsmoothness in (1.1) can result in extremely complicated dynamics [Zhusubaliyev and Mosekilde (2003)]. One of the simplest circuit systems known to exhibit chaos is Chua’s circuit [Chua and Lin (1990, 1991)], commonly modeled by a piecewiselinear, continuous, ODE system. Conceived over 20 years ago it has since been studied extensively in a variety of different forms, see for instance [Chua (1994); Yang and Chua (2000)]. DC/DC buck converters are also well-studied and have been shown to exhibit a variety of bifurcations unique to piecewise-smooth systems [Zhusubaliyev and Mosekilde (2008a, 2006b); Zhusubaliyev et al. (2006); Zhusubaliyev and Mosekilde (2006a); Zhusubaliyev et al. (2007); Benadero et al. (2003); di Bernardo et al. (2002a); Fang and Abed (2001)], see Fig. 1.1. Other examples include the Colpitts oscillator [Maggio et al. (2000)] and the Wien bridge oscillator [López et al. (2005); Carmona et al. (2002)]. Vibro-impacting systems are commonly modeled by piecewisesmooth systems [Wiercigroch and De Kraker (2000); Brogliato (1999); Leine and Nijmeijer (2004); Popp (2000); Awrejcewicz and Lamarque (2003); Blazejczyk-Okolewska et al. (1999)]. Fig. 1.2(a) shows perhaps the simplest vibro-impacting system: a mass on a spring that collides with a solid wall. The associated equations of motion form a piecewise-smooth impacting system. When forced this system may exhibit chaotic dynamics

November 26, 2009

15:34


bifurcations


5

Fig. 1.1: This figure is taken from [Zhusubaliyev and Mosekilde (2008a)]. It shows resonance tongues (or mode-locking regions) for a two-dimensional, piecewise-linear, continuous map modeling a DC/DC power converter. In some areas resonance tongues exhibit a lens-chain geometry. NeimarkSacker and Neimark-Sacker-like bifurcations are labeled N . A further description of these curves is presented in [Zhusubaliyev and Mosekilde (2008a)]. [Peterka and Vacik (1992)]. Other basic scenarios include a pendulum with impacts [Piiroinen et al. (2004); Awrejcewicz et al. (2004)] and a bouncing ball [Ivanov (2000); Luo and Han (1996)]. These simple situations have immediate applications to more complex mechanical systems such as rattling in gears [Halse et al. (2007); Wiercigroch and De Kraker (2000)], walking robots [Garcia et al. (1998); Aoi and Tsuchiya (2006)], printers [Dankowicz and Piiroinen (2002); Tung and Shaw (1988)], and models of rocking blocks [Lenci and Rega (2005); Hogan (1994); Lipscombe and Pellegrino (1993)] which are useful to earthquake-resistant building design.

(a)

(b)

Fig. 1.2: Schematic diagrams of simple mechanical systems exhibiting nonsmooth behavior. In panel (a), a mass on a spring impacts a wall. In panel (b), a mass on a spring is subject to dry friction.

November 26, 2009

6

15:34


bifurcations


Soft impacts, characterized by a fast but continuous velocity change, are commonly modeled by Filippov systems. Consider the scenario depicted in Fig. 1.3(a). Here a mass on a spring periodically comes in contact with a non-rigid, massless support. If y represents the vertical displacement of the mass from its rest position, then m¨ y + by˙ + ky = F (t) ,

(1.2)

where m denotes mass, F (t) is a forcing function, and b and k are dependent upon whether or not the mass is in contact with the support: no contact : b = bspr , k = kspr , contact : b = bspr + bsup , k = kspr + ksup , where bspr [bsup ] and kspr [ksup ] represent the damping coefficient and spring constant of the spring [support], respectively. Nonsmoothness occurs whenever the mass impacts or detaches from the support. It is assumed the support has a relatively small relaxation time, therefore an impact occurs whenever y decreases to a critical value, ysup . A detachment occurs whenever the contact force between the mass and the support, f = ksup (y − ysup ) + bsup y, ˙ becomes zero. As shown in the corresponding phase portrait, Fig. 1.3(b), the resulting switching manifold (the solid line) is non-differentiable at (y, y) ˙ = (ysup , 0). Consequently systems of this type commonly produce k

sup y˙ = − bsup (y−ysup )

y

y

y = ysup

(a)

(b)

Fig. 1.3: Panel (a) is a schematic diagram of the soft impact system (1.2). A corresponding phase portrait is shown in panel (b). This system may exhibit so-called corner-collisions at the non-differentiable point, (ysup , 0), on the switching manifold.

November 26, 2009

15:34



bifurcations

7

corner-collisions, see Sec. 1.7. Various versions of this system are studied in [Leine and Van Campen (2002); Leine et al. (2000); Ma et al. (2006, 2008)]. Nearly all mechanical systems suffer from friction to some degree, in many cases affecting the system qualitatively. There are two types of friction. For surfaces in contact, the force that opposes their movement when they are stationary relative to each other is known as static friction. When there is motion, a different force applies, namely kinetic friction. Objects that vibrate encounter both forces of friction and are repeatedly at rest for nonzero lengths of time. This is known as stick-slip motion, see Fig. 1.2(b). Piecewise-smooth systems are commonly used to model stickslip systems [Szalai and Osinga (2008); Batako et al. (2007); Csernák and Stépán (2006); di Bernardo et al. (2003); Dankowicz and Nordmark (2000); Cone and Zadoks (1995)]. Chaotic dynamics abound in such systems, as do sliding bifurcations. Popular applications include brake systems, turbines and oil drilling. For modeling friction see [Wiercigroch and De Kraker (2000); Popp (2000); Awrejcewicz and Lamarque (2003); Abadie (2000)]. Mathematical models of economics systems are often nonsmooth as a result of non-negativity conditions or optimization. For instance individuals may make different investment decisions at different times to maximize wealth [Caballé et al. (2006)]. A version of the Hicks’ trade cycle model is described by the discrete-time system Yt = cYt−1 + It , It = max(a(Yt−1 − Yt−2 ), −d) ,

(1.3)

where Yt and It denote income and investment respectively and a, c and d are positive-valued constants [Puu and Sushko (2006)]. The investment is proportional to the change in income and may be negative, but cannot be so negative that wealth would have to be actively destroyed. This puts a lower bound on investment, which, as in (1.3), may be modeled with a piecewise-linear function. In production-distribution models, nonsmoothness typically arises when a supplier has insufficient goods to meet demand [Mosekilde and Laugesen (2007); Laugesen and Mosekilde (2006)]. In a model of a socialist economy, there are upper and lower bounds on investment [Hommes et al. (1995)]. The examples listed above are discrete-time models (i.e. maps) as is common in economics. Furthermore, each example is piecewise-smooth continuous and has been shown to exhibit a variety of border-collision bifurcations. Piecewise-smooth models are utilized in many other fields, such as biology and physiology [Casey et al. (2006); Zhao et al. (2008); Alur et al.

November 26, 2009

8

15:34



(2001); Rosen (1970); Keener and Sneyd (1998)]. The model of yeast growth investigated in Chapter 4 is such an example due to assumptions regarding switching between metabolic pathways. So-called Glass networks are used as a framework to model a variety of biological systems, most notably switching of feedback responses in gene regulation [Killough and Edwards (2005); Edwards (2000); Plahte and Kjøglum. (2005); Gouzé and Sari (2002)]. The characterizing feature of these networks is that variables change continuously but depend only on the sign of the variables. Piecewise-smooth systems have also been utilized in an evolutionary model [Dercole (2005)], a predator-prey system [Kuznetsov et al. (2003)], a forest fire model [Dercole and Maggi (2005)] and epidemics [Breban et al. (2007)].

1.2

A Framework for Local Behavior

This section describes equations governing dynamical behavior near a generic discontinuous or border-collision bifurcation that occurs at a smooth point on a switching manifold. Bifurcations at nonsmooth points on switching manifolds or at the intersection of multiple switching manifolds require an extra codimension to occur (unless there is a special symmetry, perhaps arising from assumptions concerning the underlying physical system being modeled) and for this reason are not discussed here, see for instance [Leine (2006); Leine and Nijmeijer (2004)]. Local to a single switching manifold a piecewise-smooth, continuous, autonomous, ODE system may be written as ½ (L) f (x; ξ), H(x; ξ) ≤ 0 x˙ = , (1.4) f (R) (x; ξ), H(x; ξ) ≥ 0 where f (L) , f (R) : RN × RM → RN are C k and H : RN × RM → R is C l . By continuity, f (L) (x; ξ) = f (R) (x; ξ) whenever H(x; ξ) = 0. The switching manifold is the parameter dependent set, Mξ = {x ∈ RN | H(x; ξ) = 0}. If, when (x; ξ) = (0; 0), we have H = 0 and ∇x H 6= 0, then locally M0 is a curve in phase space that intersects the origin. Using coordinate transformations similar to those given in [di Bernardo et al. (2001b)], we may assume to lth order that H is simply equal to, say, x1 . The effects of nonsmoothness of switching manifolds on dynamical behavior is beyond the scope of this book. For this reason it is assumed that l is sufficiently large to not affect local dynamics and for simplicity H is set identically equal to x1 . The switching manifold is then the plane x1 = 0 and in what follows the left half-system refers to f (L) and the right half-system refers to f (R) .

bifurcations

November 26, 2009

15:34



bifurcations

9

Assume the origin is an equilibrium when ξ = 0. Since the origin lies on the switching manifold and (1.4) is continuous, it is an equilibrium of both left and right half-systems. To unfold this scenario with a onedimensional parameter, we assume that in one half-system (we choose the right half-system without loss of generality) this equilibrium exists for all ξ in a neighborhood of 0. Thus we assume det(Dx f (R) (0; 0)) 6= 0 ,

(1.5)

that is, for the right half-system, zero is not an associated eigenvalue of the origin when ξ = 0. Then by the implicit function theorem, locally, the right half-system has an equilibrium, x∗(R) (ξ), with x∗(R) (0) = 0 and C k dependent upon ξ. As is generically the case, we may assume the distance the equilibrium is from the switching manifold varies linearly with some choice of linear change in parameter values. Without loss of generality we may assume ξ1 (the first component of ξ ∈ RM ) is a suitable choice. That is ∗(R)

∂x1 (0) 6= 0 . ∂ξ1

(1.6)

Let µ = ξ1 and η ∈ RM −1 denote the remaining components of ξ. By the implicit function theorem, there is a C k function φ1 : RM −1 → R such that ∗(R) x1 (φ1 (η), η) = 0. In other words when µ = φ1 (η), the equilibrium lies on the switching manifold. By performing the nonlinear change of coordinates µ 7→ µ − φ1 (η) , ∗(R)

x 7→ x − x

(φ1 (η), η) ,

(1.7) (1.8)

we may factor µ out of the constant term in the system, i.e. f (L) (0; µ, η) = f (R) (0; µ, η) = µb(µ, η) + o(k) ,

(1.9)

where b is C k−1 . Notice the transformation does not alter the switching manifold. The system is now ½ (L) f (x; µ, η), x1 ≤ 0 x˙ = , (1.10) f (R) (x; µ, η), x1 ≥ 0 with f (i) (x; µ, η) = µb(µ, η) + Ai (µ, η)x + O(|x|2 ) + o(k) ,

(1.11)

where AL and AR are N × N real-valued matrices, C k−1 dependent upon µ and η. By continuity, the two half-systems of (1.10) must agree whenever

November 26, 2009

10

15:34


bifurcations


x1 = 0. Therefore all but possibly the first columns of AL and AR are identical, i.e. AL ei = AR ei , ∀i 6= 1 .

(1.12)

Thus we have constructed a general system which exhibits a discontinuous bifurcation at µ = 0 (unless no bifurcation occurs, see Sec. 1.5). The above procedure may also be applied to the map ½ (L) f (x; ξ), H(x; ξ) ≤ 0 0 . (1.13) x = f (R) (x; ξ), H(x; ξ) ≥ 0 If the Jacobian of the right half-system does not have a multiplier of 1 at (x; ξ) = (0; 0) and the distance of the fixed point of the right half-system from the switching manifold varies linearly with some linear change in ξ, then (1.13) may be simplified to ½ (L) f (x; µ, η), x1 ≤ 0 0 x = , (1.14) f (R) (x; µ, η), x1 ≥ 0 with (1.11). The map (1.14) with (1.11) will be used in later chapters to investigate border-collision bifurcations. The parameter, η, is useful only in situations of codimension at least two as studied in later chapters. For the remainder of this chapter the η dependency is omitted for clarity. An alternate form for (1.11) that replaces the piecewise component of the ODE system or map with an absolute value function, is often conve1 nient. If A = 21 (AR + AL ) and ζeT 1 = 2 (AR − AL ) (recall (1.12)), then Ai x = Ax + |x1 |ζ ,

(1.15)

which is sometimes called a Lur’e-like form [Carmona et al. (2002)]. The canonical piecewise-linear representation of Chua [Chua and Deng (1988); Kang and Chua (1978)] that is used to describe many circuit systems may be written as a combination of equations of the form (1.15), see [Li et al. (2001); Julián et al. (1999)]. It is now argued that for small µ and x, structurally stable dynamics of the piecewise-linear approximation to (1.10) are exhibited by (1.10) (the same argument holds for the map (1.14)). Let ε > 0 be given and suppose, |x|, µ = O(ε). If µ = 0, (1.10) with (1.11) becomes ½ AL (0)x + O(ε), x1 ≤ 0 x˙ = . (1.16) AR (0)x + O(ε), x1 ≥ 0 x . Then Otherwise when µ 6= 0, let z = |µ| ½ sgn(µ)b(0) + AL (0)z + O(ε), z1 ≤ 0 z˙ = , sgn(µ)b(0) + AR (0)z + O(ε), z1 ≥ 0

(1.17)

November 26, 2009

15:34



bifurcations

11

where sgn(µ) represents the sign of µ. Omitting terms that are at least order ε yields ½ σb(0) + AL (0)w, w1 ≤ 0 w˙ = , (1.18) σb(0) + AR (0)w, w1 ≥ 0 where σ = −1, 0, 1. (When σ 6= 0, some authors choose to call (1.18) piecewise-affine since the linear components do not necessarily intersect the origin.) By definition, structurally stable dynamics of (1.18) are also exhibited by (1.10) for sufficiently small ε. The upshot of this is that to investigate structurally stable dynamics of the nonlinear system (1.10) near (x; µ) = (0; 0), it suffices to study the piecewise-linear system (1.18) for σ = −1, 0, 1. Furthermore, since x = |µ|z, any structurally stable, bounded invariant of (1.18) is exhibited by (1.10) and shrinks linearly in size to 0, as µ → 0. In other words, invariants created at the bifurcation grow in size linearly with respect to µ. This is one of the most characteristic features of discontinuous and border-collision bifurcations and is evident throughout this book. Not surprisingly many researchers have performed detailed investigations into piecewise-linear systems. Although such systems appear simple (solutions to the linear components may be computed explicitly) they may exhibit very complicated dynamics. For instance a relatively early paper in this area by Colin Sparrow [Sparrow (1981)], describes a three-dimensional system of the form (1.18) exhibiting Sil’nikov homoclinic chaos. Also, determination of the stability of the origin for (1.18) when σ = 0 is a very difficult problem, see [Casey et al. (2006); Iwatani and Shinji (2006); Gon¸calves et al. (2003)], despite radial symmetry allowing the flow to be projected onto the lower dimensional manifold, SN −1 [Hadeler (1992)]. It has recently been shown in three dimensions, even when the equilibrium in both half-systems is stable (i.e. AL (0) and AR (0) are Hurwitzian, that is, their eigenvalues all have negative real part) the equilibrium in the full system may not be stable [Carmona et al. (2006)]. (For a piecewise-linear, discontinuous system this behavior may occur in two dimensions [Branicky (1998)].) Instead of invariant planes, there may be invariant cones [K¨ upper (2008); Carmona et al. (2005b)]. Similar behavior appears in piecewise-linear, continuous maps. Determining the stability of a fixed point on a switching manifold in only two dimensions is also a difficult problem [Do et al. (2008)]. A bordercollision bifurcation is said to be dangerous if the fixed point on each side of the bifurcation is stable, but at the bifurcation it is not [Ganguli and Banerjee (2005); Do (2007); Do and Baek (2006); Hassouneh et al. (2004)].

November 26, 2009

12

15:34


bifurcations


This section is concluded with an important lemma concerning the piecewise-linear, continuous map ½ σb + AL w, w1 ≤ 0 . (1.19) w0 = σb + AR w, w1 ≥ 0 Lemma 1.1. The map (1.19) is a homeomorphism if and only if det(AL ) det(AR ) > 0. Proof. In order for (1.19) to be a homeomorphism each half-map must be a homeomorphism, thus we require both AL and AR to be nonsingular. Assume AL and AR are nonsingular and let f denote the map (1.19). By continuity of f , AL and AR differ in only possibly the first column, therefore A−1 L AR and I also differ in only possibly the first column. Hence, −1 eT 1 AL AR =

det(AR ) T e . det(AL ) 1

(1.20)

If det(AL ) det(AR ) < 0, by (1.20) the first component of the vector A−1 L AR e1 is negative, hence −1 f (A−1 L AR e1 ) = σb + AL (AL AR e1 ) = σb + AR e1 = f (e1 ) .

Thus f is not a one-to-one function because A−1 L AR e1 6= e1 , therefore in this case f is not a homeomorphism. Conversely, if det(AL ) det(AR ) > 0, f is a homeomorphism because it has the following well-defined inverse ½ −1 AL (y − σb), t ≤ 0 f −1 (y) = , A−1 R (y − σb), t ≥ 0 −1 T −1 where t = eT 1 AR (y − σb), because by (1.20), e1 AL (y − σb) = det(AR ) T −1 ¤ det(AL ) e1 AR (y − σb) has the same sign as t.

When (1.19) is non-homeomorphic its range is not the full space, R . Various non-homeomorphic, piecewise-linear, continuous maps are discussed in [Kapitaniak and Maistrenko (1999); Sushko and Gardini (2006); Gardini et al. (2006a)]. N

1.3

Existence of Equilibria and Fixed Points

The previous section introduced the systems (1.10) and (1.14), with (1.11), to describe dynamics local to discontinuous and border-collision bifurcations respectively. The current section looks at equilibria of the ODE system (1.10) as in, for instance [Leine and Nijmeijer (2004); Leine (2006);

November 26, 2009

15:34


bifurcations


13

di Bernardo et al. (2008a)]. The given method is easily adapted for the map (1.14). In fact it was for the discrete-time case that the method was originally formulated by Mark Feigin in the 1970’s [Feigin (1974, 1978, 1995)]. When µ = 0, the origin is an equilibrium of (1.10) and lies on the switching manifold. By the implicit function theorem, if det(AL (0)), det(AR (0)) 6= 0, each half-system of (1.10) has a unique equilibrium in a neighborhood of (x; µ) = (0, 0) given by x∗(i) (µ) = −Ai (0)−1 b(0)µ + O(µ2 ) .

(1.21)

(If one of AL (0) or AR (0) is singular the bifurcation is codimension-two and nonlinear terms become important, see Sec. 3.1.) The equilibrium, x∗(L) , is an equilibrium of the full system, (1.10), and said to be admissible whenever ∗(L) ≤ 0, otherwise it is said to be virtual. Similarly, x∗(R) , is admissible x1 ∗(R) ∗(i) exactly when x1 ≥ 0, An expression for x1 to determine values of µ ∗(i) for which each x is admissible is now derived. As detailed in Appendix C, the adjugate matrices of AL and AR share the same first row, T T %T ode (µ) = e1 adj(AL (µ)) = e1 adj(AR (µ)) .

(1.22)

Using (C.1) the first component of the equilibrium, (1.21), is %T (0)b(0) ∗(i) µ + O(µ2 ) . x1 (µ) = − ode det(Ai (0)) ∗(R)

In the previous section the assumption was made that x1 with respect to ξ1 = µ, (1.6), therefore %T ode (0)b(0) 6= 0 ,

(1.23)

varies linearly (1.24)

%T ode (0)b(0) det(Ai (0)) .

hence admissibility is determined by the sign of There are two cases. If det(AL (0)) and det(AR (0)) have the same sign then x∗(L) and x∗(R) are admissible for different signs of µ. Therefore, in a neighborhood of (x; µ) = (0; 0), (1.10) has a unique equilibrium. Alternatively if det(AL (0)) and det(AR (0)) have opposite sign, x∗(L) and x∗(R) are admissible for the same sign of µ and collide and annihilate at the origin as µ → 0. The first case is known as persistence, the second is called a nonsmooth fold. A similar analysis may be applied to the map (1.14). If det(I − AL (0)), det(I − AR (0)) 6= 0, each half-map of (1.14) has a unique fixed point in a neighborhood of (x; µ) = (0, 0) with first component %T map (0)b(0) ∗(i) µ + O(µ2 ) , (1.25) x1 = det(I − Ai (0))

November 26, 2009

15:34

14


bifurcations


where T T %T map (µ) = e1 adj(I − AL (µ)) = e1 adj(I − AR (µ)) .

1.4

(1.26)

The Observer Canonical Form

To analyze any local bifurcation from a general point of view it is often a good idea to first obtain a normal form. This section describes the observer canonical form for discontinuous and border-collision bifurcations, as in [Carmona et al. (2002); di Bernardo et al. (2008a)]. (For a different approach see [Bemporad et al. (2000)].) The word canonical instead of normal is used because in smooth bifurcation theory, normal forms have a precise meaning [Kuznetsov (2004); Arnold (1988)]. This section explains why the canonical form may only be obtained when the linearizations of the left and right half-systems have no eigenspace tangent to the switching manifold at the bifurcation. Call an N ×N matrix whose ith column is ei−1 for all i 6= 1, a companion matrix. For example ¯   −∆1 ¯ 1 ¯  −∆2 ¯ 1   ¯   ¯ .. ..  C= (1.27) ¯  , . .  ¯   −∆N −1 ¯  1 ¯ −∆N ¯ is a companion matrix, where each ∆i ∈ R. Alternatively companion matrices may be defined so that the first N − 1 columns are standard basis vectors [Dummit and Foote (2004); Hartley and Hawkes (1970)]. Such matrices are similar to (1.27) via transformation by a unitary matrix, hence the difference is immaterial (in fact some authors choose the first N − 1 rows or the last N − 1 rows). The characteristic polynomial of C, (1.27), is p(λ) ≡ det(λI − C) = λN + ∆1 λN −1 + ∆2 λN −2 + · · · + ∆N .

(1.28)

Every N ×N matrix, A, has a unique characteristic polynomial, (1.28), and a unique companion matrix, C, with the same characteristic polynomial. With the idea of applying a similarity transformation, one might like to know when a given matrix A is similar to its companion C. The answer is that A and C are similar if and only if there exists no monic polynomial, p∗ , of degree less than N with p∗ (A) = 0, [Dummit and Foote (2004);

November 26, 2009

15:34



bifurcations

15

Hartley and Hawkes (1970); Turnbull and Aitken (1932)]. When A is not similar to C, it is instead similar to a block diagonal matrix with each block in companion form. This matrix (else the matrix C, when A and C are similar), is known as the rational canonical form of A and is a popular standard matrix form like the Jordan normal form [Dummit and Foote (2004); Hartley and Hawkes (1970); Turnbull and Aitken (1932)]. However, when transforming the piecewise-smooth systems (1.10) and (1.14), we require that the transformation does not perturb the switching manifold. Thus we would like to know when A and C are similar and a similarity transform exists·that¸leaves the surface x1 = 0 unchanged. For 10 example the matrix A = is similar to its companion matrix, C = 23 · ¸ 4 1 , but any appropriate similarity transform must perturb x1 = 0. −3 0 To resolve this question, as in [Carmona et al. (2002)], the control theory concept of observability [Sontag (1998); Fairman (1998); Vincent and Grantham (1997); Trentelman et al. (2001)] is extended to piecewisesmooth, continuous systems. Definition 1.1. The ODE system (1.10) or the map (1.14) is said to be observable if the observability matrix   T e1 AL (0)N −1   ..   . (1.29) O=  ,  eT AL (0)  1

eT 1

is nonsingular. Note, it is easily shown that invertibility of (1.29) is independent of the first column of AL (0). Consequently, by continuity, (1.12), it is irrelevant which of AL and AR is used in the above definition. The following lemma provides a geometric interpretation of the notion of observability. Lemma 1.2. The ODE system (1.10) [the map (1.14)] is observable if and only if AL (0) has no eigenspace orthogonal to e1 . Proof. Let A = AL (0). Suppose A has an eigenspace orthogonal to e1 . Let v 6= 0 be an element of such an eigenspace. Then Ak v is also an element k of this eigenspace for all k ∈ N. Thus eT 1 A v = 0 for all k. Thus Ov = 0 and therefore O is singular.

November 26, 2009

15:34

16


bifurcations


Conversely, suppose O is singular. Then ∃v 6= 0 with Ov = 0. Thus = 0 for k = 0, . . . , N − 1. Thus the N vectors v, . . . , AN −1 v are contained in a (N − 1)-dimensional linear subspace and are therefore linearly dependent. Let m be the maximum value of k for which the vectors v, . . . , Ak v are linearly independent. Then Ak v ∈ span{v, . . . , Am v} ≡ Λ, for all k, since by an inductive argument, if Ak−1 v ∈ Λ, then Ak v = A(Ak−1 v) = A(α0 v + · · · + αm Am v) = α0 Av + · · · + αm Am+1 v ∈ Λ. It follows that Λ is either an eigenspace or the span of several eigenspaces orthogonal to e1 . ¤

k eT 1A v

is easy · Observability ¸ · ¸to verify for two-dimensional systems. If AL (0) = ab ab , then O = , thus det(O) = −b. Therefore the system is cd 10 observable if and only if b 6= 0. Notice that b 6= 0 whenever AL (0) has complex-valued eigenvalues, thus we have the following result (which also follows immediately from Lemma 1.2). Corollary 1.1. If the ODE system (1.10) [the map (1.14)] is twodimensional and AL (0) has complex-valued eigenvalues then (1.10) [(1.14)] is observable. Corollary 1.1 will be used in later chapters. The next result introduces the transformation matrix required in Theorem 1.1. Lemma 1.3. Let CL be the unique companion matrix with the same characteristic polynomial as AL (0). Then there exists a nonsingular, real-valued, N × N matrix, T , with T eT 1 T = e1 ,

T AL (0)T

−1

= CL ,

(1.30) (1.31)

if and only if the system (1.10) [the map (1.14)] is observable. A proof of this result is given in Appendix A and is essentially taken from the control theory textbook of Stephen Barnett [Barnett (1975)]. Also, note that by continuity (1.12), it follows the matrix T provides a similarity transformation for AR (0) to its companion matrix CR . Theorem 1.1. Suppose the ODE system (1.10) [the map (1.14)] is observable and %T (0)b(0) 6= 0. Then there exists a nonlinear transformation x ˆ = Tˆ(µ)(x − ψ(µ)) ,

(1.32)

µ ˆ = α(µ) ,

(1.33)

November 26, 2009

15:34



bifurcations

17

T 0 ˆ with eT 1 T (µ) = e1 , ψ1 (µ) = 0 and α (0) 6= 0 such that (1.11) becomes the k C function

fˆ(ˆ x; µ ˆ) = µ êN + Ci (ˆ µ)ˆ x + O(|ˆ x|2 ) + o(k) ,

(1.34)

where Ci is a companion matrix, for sufficiently small µ. See Appendix A for a proof. The ODE system (1.10) or the map (1.14) with (1.34) in place of (1.11) is known as the observer canonical form. Some authors choose a vector other than eN in (1.34) as part of their canonical form. For the moment, call this vector q. It becomes apparent in the proof of Theorem 1.1, that in the continuous-time case q may be any vector not orthogonal to eN , whereas in the discrete-time case q may be any vector not orthogonal to (1, . . . , 1)T and in this case often q = e1 is chosen instead. For this book the vector q = eN is chosen because it may be used in both cases. Whenever (1.10) or (1.14) is not observable it may be decomposed into two lower-dimensional decoupled systems [Fairman (1998)]. One of these systems will be piecewise-smooth, the other will be smooth but possibly non-autonomous. Consequently, nonsmoothness for a non-observable system occurs inside a space of dimension less than N . Theorem 1.1 allows investigations into discontinuous and bordercollision bifurcations to be greatly simplified. Dynamical behavior of the general system (1.4) local to a discontinuous bifurcation that is nondegenerate in the sense that, a) it may be transformed to (1.10) with (1.11), b) the dynamics are structurally stable, and c) it is observable, are described by a piecewise-linear system of the form, ½ µeN + CL x, x1 ≤ 0 x˙ = . (1.35) µeN + CR x, x1 ≥ 0 In other words, the system (1.35) may exhibit any such non-degenerate discontinuous bifurcation. The elements of the first columns of the N × N matrices CL and CR are the only values that may be altered, therefore a complete analysis of non-degenerate discontinuous bifurcations may be accomplished by considering all variations of these 2N values. Since there is a one-to-one relation between companion matrices and characteristic polynomials, this is equivalent to considering all possible characteristic polynomials for both CL and CR . Note, the eigenvalues of CL and CR are the associated eigenvalues of the left and right equilibria of (1.35): x∗(i) = −µCi−1 eN ,

(1.36)

November 26, 2009

18

15:34


bifurcations


when they are well-defined. Consequently we have the following statement: dynamical behavior local to a non-degenerate, discontinuous bifurcation [border-collision bifurcation] is uniquely determined by the associated eigenvalues [multipliers] of the left and right equilibria (1.36) [fixed points].

1.5

Discontinuous Bifurcations

As described earlier, a bifurcation arising from the perturbation of a piecewise-smooth, continuous, ODE system with an equilibrium on a switching manifold is known as a discontinuous bifurcation. The previous three sections have derived a generically valid canonical form, (1.10) with (1.34), and shown that local structurally stable dynamics are determined by linear terms. Either a single equilibrium exists on each side of the bifurcation (persistence) or two equilibria exist on exactly one side (nonsmooth fold). Other invariants, such as periodic orbits, may be created at the bifurcation. This section discusses the the typical nature of discontinuous bifurcations. In general, a discontinuous bifurcation is either the analogue of a well-known, smooth bifurcation or novel and unique to piecewise-smooth systems. For smooth systems a local bifurcation occurs when one or more eigenvalues associated with an equilibrium cross the imaginary axis as a system parameter is continuously varied, Fig. 1.4(a). In contrast, as an equilibrium is followed through a discontinuous bifurcation, its associated eigenvalues may change discontinuously (panel (b)). The Jacobian of the equilibrium of each half-system of (1.10), (1.34), is given by Ji (µ) = Ci (0) + O(1) .

(1.37)

Therefore the critical eigenvalues are those of CL (0) and CR (0). Here the eigenvalue path concept of Remco Leine and coworkers that attempts to classify discontinuous bifurcations is introduced. As in [Leine (2006); Leine and Nijmeijer (2004)], since the Jacobian is undefined at µ = 0, we instead consider the generalized Jacobian Jˆ = convex hull (JL (0), JR (0)) ¯ ½ ¾ ¯ = (1 − s)JL (0) + sJR (0) ¯¯ s ∈ [0, 1] . (1.38) We can treat the eigenvalues of Jˆ as defining a unique path of eigenvalues at the discontinuity as s is varied from 0 to 1, see Fig. 1.4(b). This is

November 26, 2009

15:34


bifurcations


Im

Im

Re

(a)

19

Re

(b)

Fig. 1.4: Sketches of eigenvalues under variation of a system parameter near a local bifurcation in a smooth system, panel (a), and a piecewise-smooth, continuous system, panel (b). called the eigenvalue path. Let n ˆ denote the number of values of s for which (1 − s)AL + sAR has one or more eigenvalues on the imaginary axis. The idea is that n ˆ represents the possible degree of complexity of the discontinuous bifurcation. It is conjectured that if n ˆ = 0 then no bifurcation occurs at µ = 0. This has been verified for many examples but to the author’s knowledge has yet to be proved [Leine (2006); Leine and Nijmeijer (2004)]. If n ˆ = 1, the discontinuous bifurcation is called a single-crossing bifurcation. Leine et al. observe that single-crossing bifurcations invariably appear to be the analogue of some familiar smooth bifurcation. Fig. 1.5 illustrates discontinuous analogues of saddle-node and Hopf bifurcations (see [Leine and Nijmeijer (2004)] for transcritical and pitchfork-like bifurcations). Finally if n ˆ > 1, the bifurcation is called a multiple-crossing bifurcation and may not have a smooth counterpart, see Sec. 2.3 for examples. Such bifurcations can sometimes be regarded as the coincidence of one or more smooth bifurcations but this is not always the case. However, until conjectures regarding the distinction between singlecrossing and multiple-crossing bifurcations can be resolved in systems of arbitrary dimension, it is not obvious that the generalized Jacobian provides the most useful connection between the left and right limiting eigenvalues. Any path connecting the limiting eigenvalues is in some sense artificial. It seems reasonable that the ideal theory of discontinuous bifurcations should be path independent. In one and two-dimensional systems codimension-one, discontinuous bi-

November 26, 2009

20

15:34


bifurcations


(a)

(b)

Fig. 1.5: Schematic diagrams of discontinuous analogues of a saddle-node bifurcation, panel (a), and a supercritical Hopf bifurcation, panel (b). Stable [unstable] equilibria are indicated by a solid [dashed] line. Maximum and minimum values of a periodic orbit are shown with double lines. furcations are well-understood. The 1998 paper of Freire et al. [Freire et al. (1998)], derives all generic discontinuous bifurcation scenarios for a general planar piecewise-linear system. These are summarized in Chapter 2 where selected results are extended to piecewise-smooth systems. As mentioned in Sec. 1.2, in higher dimensions many complications can arise.

1.6

Border-Collision Bifurcations

The pioneering 1992 paper of Nusse and Yorke [Nusse and Yorke (1992)] coins the term border-collision bifurcation (see also [Hommes and Nusse (1991)]) to refer to a bifurcation resulting from the collision of a fixed point with a switching manifold in a piecewise-smooth, continuous map. (More recently this term has also been used to include similar bifurcations in piecewise-smooth maps with an alternate nonsmoothness classification.) Outside the western world, in the 1970’s Mark Feigin studied these bifurcations and gave them the name C-bifurcations [Feigin (1970)] for the Russian word ˇsvejnye for “sewing”. This section restates the result in Sec. 1.3 concerning the existence of fixed points of (1.14) in terms of critical multipliers as originally derived by Feigin. Known phenomena relating to border-collision bifurcations is then overviewed. From (1.25) it is seen that for small values of µ, the fixed point, x∗(i) , exists exactly when det(I − Ai (0)) is nonsingular. If x∗(i) exists and %T map (0)b(0) 6= 0, then the sign of µ for which the fixed point is admis-

November 26, 2009

15:34



bifurcations

21

sible is determined by the sign of det(I − Ai (0)). Feigin noticed that this sign depends on the number of real multipliers of Ai (0) greater than 1, call + + this number σi+ . It follows that if σL + σR is even, then a single fixed ∗(L) ∗(R) point persists (i.e. x and x are admissible for opposite signs of µ). + + Conversely, if σL + σR is odd then the bifurcation is a nonsmooth fold. A similar condition exists for 2-cycles comprised of one point in each half-plane. Chapter 6 shows that such a cycle exists exactly when det(I − AL (0)AR (0)) is nonsingular and in the absence of nonlinear terms has no points on the switching manifold if and only if det(I + AL (0)) and det(I + AR (0)) are both nonsingular. As shown in [di Bernardo et al. − − (1999)], the 2-cycle is admissible for one sign of µ if and only if σL + σR − is odd, where σi denotes the number of real multipliers of Ai (0) less than -1. As with any structurally stable bounded invariant of (1.14) that exists for small values of µ, the 2-cycle shrinks linearly to a point as µ → 0. Consequently, the border-collision bifurcation may resemble a period-doubling bifurcation. Effective period-doubling via a border-collision bifurcation has recently been suggested to play an important role in cardiac dynamics [Zhao et al. (2008); Zhao and Schaeffer (2007)]. Determining the existence and admissibility of cycles of higher period in terms of the multipliers of AL and AR is a far more difficult task, see Chapter 6. For an extension of Feigin’s results to piecewise-smooth, discontinuous maps, see [Dutta et al. (2008)]. Under smooth parameter variation, periodic cycles may collide with a switching manifold. Remarkably, the unfolding of an n-cycle that has one point on a switching manifold leads the to same general form as for fixed points, i.e. (1.14) with (1.11). This is shown in Chapter 6. Hence Feigin’s results may also be used to determine the admissibility of n and 2n-cycles local to this border-collision bifurcation [di Bernardo et al. (1999)]. In one dimension, (1.14) is completely understood [di Bernardo et al. (2008a)]. Here aL = AL (0) and aR = AR (0) are scalars and together with µ form a three-dimensional parameter space within which all codimensionone bifurcations are contained. By scaling and symmetry considerations, we may assume b = 1, and aL ≥ 0. If also aR > 0, then for small values of µ the map is a non-decreasing function and displays only simple dynamics. Thus we assume aR ≤ 0. The map exhibits persistence if aL < 1 and a nonsmooth fold if aL > 1. When µ ≤ 0, fixed points are the only possible invariant sets. When µ > 0 there is the possibility for complex dynamics. Only local non-degenerate dynamics are of interest here, hence, as detailed in Sec. 1.2, it suffices to investigate the piecewise-linear approxima-

November 26, 2009

15:34


22

bifurcations


tion

½ 0

x =

µ + aL x, x ≤ 0 . µ + aR x, x ≥ 0

(1.39)

Fig. 1.6 illustrates stable solutions of (1.39) when µ > 0, also described in [di Bernardo et al. (2008a, 1999); Nusse and Yorke (1995); Banerjee et al. (2000a)]. At any point in the diagram there exists at most one attracting set [di Bernardo et al. (2008a)]. The fixed point, x∗(L) , is admissible whenever aL > 1 but is never stable. The fixed point, x∗(R) , is always admissible and is stable whenever aR > −1. The only admissible, stable periodic cycles are those with exactly one positive-valued point. Regions of existence are

0

0

aL

0.5

1

1

−1

2 −5

3 −10

a

R

4 −15

5 Fig. 1.6: A bifurcation set of the one-dimensional, piecewise-linear, continuous map (1.39) when µ > 0. Gray regions correspond to the existence of an admissible, attracting, periodic solution of the indicated period. Dotted 1−an−1 L curves given by aR = − an−2 −a n−1 correspond to border-collision bifurcaL

L

1 correspond to a loss tions of n-cycles. Dashed curves given by aR = − an−1 L of stability of the cycles via an associated multiplier attaining the value -1. Inside the white region left of the vertical dash-dot line there exist chaotic attractors.

November 26, 2009

15:34



bifurcations

23

shown in Fig. 1.6 up to period 5 (periodic cycles for all n > 5 exist at larger negative values of aR than shown in the figure). Stability is lost when an associated multiplier continuously crosses the critical value -1. Due to the piecewise-linear nature of the map, this bifurcation does not correspond to a period-doubling bifurcation. Instead a chaotic attractor is born. The chaotic attractor is robust in the sense that there are no periodic windows [Banerjee et al. (1998)] (a property that has only recently been found in smooth maps [Andrecut and Ali (2001)]). In addition to stable periodic solutions, there exist many unstable periodic solutions in accordance with Sharkovskii’s Theorem, see [Sharkovskii (1995); Li and Yorke (1975)]. In more than one dimension, (1.14) may exhibit extremely complicated dynamics such as multiple strange or quasiperiodic attractors. Analytical investigations commonly utilize the canonical form, (1.34). There is no restriction on the first columns of CL and CR , therefore in N dimensions a complete investigation of (1.14) with (1.34) requires variation of exactly 2N independent parameters in addition to µ. Several recent publications present partial classifications in two dimensions. In [Banerjee and Grebogi (1999)] (and continued [Banerjee et al. (2000b)]), the authors describe 11 qualitatively different types of bordercollision bifurcations under the physically motivated restriction that (1.14) is dissipative (i.e. det(CL ), det(CR ) < 0). In the case that the multipliers of CL and CR are real-valued a classification of fixed points and 2-cycles is given in [di Bernardo et al. (1999)]. In [Zhusubaliyev et al. (2006, 2008)] the authors allow for complex-valued multipliers and describe the creation of invariant circles on which the dynamics generically are either quasiperiodic or tend to an attracting periodic solution. In the latter case there also exists a saddle-type solution of the same period. Homoclinic tangles arise when one-dimensional invariant manifolds of the saddle-type solution intersect, implying the existence of homoclinic solutions and Smale horseshoes [Zhusubaliyev et al. (2006); Belghith (2000)]. Multiple attractors may coexist; boundaries between basins of attraction often appear fractal [Sushko and Gardini (2006); Dutta et al. (1999); Nusse et al. (1994)]. A border-collision bifurcation from chaos to hyper-chaos (behavior characterized by two positive Lyapunov exponents) has been described in [Thamilmaran et al. (2004)]. Also, a sequence of nested spirals has been observed in a three-dimensional, piecewise-linear, continuous map that models an electrical circuit [Bonatto and Gallas (2008)]. For basic border-collision bifurcations in three-dimensional maps, see [Roy and Roy (2008)]. Particularly when CL and CR have complex-valued multipliers, it is

November 26, 2009

24

15:34



of interest to compute regions in parameter space within which periodic solutions of a particular period or rotation number exist and are attracting. As with circle maps, such regions are called resonance tongues (or Arnold tongues). In contrast to smooth systems, resonance tongues in piecewise-smooth, continuous systems typically exhibit a distinctive lenschain structure. This was first observed for a one-dimensional, piecewiselinear circle map [Yang and Hao (1987)] and has since been described for the map (1.14), in [Zhusubaliyev et al. (2006)], for other two-dimensional, piecewise-linear maps [Zhusubaliyev and Mosekilde (2008b); Sushko and Gardini (2006); Gardini et al. (2006b); Sushko et al. (2004)], and higher dimensional maps [Zhusubaliyev et al. (2003, 2002)]. Lens-chains are not observed in Fig. 1.6 because a minimum of two dimensions are required to realize these structures for (1.14). A detailed analysis of lens-chain structures is presented in Chapter 6.

1.7

Poincar´ e Maps and Discontinuity Maps

Let Π be an (N − 1)-dimensional manifold, contained in the phase space of an N -dimensional, ODE system. The Poincaré map for Π, is a function g : Π → Π, where for any p ∈ Π, g(p) is the next intersection of the trajectory of the ODE system passing through p, if such a point exists. Poincaré maps are often ill-defined globally [Lee et al. (2008)]. It is usual to study a Poincaré map locally, say in a neighborhood of a periodic orbit (where g(p) = p) and choose the Poincaré section, Π, such that intersections are transversal. Poincaré maps are ubiquitous in dynamical systems, fundamental for studying periodic orbits and more complicated oscillatory behavior such as strange attractors [Glendinning (1999); Robinson (2004); Wiggins (2003)]. This section discusses ODE systems that elicit piecewise-smooth, Poincaré maps. The main focus is on Filippov systems and emphasis is placed on particular scenarios that lead to piecewise-smooth, continuous Poincaré maps of the form (1.14) with (1.11) studied intensively in later chapters. Various non-autonomous systems yield piecewise-smooth, continuous Poincaré maps, see for example [Zhusubaliyev and Mosekilde (2006b, 2008b)] for non-autonomous Filippov models of a DC/DC buck converter and [Sieber et al. (unpublished)] for a hybrid system with delay. Poincaré maps for smooth, ODE systems are generally smooth. However they may contain discontinuities when an invariant manifold of a saddle-

bifurcations

November 26, 2009

15:34



bifurcations

25

type invariant set intersects the Poincaré section. Suppose the ODE system is Filippov and Π is a smooth Poincaré section. Of interest is the degree of smoothness of the induced Poincaré map, g, in a neighborhood of a point p ∈ Π. It is assumed that g is well-defined throughout this neighborhood and that the trajectory passing through p, call it Γ, has transversal intersections with Π at the points p and g(p). For a formal treatment of Poincaré maps in piecewise-linear systems, see [Llibre and Teruel (2004)]. The simplest case is when Γ fails to cross any switching manifolds. Here g has a well-defined Taylor series and is therefore smooth. Alternatively, suppose Γ crosses one or more switching manifolds and suppose all such crossings occur transversally (i.e. non-tangentially and without sliding, see below). Then g may be expressed as the composition of a sequence of smooth maps between switching manifolds. Hence g is also smooth in this case. Note if g(p) = p, stability of the fixed point, p, may be determined by composition of Jacobian matrices determined by smooth components of the flow with so-called saltation matrices which account for sudden angle changes of trajectories at switching manifolds that influence stability [di Bernardo et al. (2008a); Aizerman and Gantmakher (1958)]. Now suppose Γ tangentially intersects a switching manifold, Σ, at, say, the origin, see Fig. 1.7. In this case Γ is called a grazing trajectory. For a point, p0 ∈ Π, near p, if the trajectory passing through p0 intersects Σ, as in Fig. 1.7, denote the first and second intersections of this trajectory with Σ by p2 and p3 , respectively. One may express g as a composition of three maps via the sequence: p0 → p2 → p3 → g(p). However, in this form singularities arising from the local tangency appear in a global component of g (specifically in the map, p0 → p2 ). A typically preferable alternative is to incorporate all singularities into a local map known as a discontinuity map, which will now be described. Locally, Σ divides phase space into two regions. With an eye to Fig. 1.7, to aid the following discussion the region containing the point, p, is referred to as the right half-space and the second region is referred to as the left halfspace. Let ϕR t (x) denote the right half-flow (the flow in the right half-space) and ϕL (x) the left half-flow. Let Ξ be an (N − 1)-dimensional manifold t intersecting the origin and not tangent to Σ at this point. Artificially following the right half-flow from p0 , we arrive at a point p1 on Ξ. If p1 were in right half-space, by continuing from p1 along the right halfflow we would arrive at g(p0 ). However if p1 is in the left half-space, it is necessary to calculate a correction following the left half-flow from a

November 26, 2009

26

15:34


bifurcations


Σ Γ

p3

p4

p1

Ξ

0

pˆ4

Π

p2

p p0

Fig. 1.7: A phase portrait near grazing for a Filippov system. Γ is a trajectory that grazes the switching manifold, Σ, at the origin. A trajectory passing through the Poincaré section, Π, at p0 , transversely crosses Σ at p2 and p3 . Solution curves following the right [left] half-flow are shown as solid [dashed] curves. Points p1 and p4 lie on a cross-section, Ξ. The PDM is the map p1 → p4 , and the ZDM is the map p1 → pˆ4 , where pˆ4 is defined by (1.44).

different point, say p4 or pˆ4 in Fig. 1.7, in order to arrive at g(p0 ). The map, p1 → p4 , where p4 ∈ Ξ, is known as the Poincaré-section discontinuity map (PDM) [Dankowicz and Nordmark (2000); di Bernardo et al. (2001b)]. The map, p1 → pˆ4 , where the transition time from pˆ4 to p3 is equal to the transition time from p2 to p3 (via the left half-flow) minus the transition time from p2 to p1 , is known as the zero-time discontinuity map (ZDM). Usually the PDM is preferable when the ODE system is autonomous and the ZDM preferable otherwise. The following equations (where each ti denotes the positive-valued transition time between pi and pi+1 or vice-

November 26, 2009

15:34



bifurcations

27

versa) summarize Fig. 1.7: p1 = ϕR t0 (p0 ) , p2 = p3 = p4 =

ϕR −t1 (p1 ) , L ϕt2 (p2 ) , ϕR −t3 (p3 ) , R ϕt1 −t2 (p3 )

(1.40) (1.41) (1.42) (1.43)

. (1.44) pˆ4 = The Poincaré map, g, is obtained via composition of a discontinuity map with one or more global maps. When the global maps are smooth, g will exhibit the same degree of smoothness as the discontinuity map. Smoothness properties of discontinuity maps in different scenarios are now described. Note, generically, the leading order terms of the PDM and the ZDM have the same order, therefore the following discussion applies to both types of discontinuity map. In a general Filippov system, the vector field at a switching manifold may be simultaneously attracting (or repelling) from both sides. Subsets of switching manifolds where this is the case are known as sliding regions. An orbit that intersects a switching manifold at an attracting sliding region will evolve within the switching manifold until it exits the sliding region. This is known as sliding motion. Forward evolution of sliding is typically determined by Filippov’s method [Filippov (1964); Leine et al. (2000)], which takes an average of the two vector fields. In backwards time, the flow is non-unique. In Filippov models of an oscillator subject to dry friction, sliding motion corresponds to the “sticking” phase of the motion [di Bernardo et al. (2003); Casini et al. (2006); Szalai and Osinga (2008)]. Other studies of sliding include [di Bernardo et al. (2001c); Cunha et al. (2003); Kowalczyk (2005); Teixeira (1993)]. Consider again the grazing scenario depicted in Fig. 1.7. If in a neighborhood of the grazing point the left half-flow points away from the switching manifold, the discontinuity maps will be discontinuous, assuming there is some mechanism that reinjects the flow back onto the other side of the switching manifold and through the Poincaré section. For recent accounts of discontinuous maps see [di Bernardo et al. (2008a); Hogan et al. (2007); Avrutin et al. (2007); Jain and Banerjee (2003); Rakshit et al. (2008)]. Conversely, if the left half-flow points towards the switching manifold near the grazing point, there will exist an attracting sliding region. There are four distinct codimension-one sliding scenarios [di Bernardo et al. (2008a)]. The scenario shown in Fig. 1.8(a1) is known as grazing-sliding. Here the discontinuity maps will be continuous. Trajectories that enter the attracting

November 26, 2009

15:34


28

bifurcations


Σ

Σ

(a1)

(a2)

(b1)

p0

p

(b2)

Σ

(a3)

(a4) g(p0 )

g(p0 )

g(p0 )

g(p0 )

p

Σ

p0

p

(b3)

p0

p

p0

(b4)

Fig. 1.8: The top panels show phase portraits for Filippov systems with four different grazing scenarios: panel (a1) - grazing-sliding, panel (a2) - regular grazing, panel (a3) - continuous grazing, panel (a4) - grazing at a corner. Solution curves following the right [left] half-flow are shown as solid [dashed] curves. In each case it is assumed the forward and backward orbits of the grazing point transversely intersect a Poincaré section, Π, thus locally there is an induced Poincaré map, g. The generic nonsmoothness property that g possesses in any dimension is illustrated for each case in the corresponding panel below. An exception is regular grazing: in this case a 1/2-type singularity arises only if the flow is at least three-dimensional. sliding region exit on a generically (N −2)-dimensional subset of the switching manifold, Σ. Consequently the corresponding discontinuity map is not invertible. To lowest order, the Poincaré map, g will be of the form (1.14) with (1.11), and one of AL or AR will have a multiplier zero [di Bernardo et al. (2002b, 2003)]. If one-dimensional, g will resemble Fig. 1.8(b1). Now suppose there are no sliding regions in a neighborhood of the grazing point. When the grazing trajectory, Γ, is admissible, as in Fig. 1.8(a2), the grazing point is known as a regular grazing point. The criterion of

November 26, 2009

15:34



bifurcations

29

no sliding generally corresponds to adding a codimension to the bifurcation, however in practice underlying physical assumptions often eliminate the possibility for sliding motion. Furthermore, many times it is sufficient to assume that only trajectories of interest do not enter sliding regions [di Bernardo et al. (2008a)]. If the flow is discontinuous at a regular grazing point, the discontinuity maps and the Poincaré map, g, will have a squareroot singularity [di Bernardo et al. (2001b)], see Fig. 1.8(b2). (Note however this requires the flow is at least three-dimensional, if two-dimensional the square-root term vanishes since via a time-scaling the scenario may be reduced to Fig. 1.8(a3)). Maps of these form have been shown to exhibit so-called period adding cascades and direct transitions to chaos [Chin et al. (1994); Fredriksson and Nordmark (1997); Nordmark (1997, 2001)]. Alternatively if the flow is continuous at the grazing point, there is a 3/2type singularity [di Bernardo et al. (2001b)], see Fig. 1.8(a3). The map is differentiable at the nonsmooth point and generically no bifurcation occurs here, however saddle-node bifurcations have commonly been observed nearby [di Bernardo et al. (2008a)]. The same class of Poincaré maps results when the ODE system is piecewise-smooth continuous. The final situation exemplified by Fig. 1.8 is grazing at a nondifferentiable point on Σ, in the absence of sliding. This situation is known as a corner-collision. It arises naturally in many physical systems, such as a soft impacting system [Leine and Van Campen (2002); Leine et al. (2000)], shown earlier in Fig. 1.3. For further examples see [Budd and Piiroinen (2006); Osorio et al. (2008); Sieber et al. (unpublished); di Bernardo et al. (1997, 1998a)]. As detailed in [di Bernardo et al. (2001a)], the Poincaré map associated with the corner-collision in Fig. 1.8(a4) is piecewise-smooth continuous. Note that the collision of a periodic solution with a non-differentiable point on a switching manifold does not require an extra codimension to occur.

1.8

Period Adding

A relation of the well-known period-doubling cascade, a period-adding cascade is characterized by successive jumps in the period of a periodic orbit in an ODE system in a manner that forms an approximately arithmetic sequence. The increase in period corresponds to the appearance of an additional excursion of the periodic orbit through phase space. Between windows of periodicity, there are often chaotic regions but this is not always the

November 26, 2009

30

15:34



case. As with period-doubling cascades, the width of periodicity windows may decrease to zero as the period increases over a finite parameter range. In this case the periodic orbit usually limits on a homoclinic, heteroclinic or chaotic orbit. Period-adding cascades have been observed in a variety of smooth systems, such as a model of internal ocean waves [Tanaka et al. (2003)], the Chay and Rose-Hindmarsh models of neuron activity [Yang et al. (2006); Holden and Fan (1992)], a model of fluidized bed catalytic reactors [Elnashaie et al. (2001)], and the Lorenz equations [Tomita and Tsuda (1980); Tanaka et al. (2003)]. In smooth systems, each transition between adjacent periodicity windows involves a collection of familiar bifurcations, such as a period-doubling cascade to chaos over a relatively small parameter range [Tanaka et al. (2003); Yang et al. (2006)]. However the mechanisms that generate a succession of period-adding phenomena are currently not fully understood. Poincaré maps provide a useful tool for investigating period-adding behavior. When the Poincaré section is well chosen, periodic orbits in adjacent periodicity windows correspond to periodic solutions of the Poincaré map that differ in period by one. Periodicity windows of the ODE system then correspond to resonance tongues of the Poincaré map. Unlike for smooth maps, resonance tongues in piecewise-smooth maps are often ordered by their associated period. For this reason piecewise-smooth maps readily yield period-adding scenarios. 0

−10

x −20

−30 −30

−20

0 aR −10 Fig. 1.9: A bifurcation diagram of (1.39) when aL = 0.45 and µ = 1.

For instance resonance tongues of the one-dimensional, piecewise-linear,

bifurcations

November 26, 2009

15:34



bifurcations

31

continuous map (1.39), shown in Fig. 1.6, lie in order of period. Consequently, the corresponding one-parameter bifurcation diagram shown in Fig. 1.9 displays a period-adding sequence. In general period-adding sequences differ from Fig. 1.9 in two major aspects. First, periodicity windows may converge to a point. Different scaling laws apply for different classes of piecewise-smooth maps [Avrutin et al. (2007); Halse et al. (2003); Kawczy´ nski and Strizhak (2000)]. Second, a lack of smoothness allows for the transition between periodicity windows to occur via a single nonsmooth bifurcation. Thus there may be no regions of chaos between windows. Also windows may overlap resulting in hysteresis. For examples of period-adding in piecewise-smooth, ODE models, see [Piiroinen et al. (2004); Piassi et al. (2004); Coombes and Osbaldestin (2000)].

1.9

Smooth Approximations

Since piecewise-smooth systems may exhibit exotic, complicated bifurcations, many of which are not fully understood, many authors consider smooth approximations. By mollifying the nonsmooth components of a piecewise-smooth, continuous vector field, V , one obtains a smooth vector field, Vsmooth , and the norm, ||V − Vsmooth ||∞ , may be set as small as one likes. This can be useful when smoothness is a desired property. For instance in [Lázaro et al. (2001)], the authors study a smooth version of the canonical piecewise-linear form of Chua [Chua and Deng (1988); Kang and Chua (1978)]. The motivation is that global differentiability aids the prediction of intermodulation distortion in some resistor models. A smooth version of the Lozi map (which is a piecewise-linear version of the Hénon map) is studied in [Aziz-Alaoui et al. (2001)] to provide a form better suited for some aspects of rigorous analysis. In [Zhao et al. (2008)] the authors express a generic period-doubling-like bifurcation of a piecewise-smooth, continuous map as the limit of (smooth) period-doubling bifurcations. In [Leine (2006); Leine and Nijmeijer (2004)], Leine et al. describe a variety of discontinuous bifurcations as limits of smooth bifurcations. However, smooth approximations yield several difficulties. In particular, a jump in derivative will become a rapid change in derivative in a smooth approximation. Consequently smooth approximations are typically stiff and numerically expensive to solve [Leine et al. (2000)]. Also, a simple bifurcation in a piecewise-smooth system may correspond to a complex bifurcation sequence in a smooth approximation. For example, Fig. 1.10

November 26, 2009

32

15:34



shows a bifurcation diagram of the one-dimensional, piecewise-linear map, (1.39). As the value of µ passes through zero, the stable fixed point bifurcates to a stable 3-cycle. By Sharkovskii’s Theorem, see [Sharkovskii (1995); Li and Yorke (1975)], orbits of every period coexist with the 3cycle. For the piecewise-linear map, these orbits are all created at µ = 0. But the equivalent transition for a smooth map requires an infinite sequence of bifurcations. Fig. 1.10 shows a smooth approximation exhibiting an entire period-doubling cascade followed by chaotic solutions and periodicity windows. Thus in this situation, arguably the piecewise-smooth system describes the transition more succinctly than any smooth system is able to.

6

4

x 2

0

−2

−1

0

µ

1

Fig. 1.10: The thick lines form a bifurcation diagram of (1.39) when aL = 0.4 and aR = −4. For µ < 0 there is a stable fixed point, for µ > 0 there is a stable 3-cycle. Superimposed is a bifurcation diagram for a smooth approximation to (1.39) constructed by replacing |x1 | in (1.15) with x1 tanh(Kx1 ), where K = 1.

bifurcations

November 26, 2009

15:34


Chapter 2


As detailed in Sec. 1.5, a bifurcation resulting from the collision of an equilibrium with a switching manifold in a piecewise-smooth, continuous ODE system is known as a discontinuous bifurcation. Discontinuous bifurcations in systems of dimension three or greater may generate complicated invariant sets, such as homoclinic orbits satisfying Sil’nikov’s condition [Llibre et al. (2007); Sparrow (1981)]. This chapter presents a complete classification of codimension-one, discontinuous bifurcations in two-dimensional systems by the number and nature of the generated invariant sets. The first serious attempt at such a classification is probably the work by Lum and Chua [Lum and Chua (1991)]. All necessary theoretical results were then completed by Freire et al. [Freire et al. (1998)]. This chapter provides a novel overview and summary. Also given is a rigorous analysis for an analogue of the Andronov-Hopf bifurcation when nonlinear terms are present. Dynamical behavior local to a non-degenerate, discontinuous bifurcation is described by an ODE of the form (1.10) with (1.11), see Sec. 1.2. In order to classify discontinuous bifurcations of this system it is necessary to compute all generic invariant sets, i.e. equilibria and periodic orbits, on both sides of the bifurcation. Determination of equilibria is straightforward; this was accomplished in Sec. 1.3. Equilibria of (1.10) are given by (1.21). The computation of periodic orbits, however, is more difficult. It is helpful to assume that only structurally stable periodic orbits are of interest because then it suffices to study the piecewise-linear approximation, (1.18). For a treatment periodic orbits in piecewise-linear systems with multiple switching manifolds, the reader is referred to [Mitrovski and Kocarev (2001); Gon¸calves (2005)]. The remainder of this chapter is organized as follows. In Sec. 2.1 periodic orbits are computed for the piecewise-linear system, (1.18), in two 33

bifurcations

November 26, 2009

34

15:34


bifurcations


dimensions. Section 2.2 studies in full generality the Hopf-like, discontinuous bifurcation characterized by the sudden change of an attracting focus to a repelling focus. Using the information gained in these two sections, Sec. 2.3 argues that there are exactly four distinct possible non-degenerate, discontinuous bifurcations, in addition to no bifurcation occurring. This enables a classification of some codimension-two discontinuous bifurcations.

2.1

Periodic Orbits

A well-known consequence of index theory [Guckenheimer and Holmes (1986); Glendinning (1999)], is that a periodic orbit in a continuous, planar vector field must encircle at least one equilibrium. Moreover, if the equilibria are hyperbolic, the number of equilibria inside the orbit must be odd. Assuming det(AL (0)) and det(AR (0)) are nonsingular, the system (1.18) has at most two equilibria. For all codimension-one scenarios that this chapter is interested in, the equilibria will be hyperbolic, hence the number of equilibria inside a periodic orbit of (1.18) is exactly one. Furthermore, such an equilibrium must be a focus (or a center but this special case is ignored in this chapter, see Sec. 3.2) since otherwise the linear nature of the half-systems of (1.18) would imply the presence of invariant, semi-infinite lines contradicting the existence of a periodic orbit. Consequently, in the search for periodic orbits it suffices to assume that the equilibrium of, say, the left half-system of (1.18) is an admissible, repelling focus. All other cases may be reduced to this situation via flipping the sign of µ or the direction of time or both. Then by Corollary 1.1, (1.18) is observable and may be transformed to the observer canonical form, see Sec. 1.4. In two dimensions and in the absence of nonlinear terms, the canonical form is ¸· ¸  · ¸ · 0 τL 1 x  · ¸ · ¸  µ + ,x≤0  x˙ f (x, y; µ) 1 −δL 0 y · ¸ · ¸ · ¸ = = , (2.1)  y˙ g(x, y; µ) 0 τR 1 x  µ + ,x≥0 1 −δR 0 y where x and y are scalar variables and for each i = L, R, the real-valued parameters τi and δi are the trace and determinant of · Ci =

τi 1 −δi 0

¸ ,

(2.2)

November 26, 2009

15:34



respectively. The equilibrium of each half-system of (2.1) is · ¸ · ∗(i) ¸ µ 1 x , z ∗(i) = = y ∗(i) δi −τi

bifurcations

35

(2.3)

when δi 6= 0. From the prior assumption that z ∗(L) is an admissible, repelling focus, it follows 1 τL > 0 , δL > τL2 , µ < 0 . (2.4) 4 Two Important Lemmas Relating to Periodic Orbits The following result (given also in [Llibre and Sotomayor (1996); Freire et al. (1998)]) shows that (2.1) cannot exhibit a periodic orbit if τL τR > 0. Let Γ be a periodic orbit of (2.1) and let Σ denote the switching manifold. The vector field, · ¸ −g(x, y; µ) H(x, y; µ) = , (2.5) f (x, y; µ) is orthogonal to (2.1), thus

I H · ds = 0 . Γ

By Green’s formula,

ZZ ∇ × H · dA = 0 int(Γ)/Σ

where we may subtract Σ from the region being integrated because it has measure zero. We do this because H is not differentiable here. Notice ∂g ∇ × H = k( ∂f ∂x + ∂y ) which is equal to τL whenever x < 0 and τR whenever x > 0. Let int(Γ)L and int(Γ)R denote the subsets of the interior of Γ that lie to the left and right of Σ, respectively. Then ZZ ZZ τL dA + τR dA = 0 . int(Γ)L

int(Γ)R

Let Si = area(int(Γ)i ). Then τL SL + τR SR = 0 .

(2.6)

Since SL and SR are non-negative we have the following result: Lemma 2.1. If the piecewise-linear, continuous system (2.1) has a periodic orbit, then τL τR ≤ 0.

November 26, 2009

36

15:34


bifurcations


The next lemma, first conjectured in [Lum and Chua (1991)] then proved in [Freire et al. (1998)], provides uniqueness of non-degenerate periodic orbits. Lemma 2.2. The piecewise-linear, continuous system (1.18) has at most one limit cycle. See [Freire et al. (1998)] for a proof. Recall, a limit cycle is a periodic orbit that has a nearby trajectory that limits on the periodic orbit as either t → ∞ or t → −∞. Freire et al. prove Lemma 2.2 by directly computing all the possible periodic orbits of (2.1) and observing that multiple limit cycles never coexist. The analysis presented below treats Lemma 2.2 as fact prior to computing periodic orbits. Consequently the mathematical arguments below are much simpler than those in [Freire et al. (1998)], but still instructive and insightful. Construction and Analysis of Poincar´ e Maps Let Σ+ = {(0, y) | y ≥ 0} , −

Σ = {(0, y) | y ≤ 0} ,

(2.7) (2.8)

denote subsets of the switching manifold. The x-component of the vector field, (2.1), at the switching manifold is simply y. Hence a trajectory crossing the switching manifold at any point in Σ+ other than the origin travels into the right half-plane whereas a trajectory crossing Σ− /{0} travels into the left half-plane. The unique trajectory that passes through the origin grazes the switching manifold at the origin and nearby lies in the left halfplane when µ < 0. Assuming (2.4), a periodic orbit of (2.1) must enter both left and right half-planes. To compute periodic orbits we will construct a Poincaré map, P : Σ+ → Σ+ . R Let ϕL t (x, y; µ) and ϕt (x, y; µ) denote the left and right half-flows of (2.1), respectively. Let PL : Σ− → Σ+ ,

(2.9)

be a map defined by PL (y1 ; µ) = y2 where y2 is the first intersection of + ϕL at some time, t > 0. Since we have (2.4), PL is t (0, y1 ; µ) with Σ well-defined for all y1 ≤ 0. Similarly let PR : Σ + → Σ − ,

(2.10)

November 26, 2009

15:34


bifurcations


37

be a map defined by PR (y0 ; µ) = y1 where y1 is the first intersection of − ϕR at some time, t ≥ 0. When µ < 0, if δR 6= 0, PR is t (0, y0 ; µ) with Σ well-defined for small y ≥ 0. Then P = PL ◦ P R . (2.11) A global description of PL is easily determined. From the origin, the ∗(L) trajectory ϕL , in the t (0, 0; µ) spirals clockwise around the equilibrium, z ∗(L) L left half-plane. Since z is repelling, before ϕt (0, 0; µ) has completed 360◦ about the equilibrium it will intersect the switching manifold at some point, PL (0; µ) = yˆ(µ) > 0, see Fig. 2.1(a). Since distinct trajectories of (2.1) do not intersect, if y1 < y3 < 0 then PL (y1 ; µ) > PL (y3 ; µ) > yˆ(µ). Also, since (2.1) has no nonlinear terms, PL has a well-defined inverse for all points on Σ+ above yˆ(µ). Consequently, PL is a monotone decreasing function with no upper bound, Fig. 2.1(b). A similar determination of the basic properties of PR depends upon the nature of the equilibrium of the right half-system, z ∗(R) , (2.3). However, in any case PR (0) = 0. Also, as with PL , PR is monotone decreasing. Consequently P(0) = yˆ and P is a monotone increasing function. y y2 =PL (y1 )=P(y0 )

yˆ

PL (y1 )

y0 yˆ 0

y1

0

x

(b) y1 =PR (y0 )

(a) Fig. 2.1: Panel (a) shows a phase portrait of (2.1) in the case that the equilibrium of the left half-system, z ∗(L) , is an admissible, repelling focus. The left and right flows define maps PL and PR to and from Σ+ , (2.7) and Σ− , (2.8). The Poincaré map, P : Σ+ → Σ+ , is then given by (2.11). Panel (b) shows a sketch of PL .

November 26, 2009

38

15:34


bifurcations


By Lemma 2.1, periodic orbits can only appear when τR ≤ 0. When τR < 0 there are three cases to consider (for the case τR = 0 see Sec. 3.2). First, z ∗(R) may be an attracting focus. This case is studied in Sec. 2.2. It is shown that a periodic orbit exists for certain values of the parameters of (2.1). In the two remaining non-degenerate cases (z ∗(R) is an attracting node or a saddle) the matrix CR (2.2) has two real-valued eigenvalues, λ1,2 (λ1 ≥ λ2 ). Since (2.1) has no nonlinear terms, the parts of the associated eigenvectors, v1,2 , that lie in the right half-plane form invariant, semiinfinite lines, γ1,2 . When z ∗(R) is admissible, each γi intersects z ∗(R) in the right half-plane, otherwise the straight line extension of each γi intersects the virtual equilibrium, z ∗(R) , in the left half-plane. When δR < 41 τR2 , the eigenvalues and eigenvectors of CR are r 1 2 τR ± τ − δR , (2.12) λ1,2 = 2 4 R # " 1 q . (2.13) and v1,2 = − τ2R ± 14 τR2 − δR q The slopes of the eigenvectors are m1,2 = − τ2R ± 14 τR2 − δR , hence γ1,2 intersects the switching manifold at the y-value c1,2 = y ∗(R) − m1,2 x∗(R) Ã ! r τR 1 2 µ −τR + ∓ τ − δR = δR 2 4 R =−

µλ1,2 . δR

(2.14)

Let us now examine the case that z ∗(R) is an attracting node. Since µ < 0 and δR > 0, z ∗(R) lies in the left half plane, so is virtual. The eigenvalues λ1 and λ2 are both negative, thus by (2.14), c2 < c1 < 0, see Fig. 2.2(a). The forward orbits of all points in the right half-plane above γ1 , are attracted to z ∗(R) until they cross Σ− at a y-value greater than c1 , and become governed by the left half-system. Thus y1 = PR (y0 ) is well-defined for any y0 ∈ Σ+ and y1 > c1 , Fig. 2.2(b). Thus for any y ≥ 0, P(y) < PL (c1 ), Fig. 2.2(c). The point y ∗ is a fixed point of P if h(y ∗ ) ≡ P(y ∗ ) − y ∗ = 0. We have h(0) > 0 and h(PL (c1 )) < 0 thus by the intermediate value theorem there exists y ∗ with h(y ∗ ) = y ∗ . The point, (0, y ∗ ), lies on a periodic orbit of (2.1). The periodic orbit is unique since h is analytic and by Lemma 2.2 and is attracting.

November 26, 2009

15:34


bifurcations


39

PR (y0 ) y 0

y0 yˆ

c1

(b) γ1 0

P(y) x PL (c1 )

c1

γ2 yˆ c2

0 y∗

z ∗(R)

(a)

y

(c) ∗(L)

Fig. 2.2: Panel (a) shows a phase portrait of (2.1) when z is a repelling focus, z ∗(R) is an attracting node and µ < 0. Panels (b) and (c) show sketches of PR and P, respectively. The Poincaré map, P, has a unique fixed point corresponding to a periodic orbit of (2.1). Now suppose z ∗(R) is a saddle, then δR < 0. Since µ < 0, z ∗(R) lies in the right half-plane, so is admissible. We have λ1 > 0 > λ2 and by (2.14), c2 > 0 > c1 , see Fig. 2.3(a). Thus PR (y0 ) → c1 as y0 → c2 from below and PR (y0 ) is undefined for any y0 ≥ c2 , Fig. 2.3(b). A periodic orbit may or may not exist in this scenario. If PL (c1 ) < c2 , as in Fig. 2.3(a), then P(y) must cross the 45◦ line at some point, y ∗ . As in the previous scenario, y ∗ is unique and corresponds to an attracting periodic orbit of (2.1). Alternatively, if PL (c1 ) > c2 , there are three immediate possibilities. The function P(y) either intersects the 45◦ line at several points, grazes this line at one point, or fails to intersect this line anywhere. The first case is not permitted by Lemma 2.2. The grazing case also cannot occur, though this is not straight-forward to prove, see [Freire et al. (1998)]. Hence we have the third case, i.e. there are no periodic orbits. Therefore the existence of a periodic orbit is determined by the sign of qµ (τL , τR , δL , δR ) ≡ c2 − PL (c1 ) .

(2.15)

If qµ = 0, there exists a homoclinic orbit. When we attempt to compute

November 26, 2009

15:34

40


bifurcations


PR (y0 ) y c2

0

y0

c2

γ1 yˆ

z ∗(R)

c1

(b) γ2 P(y) PL (c1 )

0

x

c1

yˆ 0 y∗

(a)

c2

y

(c) ∗(L)

Fig. 2.3: Panel (a) shows a phase portrait of (2.1) when z is a repelling focus, z ∗(R) is a saddle and µ < 0. Panels (b) and (c) show sketches of PR and P, respectively. For the particular parameter values chosen, the Poincaré map, P, has a unique fixed point corresponding to a periodic orbit of (2.1).

an explicit expression for qµ in terms of τL , τR , δL and δR , we encounter difficulties. The values c1 and c2 are given by (2.14). The map PL is determined the left half-flow which is given by # " τL 1 τL t cos(∆L t) + 2∆ sin(∆L t) L ∆L sin(∆L t) L 2 × ϕt (x, y; µ) = e δL τL sin(∆L t) sin(∆L t) −∆ cos(∆L t) − 2∆ L L # " · ¸ x − δµL µ 1 + , L y + µτ δL −τL δL where ∆L =

q L δL − 41 τL2 . Then PL (c1 ) = eT 2 ϕT (0, c1 ; µ) where T is the

L transition time obtained by solving eT 1 ϕT (0, c1 ; µ) = 0. Unfortunately this X last equation is transcendental (like e cos(X) = 2). Consequently qµ has no known explicit form. This exemplifies a recurring theme regarding discontinuous bifurcations: local dynamics may be determined by global properties of a piecewise-linear system.

November 26, 2009

15:34



2.2

bifurcations

41

The Focus-Focus Case in Detail

This section studies discontinuous bifurcations of (1.10) in two dimensions in the case that the two equilibria, (1.21), are attracting and repelling foci for arbitrarily small values of µ. In this scenario, near the discontinuous bifurcation there exists a unique admissible equilibrium. The associated eigenvalues of the equilibrium are complex-valued and jump from one side of the imaginary axis to the other at the bifurcation. Consequently, the discontinuous bifurcation is akin to a Hopf bifurcation. In codimension-one situations a periodic orbit is generated at the bifurcation. If the orbit is stable, it encircles the repelling focus; this is known as the supercritical case. Conversely if the orbit is unstable, it encircles the attracting focus and this is known as the subcritical case. This section derives a condition governing the criticality of the bifurcation, extending the result of Freire et al. [Freire et al. (1997)] to piecewise-smooth systems. As an example, consider the piecewise-linear, continuous system: x˙ = −x − |x| + y , y˙ = −3x + y + µ .

(2.16)

For any value of µ, (2.16) has a unique equilibrium, namely an attracting √ focus at (µ, 2µ) when µ > 0 (with eigenvalues, − 21 ± 23 i) and a repelling √ focus at ( µ3 , 0) when µ < 0 (with eigenvalues, 21 ± 211 i). The y-axis is a switching manifold and the equilibrium crosses this manifold at the origin when µ = 0 and changes stability. Fig. 2.4 shows phase portraits of (2.16) for negative and positive values of µ. A stable periodic orbit exists for all negative values of µ and grows in size with |µ|. This situation is analogous to a supercritical, Hopf bifurcation in a smooth system. The main results of this section are summarized by the following theorem: Theorem 2.1. Suppose that the piecewise-C k (k ≥ 1), continuous ODE system (1.4) is two-dimensional and has an equilibrium, z ∗ , that transversely crosses a one-dimensional switching manifold when µ = ξ = 0 at a point where the manifold is C k . Suppose further that as µ → 0− the eigenvalues of the equilibrium approach νL ± iωL and as µ → 0+ they approach νR ± iωR , where νR < 0 < νL and ωL , ωR > 0. Let νR νL + , (2.17) Λ≡ ωL ωR denote the criticality parameter.

November 26, 2009

15:34


42

bifurcations


8

8

4

4

y

y 0

0

−4

−4 −4

−2

0

x

(a) µ = −1

2

4

−4

−2

0

2

4

x

(b) µ = 1

Fig. 2.4: Phase portraits of (2.16) for two different values of µ. Then, if Λ < 0 there exists ε > 0 such that for all −ε < µ < 0 there is a stable periodic orbit whose radius is O(µ) away from z ∗ , and for 0 < µ < ε there are no periodic orbits near z ∗ . If on the other hand Λ > 0, there exists ε > 0 such that for all 0 < µ < ε there is an unstable periodic orbit whose radius is O(µ) away from z ∗ , and for all −ε < µ < 0 there are no periodic orbits near z ∗ . A proof of Theorem 2.1 is given in Appendix A. Sufficient nondegeneracy conditions are given in Theorem 2.1 such that the general system, (1.4), may be transformed to (1.10) with (1.11), as described in Sec. 1.2. Furthermore, as described in Sec. 2.1, the system (1.10) is observable, hence it suffices to analyze the observer canonical form, (1.10) with (1.34). See Sec. 3.3 for a detailed analysis of the codimension-two scenario, Λ = 0. Theorem 2.1 predicts a local bifurcation diagram like Fig. 2.5 in the supercritical case. The curves y+ and y− denote the intercepts of the Hopf cycle with the y-axis. Unlike for a Hopf bifurcation in a smooth system, the Hopf cycle grows linearly in size with respect to the bifurcation parameter, to lowest order. Theorem 2.1 implies that the criticality of the Hopf-like discontinuous bifurcation depends on the sign of Λ, (2.17). It is not difficult to understand why this makes sense geometrically. If (1.10) with (1.34) has a Hopf cycle for small µ, it must encircle the equilibrium and spend time in both the left and right half-planes. Suppose the equilibrium is repelling and lies in the left half-plane, see Fig. 2.6. Then, within the left half-plane, the Hopf cycle completes more than 180◦ around the repelling equilibrium of the left

November 26, 2009

15:34



bifurcations

43

Fig. 2.5: A sketch of the local bifurcation diagram predicted by Theorem ∗ ∗ 2.1 when Λ < 0. The curves yL and yR denote the y-components of the equilibrium. The curves y+ and y− denote upper and lower intersections of a stable periodic orbit with the y-axis. half-system. However, within the right half-plane it completes less than 180◦ around the virtual, attracting equilibrium of the right half-system. In order that the orbit be periodic it must, in some sense, spiral outward exactly as much as it spirals inwards. Consequently, the attracting nature of the attracting equilibrium must be stronger than the repelling nature of the repelling equilibrium. Since the time to move 180◦ is π/ωj , this requirement is equivalent to −νR /ωR > νL /ωL , hence Λ < 0, in agreement with the theorem. In smooth systems, Hopf cycles grow as ellipses and the period of an arbitrarily small Hopf cycle is easy to calculate [Kuznetsov (2004); Wiggins (2003)]. In order to calculate the period for our situation, we must first understand the shape of the Hopf cycle. As the Hopf cycle shrinks to a point, it becomes better approximated by the periodic orbit in the corresponding piecewise-linear system. A periodic orbit in a piecewise-linear system (like (2.16)), shrinks to zero in a self-similar manner due to the inherent scaling symmetry. Thus an arbitrarily small Hopf cycle generated in this discontinuous bifurcation takes the shape of the periodic orbit in the corresponding piecewise-linear system, hence the orbit consists of two spiral segments, see Fig. 2.6. Again, consider the case Λ < 0 where the equilibrium is repelling and lies in the left half-plane. The Hopf cycle completes, say, βL > π radians around the repelling equilibrium and βR < π radians around the virtual, attracting equilibrium. As µ → 0− the ratio βL /βR limits on a finite value strictly greater than one. However, even the knowledge of these angles does not give the period of the cycle since the time taken along each

November 26, 2009

44

15:34



spiral segment is given by two different quantities, γL /ωL and γR /ωR , respectively. Here we observe that 0 < γR < π < γL < 2π, but in general, βL 6= γL and βR 6= γR . The period of the Hopf cycle is ¶ µ γR γL + + O(µ) . (2.18) T (µ) = ωL ωR As a non-piecewise-linear example, consider the piecewise-smooth continuous system: x˙ = −x − |x| + y , (2.19) 3 2 y , 100 which is identical to (2.16) except for the addition of a single nonlinear term. By Theorem 2.1, (2.19) will display the same local dynamical behavior about the origin for small µ as (2.16). Fig. 2.7 shows phase portraits of (2.19) at µ = ±1, and for small values of x and y these plots indeed bear a strong resemblance to those of the piecewise-linear system, see Fig. 2.4. A bifurcation diagram of (2.19) is illustrated in Fig. 2.8(a). Two equi25 ≈ 2.083, and exist for libria are born in a saddle-node bifurcation at µ = 12 all smaller values of µ. The attracting node becomes an attracting focus √ at µ = 100( 67 3 − 2) ≈ 2.073 and finally a repelling focus at µ = 0 when √ √ its eigenvalues jump across the imaginary axis from − 21 + 23 i to 21 + 211 i. y˙ = −3x + y + µ +

10

5

y βL

0 βR

−5

−4

−2

0

2

4

x

Fig. 2.6: A trajectory approaching a Hopf cycle of (2.16) when µ = −1. The upper equilibrium is an admissible, repelling focus and the lower equilibrium is a virtual, attracting focus. The angles that the Hopf cycle subtends within each half-plane about each spiral center are labeled βL and βR .

bifurcations

November 26, 2009

15:34


bifurcations


45

20

20

y

y 10

10

0

0

−10 −10

−5

0

x

5

10

15

−10 −10

(a) µ = −1

−5

0

x

5

10

(b) µ = 1

Fig. 2.7: Phase portraits of (2.19) for two different values of µ. Here Λ = − √13 + √111 < 0 thus as predicted by Theorem 2.1, a stable periodic orbit is created at µ = 0 and exists for small µ < 0. The periodic orbit is destroyed in a collision with the saddle equilibrium in a homoclinic bifurcation at µ ≈ −1.127. The variation of the period with respect to µ is shown in Fig. 2.8(b). Note that the period at µ = 0 is different from the nominal value, T (0) ≈ 5.522, that it would have if γL = γR = π in (2.18). Codimension-two bifurcations can arise if the non-degeneracy condition Λ 6= 0 is not satisfied (see Sec. 3.3) or if the equilibrium does not cross the

7

T(µ) 6

5 −1.2

(a)

−0.8

µ

−0.4

0

(b)

Fig. 2.8: Panel (a) shows a bifurcation diagram of (2.19). The lower dotted curve denotes a repelling focus; the upper dotted curve denotes a saddle. The solid curve for µ > 0 denotes a stable equilibrium. The solid curves for µ < 0 denote the two locations at which the stable periodic orbit intersects the y-axis. Panel (b) is a plot of the period of the Hopf cycle generated at the discontinuous bifurcation.

November 26, 2009

46

15:34



switching manifold transversely at the bifurcation. In both cases higher order terms are necessary for a local analysis. For the special case that the equilibrium is fixed on the switching manifold, a periodic orbit is created as a parameter causes Λ to cross zero [Zou et al. (2006); K¨ upper and Moritz (2001)]. A further condition required for Theorem 2.1 is that the equilibrium intersects the switching manifold at a point where it is smooth. The scenario where this is not true could perhaps be understood by transforming the system so that the switching manifold lies on the positive halves of the x and y axes. A special case where the equilibrium remains at a corner was treated in [Zou and K¨ upper (2005)]. For this case, the parameter Λ is replaced by a sum of the ratios Re(λj )/Im(λj ) of the eigenvalues multiplied by the opening angle of each sector. It would be useful to extend Theorem 2.1 to piecewise-smooth systems of an arbitrary number of dimensions. Since many complex phenomena have been observed for piecewise-linear systems in three dimensions [Carmona et al. (2005b); Llibre et al. (2007); Sparrow (1981)], this result may be more attainable if stringent conditions are imposed on the remaining (N − 2) eigenvalues of each limiting Jacobian matrix. For instance, a theoretical result may be within reach if one assumes that all the remaining eigenvalues have a large, negative real part, perhaps by using a multiple time-scales approach [Nayfeh (1973)]. Eigenvalues of this nature are observed at discontinuous bifurcations in the yeast growth model studied in Chapter 4. 2.3

Summary and Classification

This section summarizes and classifies codimension-one, discontinuous bifurcations of (1.10) with (1.11) when the system is two-dimensional. For an example of a physical system that exhibits many of the bifurcations discussed here see [Freire et al. (2004)]. All equilibria near a non-degenerate, discontinuous bifurcation were determined in Sec. 1.3, similarly all periodic orbits were determined in Sec. 2.1. There are five distinct situations: (1) NB - no bifurcation In this case, no bifurcation occurs. A single equilibrium persists and as it crosses the switching manifold neither of its associated eigenvalues cross the imaginary axis. This occurs, for instance, when the system is differentiable at the crossing point. Strictly speaking this is not a discontinuous bifurcation because it is not a

bifurcations

November 26, 2009

15:34



(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

bifurcations

47

bifurcation. DSN - discontinuous saddle-node bifurcation This is a nonsmooth analogue of the saddle-node bifurcation. The bifurcation is a nonsmooth fold, that is, two equilibria coexist and collide and annihilate at the discontinuous bifurcation. No other invariant sets are created at the bifurcation, see for example Fig. 1.5(a). DHB - discontinuous Hopf bifurcation This is a nonsmooth analogue of the Hopf bifurcation. A single equilibrium persists; on one side of the bifurcation it is stable, on the other side it is unstable and on at least one side it is a focus. A periodic orbit is created at the discontinuous bifurcation and encircles a focus equilibrium of opposing stability, see for example Figs. 1.5(b) and 2.4. DHBSN - discontinuous Hopf-saddle-node bifurcation This is a multiple-crossing bifurcation in the sense of Leine [Leine and Nijmeijer (2004)], see Sec. 1.5, and has no smooth analogue. It is so called because it exhibits both Hopf-like and saddle-node-like bifurcation properties. On one side of the bifurcation there are no invariant sets. On the other side there is a saddle, a focus, and a periodic orbit of opposite stability to the focus. An example is illustrated in Fig. 2.9. SS - stability switching bifurcation This is also a multiple-crossing bifurcation. Here an attracting node changes to a repelling node. The absence of a focus negates the possibility of the creation of a periodic orbit. No bifurcation occurs in the sense of Seydel [Seydel (1994)] in that the number of invariant sets remains constant, however there is a topological change, thus a bifurcation in the usual sense. Fig. 2.10 illustrates an example. In panel (b) the eigenvectors of the virtual, repelling node form invariant, semi-infinite lines in the left half-plane. The orbit of a point on the upper line is a separatrix. The basin of attraction of the attracting node is the set of all points above this separatrix. In panel (a) there is a different separatrix that forms the boundary of repulsion of the repelling node. Interestingly, exactly at the bifurcation (when µ = 0) there is an uncountable nested collection of homoclinic orbits, see Fig. B.1(b).

November 26, 2009

15:34


48

y


6

6

3

3

y

0

−3

−6

bifurcations

0

−3

−4

−2

0

2

4

−6

−4

−2

x

0

2

4

x

(a) µ = −1

(b) µ = 1

Fig. 2.9: Phase portraits of (2.1) when (τL , τR , δL , δR ) = (0.4, −2, 1, −0.5) for two different values of µ. The discontinuous bifurcation that occurs at µ = 0 in this case is a discontinuous Hopf-saddle-node bifurcation. (A phase portrait when µ = 0 is given in Fig. B.1(a).) In panel (b), both equilibria are virtual, indicated by small, unfilled circles.

3

3

2

2

1

y

1

y

0

0

−1

−1

−2

−2

−3

−3 −2

−1

0

x

(a) µ = −1

1

2

−2

−1

0

1

2

x

(b) µ = 1

Fig. 2.10: Phase portraits of (2.1) when (τL , τR , δL , δR ) = (2, −2, 0.6, 0.8) for two different values of µ. The discontinuous bifurcation that occurs at µ = 0 in this case is a stability switching bifurcation. Virtual equilibria are indicated by small, unfilled circles.

As argued in Sec. 1.4, the eigenvalues of the left and right equilibria of (1.10), z ∗(L) and z ∗(R) , arbitrarily close to the discontinuous bifurcation determine the type of discontinuous bifurcation that occurs, in non-degenerate situations. In two dimensions any non-degenerate equilibrium fits one of the five following classifications:

November 26, 2009

15:34


bifurcations


(i) (ii) (iii) (iv) (v)

49

saddle (S), δi < 0, attracting node (AN), τi < 0, 0 < δi < 41 τi2 , attracting focus (AF), τi < 0, δi > 41 τi2 , repelling focus (RF), τi > 0, δi > 41 τi2 , repelling node (RN), τi > 0, 0 < δi < 41 τi2 .

The classification of z ∗(L) is independent to that of z ∗(R) , hence there are 25 possible scenarios. The discontinuous bifurcation that results in each scenario is indicated in Fig. 2.11. In most cases the discontinuous bifurca-

z ∗ (R) S

AN

AF

RF

RN

sub DHBSN 4

S

NB

1

DSN

6

DSN

DSN 6

1

AN

DSN

1

1

1

NB

NB

DSN

5

8

super DHB

2

1

4

super DHBSN

7

SS

8

7

super DHB

4

z ∗ (L)

AF

DSN

NB

NB

2

sub DHB

sub DHBSN

6

6

RF

1

3

2

super DHB 5

4

5

2

super DHBSN

DSN

sub DHB

2

2

2

NB

NB

1

2

NB

NB

1

1

1

3

super DHB

sub DHB

7

RN

DSN

1

8

SS

8

7

sub DHB 5

Fig. 2.11: Codimension-one, discontinuous bifurcations of (1.10) in two dimensions. Each row [column] corresponds to a different classification of z ∗(L) [z ∗(R) ] for an arbitrarily small value of the bifurcation parameter, µ, as described in the text. The abbreviations of the types of discontinuous bifurcations are also described in the text. Subcritical and supercritical (indicating the stability of the periodic orbit) are abbreviated to sub and super respectively. Boundaries of codimension-one, discontinuous bifurcations are numbered by type and correspond to codimension-two bifurcations.

November 26, 2009

15:34

50



tion is determined by the classification of z ∗(L) and z ∗(R) . Ignoring symmetries there are only two exceptions. When the two equilibria are attracting and repelling foci, the discontinuous bifurcation is a discontinuous Hopf bifurcation with a criticality determined by the sign of Λ, (2.17). When the two equilibria are a focus and a saddle, the existence of a periodic orbit encircling the focus is determined by the sign of qµ , (2.15). The ordering of the five classifications of each z ∗(i) in Fig. 2.11 permits a classification of various codimension-two, discontinuous bifurcations. For example, suppose both equilibria are saddles. By Fig. 2.11, in this case there is no bifurcation at µ = 0. Variation of the second independent parameter, η, in (1.10), may alter the classification of the equilibria. For example suppose z ∗(L) changes to an attracting node at η = η ∗ beyond which at µ = 0 there is a discontinuous saddle-node bifurcation. A codimensiontwo bifurcation occurs at (µ, η) = (0, η ∗ ). This is indicated in Fig. 2.11 by the line segment joining the top-most two squares in the first column. This codimension-two bifurcation is labeled #1 and corresponds to the simultaneous occurrence of a saddle-node and a discontinuous bifurcation. A detailed unfolding of this bifurcation for an N -dimensional system is presented in Sec. 3.1. Assuming η varies continuously, and the associated eigenvalues of the equilibria are never both zero (since this would generically produce a codimension-three discontinuous bifurcation), the classification of the equilibria may only change to one of the two classifications that are adjacent in Fig. 2.12. Thus, for instance, a saddle may change to a node, but not a focus. Consequently, the classification change of one equilibrium via variation of η corresponds to a movement in Fig. 2.11 from one square to an adjacent square. Whenever this corresponds to a change in the resulting bifurcation at µ = 0, a codimension-two bifurcation occurs. The codimension-two bifurcations that arise in this manner may be classified by the two codimension-one scenarios on either side: #1 #2 #3 #4 #5 #6 #7 #8

NB NB DHB DSN DHB DSN DHB DSN

↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔

DSN DHB DHB of opposite criticality DHBSN (and the stability of the focus is unchanged) DHBSN of the same criticality DHBSN (and the stability of the focus changes) SS SS

bifurcations

November 26, 2009

15:34



bifurcations

51

τi =0

AF

RF

AN

δi = 14 τi2

RN δi =0

S

Fig. 2.12: A schematic of the classification of non-degenerate equilibria in planar systems. Eight different codimension-two bifurcations are identified. Note that a saddle may change to a repelling node and vice versa, hence the left and right sides of Fig. 2.11 should be thought of as coincident, as should the top and bottom. Hence Fig. 2.11 is really a 2-torus! Codimension-two, discontinuous bifurcations are the focus of the next chapter.

November 26, 2009

15:34



bifurcations

November 26, 2009

15:34


Chapter 3


As described in Sec. 1.4, non-degenerate discontinuous bifurcations are determined by the eigenvalues of the linearizations of the two locally defined half-systems at the bifurcation. That is, for the ODE system (1.10) with (1.11), generically, the eigenvalues of AL (0) and AR (0) determine the nature of all local dynamical phenomena. This attribute fails in special cases, for instance when one or more eigenvalues lie on the imaginary axis, or when a non-degeneracy condition (such as Λ 6= 0 (2.17), in the two-dimensional, focus-focus case, see Sec. 2.2) is not satisfied. In such situations nonlinear terms are important to local dynamical behavior. The present chapter details unfoldings of various codimension-two, discontinuous bifurcations seen the model of yeast growth discussed in Chapter 4. Codimension-two bifurcations correspond to points in two-dimensional parameter space. Loci of codimension-one bifurcations emanate from such points. For instance, a codimension-two, discontinuous bifurcation point is generically intersected by a curve along which an equilibrium lies on the switching manifold. Throughout this book, such a curve is referred to as a curve of discontinuity. The reader might like to look ahead to Fig. 4.3 which shows three distinct curves of discontinuity passing through a variety of codimension-two points. Between codimension-two points a curve of discontinuity corresponds to a particular discontinuous bifurcation, or no bifurcation. At codimension-two points the curve of discontinuity changes type. As detailed below, loci of codimension-one, smooth bifurcations emanate from the codimension-two points. All non-degenerate discontinuous bifurcations that may occur in planar systems were summarized in Fig. 2.11. The solid line boundaries in this figure correspond to codimension-two, discontinuous bifurcations. Eight distinct such bifurcations were identified (labeled #1-8). Generic unfoldings 53

bifurcations

November 26, 2009

54

15:34



of the first six of these are shown in Fig. 3.1. Note, in most cases there are two distinct unfoldings. (For #7 and #8 all possible unfoldings are not known to the author. In these cases the loci of smooth bifurcations that emanate from the codimension-two point are dependent upon the nature of global properties of the separatrices of the stability switching bifurcation.) For each plot in Fig. 3.1, it is assumed that an equilibrium lies on the switching manifold when µ = 0. In other words the curve of discontinuity coincides with the η-axis, where η is a second, suitable, unfolding parameter. Along a curve of discontinuity in a planar system, the change from a discontinuous saddle-node bifurcation (DSN) to no bifurcation (NB) occurs at the codimension-two, discontinuous bifurcation, #1. Here, zero is one of the associated limiting eigenvalues. A change from DHBSN to DHB occurs at #5, and here also zero is a limiting eigenvalue. Section 3.1 presents a rigorous unfolding in N dimensions of the situation that one limiting eigenvalue is zero. As shown in Fig. 3.1 a locus of saddle-node bifurcations emanates from the codimension-two point and is tangent to the curve of discontinuity here. Consequently the codimension-two point is the simultaneous occurrence of a discontinuous bifurcation and a saddle-node bifurcation. Section 3.2 analyzes in N dimensions the codimension-two scenario of a complex conjugate pair of limiting eigenvalues being purely imaginary. This situation corresponds to the simultaneous occurrence of a discontinuous bifurcation and an Andronov-Hopf bifurcation. A locus of Hopf bifurcations generically emanates from the codimension-two point and is non-tangent to the curve of discontinuity here. Associated Hopf cycles graze the switching manifold along a curve tangent to the Hopf locus at the codimension-two point. No bifurcation occurs at the grazing because the ODE system is continuous at the switching manifold. In two dimensions, this scenario corresponds to codimension-two, discontinuous bifurcation #2 or #6. Furthermore, the criticality of the discontinuous Hopf bifurcation or discontinuous Hopf-saddle-node bifurcation bears no relation to the criticality of the smooth Hopf bifurcation because the criticality of the two bifurcations is determined by linear and nonlinear terms of the ODE system, respectively. As derived in Sec. 3.2, when the two criticalities are different the respective Hopf cycles are of opposing stability and collide and annihilate in a saddle-node bifurcation, indicated by the curve labeled SNorb in Fig. 3.1. By way of rather nasty series expansions, later it will be shown that the corresponding locus of saddle-node bifurcations deviates only to order six from the grazing locus!

bifurcations

November 26, 2009

15:34


bifurcations


[1a]

[1b]

η

55

η

NB

NB SN

µ

µ SN

DSN

[2a]

DSN

[2b]

η super DHB

[3a]

η

η super DHB

super DHB super HB

SN orb

sub HB

µ

µ

µ

SN orb

[3b]

sub DHB

NB

NB

[4]

η

[5a]

η super DHBSN

super DHB

η super DHBSN

SN

HC

µ SN orb

[5b]

µ

sub DHB

µ

super DHB

DSN

[6a]

η

[6b]

η super DHBSN

super DHBSN

η super DHBSN

super HB

µ

sub HB

µ

µ SN orb

SN

super DHB

DSN

DSN

Fig. 3.1: Sketches of generic bifurcation sets local to the planar, codimension-two, discontinuous bifurcations labeled #1-6 in Fig. 2.11. SN [SNorb ] - saddle-node bifurcation of an equilibrium [periodic orbit]; HB Hopf bifurcation; HC - homoclinic bifurcation. Meanings of the remaining abbreviations are given in Sec. 2.3. As described in Sec. 2.2, in two dimensions, when the limiting left and right equilibria correspond to foci of opposite stabilities, a periodic orbit is generically created. The stability of the orbit and the criticality of the bifurcation is determined by the sign of Λ (2.17), which is a measure of the

November 26, 2009

56

15:34



difference between the effective attracting and repelling strengths of the two foci. The codimension-two, discontinuous bifurcation, #3, is defined by Λ = 0. This scenario is unfolded in two dimensions in Sec. 3.3. As shown in Fig. 3.1, generically a locus of saddle-node bifurcations of periodic orbits emanates from the codimension-two point and is tangent to the curve of discontinuity here. An unfolding of the codimension-two, discontinuous bifurcation, #4, is left for future work. Fig. 3.1 shows the hypothesized unfolding; namely that there exists a locus of orbits homoclinic to the saddle-type equilibrium emanating from the codimension-two point that is not tangent to the curve of discontinuity here. As µ → 0 the homoclinic orbit shrinks to a point. It seems plausible that a rigorous unfolding may be performed in two dimensions via a similar process to that in Sec. 3.3. However this situation has some unique difficulties. For instance, an explicit form for the condition, qµ = 0, (2.15), which defines the codimension-two situation, is not known. Also the Poincaré map, P, is not well-defined in a neighborhood of the origin when µ = 0. Other codimension-two, discontinuous bifurcations not discussed in this book include the occurrence of a discontinuous bifurcation at a non-differentiable point on the switching manifold. 3.1

A Nonsmooth, Saddle-Node Bifurcation

This section performs a rigorous unfolding of the simultaneous occurrence of a saddle-node bifurcation and a discontinuous bifurcation for the system (1.10) with (1.11), in N dimensions. At the bifurcation, one of AL and AR , say AL , has a zero eigenvalue. Consequently, equilibria of the left half-system local to the bifurcation are determined by nonlinear terms. It is found that near the codimension-two bifurcation, equilibria in the left half-system undergo a saddle-node bifurcation. The unfolding is summarized by the following theorem: Theorem 3.1. Consider the piecewise-C k (k ≥ 4), continuous ODE system (1.10) with (1.11). Suppose that near (µ, η) = (0, 0), AL (µ, η) has an eigenvalue λ(µ, η) ∈ R with an associated eigenvector, v(µ, η). In addition, suppose (i) λ(0, 0) = 0 is of algebraic multiplicity 1 and is the only eigenvalue of AL (0, 0) with zero real part, (ii) b0 = %T (0, 0)b(0, 0) 6= 0,

bifurcations

November 26, 2009

15:34



bifurcations

57

where %T = %T ode is given by (1.22). Then v(0, 0) is not orthogonal to e1 thus by scaling we may assume eT 1 v(0, 0) = 1. Finally suppose (iii) ∂λ ∂η (0, 0) = 1, ¯ (iv) a0 = %T ((Dx2 f (L) )(v, v))¯(0,0,0) 6= 0. Then p0 = %T (0, 0)v(0, 0) 6= 0 ,

(3.1)

and there exists a unique C k−2 function h : R → R with h(0) = h0 (0) = 0 and h00 (0) =

p20 , a0 b0

(3.2)

such that in a neighborhood of (µ, η) = (0, 0), the curve µ = h(η) corresponds to a locus of saddle-node bifurcations of equilibria of (1.10) that are admissible when sgn(η) = sgn(a0 p0 ) .

(3.3)

A proof of Theorem 3.1 is given in Appendix A. Condition (i) is the defining singularity condition. Condition (ii) is the non-degeneracy condition, usually used to guarantee that the distance between the left and right equilibria and the switching manifold varies linearly with respect to µ, see (1.24). In Theorem 3.1 it ensures that the one-dimensional center manifold of the left half-system is not tangent to the switching manifold. The condition ∂λ ∂η (0, 0) 6= 0 is sufficient to ensure η is an appropriate unfolding parameter. Since η has no prior restrictions, it may be scaled such that ∂λ ∂η (0, 0) = 1, condition (iii). The constant a0 , given in condition (iv), is a function of quadratic coefficients of the left half-system. The nonlinear terms allow the bifurcation to be unfolded in the usual manner exactly when a0 6= 0. Note, the component, Dx2 f (L) , is a rank-three tensor that also is sometimes used in the statement of the saddle-node bifurcation theorem, see for instance [Guckenheimer and Holmes (1986)]. Put simply, Theorem 3.1 predicts that a locus of saddle-node bifurcations emanates from the codimension-two point and is tangent to the curve of discontinuity (µ = 0) here. Furthermore, if det(AR (0, 0)) 6= 0 generically the bifurcation set will resemble either Fig. 3.2(a) or Fig. 3.2(b) depending on the sign of a0 . In the first case (panel (a)), there exists a unique equilibrium except when h(η) ≤ µ < 0 and η < 0 where there are three

November 26, 2009

15:34

58


bifurcations


coexisting equilibria and on the saddle-node bifurcation curve where there are two coexisting equilibria. In the second case (panel (b)), there exist two equilibria to the left of the solid curves and no equilibria to their right. Note that periodic orbits and other invariant sets may emanate from the discontinuous bifurcations but these are ignored in this section. As an example, consider the one-dimensional, piecewise-smooth, continuous system ½ µ + ηx + αx2 , x ≤ 0 x˙ = , (3.4) µ + x, x≥0 where α 6= 0. The equilibrium of the right half-system, x∗(R) = −µ, is unstable and admissible when p µ ≤ 0. Equilibria of the left half-system are η2 1 (−η ± η 2 − 4αµ) and exist when µ ≤ h(η) ≡ 4α . given by x∗(L) = 2α Consequently, (3.4) exhibits the bifurcation diagrams shown in Fig. 3.3. Bifurcation sets for (3.4) are shown in Fig. 3.2. This is in full agreement 2 with Theorem 3.1 because here a0 = ∂∂2 x2 αx2 |x=0 = 2α and % = b = 1 and by (3.3) the saddle-node 1 ⇒ b0 = p0 = 1 thus by (3.2), h00 (0) = 2α bifurcations are admissible when η has the same sign as a0 . η

η SN µ=h(η)

µ

µ

µ=h(η)

SN (a)

(b)

Fig. 3.2: This figure doubles as showing generic unfoldings predicted by Theorem 3.1 and bifurcation sets of the one-dimensional system (3.4) when α < 0 in panel (a) and α > 0 in panel (b). Dashed curves correspond to where an equilibrium lies on the switching manifold but no bifurcation results. Solid curves correspond to saddle-node bifurcations and nonsmooth folds. Within each region bounded by the curves, a representative phase portrait of the one-dimensional system (3.4) is given. Stable [unstable] equilibria are denoted by filled [unfilled] circles. Corresponding one-parameter bifurcation diagrams are shown in Fig. 3.3.

November 26, 2009

15:34



bifurcations

59

To illustrate Theorem 3.1 in higher dimensions consider the threedimensional, piecewise-smooth, continuous system:          1 −1 0 1 x 0   µ 0  +  µ    1 3y  +  0 , x ≤ 0   x˙  −1 −η − 2 0 2 z 4x2  y˙  =      . (3.5)  1 001 x   z˙   µ 0  + 0 1 3y , x≥0    −1 302 z The left half-system of (3.5) has two equilibria with x-components given by 1p 2 1 η + 48µ . x∗(L) = η ± (3.6) 8 8 A saddle-node bifurcation occurs when the equilibria are equal, i.e. when 1 2 η ≡ h(η) and at the saddle-node bifurcation x∗(L) = 81 η, hence µ = − 48 the bifurcation is admissible when η < 0. To compare this with Theorem 3.1, first note that AL (µ, η) has an √ eigenvalue λ(µ, η) = 21 − 21 1 − 4η, thus indeed λ(0, 0) = 0 and ∂λ ∂η (0, 0) = 1 as in the statement of the theorem. Furthermore, b(0, 0) = (1, 0, −1)T , v(0, 0) = (1, −3, 1)T and %T (0, 0) = (2, 0, −1). Consequently (a0 , b0 , p0 ) = (−8, 3, 1) thus Theorem 3.1 predicts saddle-node bifurcations along a curve 1 that are admissible when µ = h(η) with h(0) = h0 (0) = 0 and h00 (0) = − 24 η is negative, in agreement with the above directly computed results. 3.2

A Nonsmooth, Hopf Bifurcation

This section studies the codimension-two simultaneous occurrence of an Andronov-Hopf bifurcation and a discontinuous bifurcation. An unfolding is first obtained for a two-dimensional system, Theorem 3.2. Via careful construction of a Poincaré map, detailed results are derived. A locus of Hopf bifurcations emanates from the codimension-two point tangent to which is a locus along which the corresponding Hopf cycle grazes the switching manifold. No bifurcation occurs at the grazing because the system is continuous, however very shortly beyond the grazing the Hopf cycle may undergo a saddle-node bifurcation. A simple example is used to illustrate and verify Theorem 3.2. This example also provides a demonstration of the transformation to observer canonical form. In higher dimensions the same Poincaré map is considerably more difficult to compute. Such a computation is beyond the scope of this book. Theorem 3.3 states an unfolding in

November 26, 2009

15:34


60

bifurcations


x

α0

α>0 η>0

x

µ

µ SN

(a) x

(b) α 0 there is a unique equilibrium in the right half-plane given by C k functions · ∗(R) ¸ " 1 # x (µ, η) δR µ + O(2) . (3.11) = R − τδR y ∗(R) (µ, η) The equilibrium is repelling if τR , δR > 0, attracting if −τR , δR > 0 and a saddle if δR < 0. When µ < 0, there is a unique equilibrium in the left half-plane given by C k functions · ∗(L) ¸ · 1 ¸ x (µ, η) (3.12) = ω2 µ + O(2) . 0 y ∗(L) (µ, η)

November 26, 2009

62

15:34


bifurcations


Furthermore, there exist unique C k−1 , C k−1 , C k−2 functions h1 , h2 , h3 : R → R respectively, with ¯ 1 (L) (L) ¯ (fxx + gxy ) (0,0;0,0) µ + O(µ2 ) , 2 ω 2a0 h2 (µ) = h1 (µ) − 4 µ2 + O(µ3 ) , ω 8π 2 a30 6 µ + o(µ6 ) , h3 (µ) = h2 (µ) − 3ω 12 τR2 h1 (µ) = −

(3.13) (3.14) (3.15)

such that when µ < 0, (1) the curve η = h1 (µ) corresponds to a locus of Andronov-Hopf bifurcations of (x∗(L) , y ∗(L) )T that are supercritical if a0 < 0 and subcritical if a0 > 0; this equilibrium is attracting if η < h1 (µ) and repelling if η > h1 (µ), (2) the curve η = h2 (µ) corresponds to where the associated Hopf cycle grazes the y-axis, (3) if a0 τR < 0, the Hopf cycle exists for values of η between h1 (µ) and h3 (µ), a periodic orbit of opposing stability exists for η < h3 (µ) if a0 < 0 and η > h3 (µ) if a0 > 0 and the two orbits coincide at a locus of saddle-node bifurcations η = h3 (µ), (4) if a0 τR > 0, the Hopf cycle exists for η > h1 (µ) if a0 < 0 and η < h1 (µ) if a0 > 0.

A proof of Theorem 3.2 is given in Appendix A; an outline of the proof is given later in this section. Equation (3.9) together with condition (i) define the codimension-two, singular situation. Condition (ii) is a non-degeneracy condition ensuring that the nonlinear terms unfold the bifurcation in the generic manner. Condition (iii) is the only restriction on the right halfsystem. A codimension-three bifurcation results if τR = 0. Theorem 3.2 predicts essentially two different unfolding scenarios. These are illustrated in Fig. 3.4. For each scenario, Fig. 3.5 shows a bifurcation diagram corresponding to fixing η at a small positive value, as indicated by the dash-dot line segments in Fig. 3.4.

November 26, 2009

15:34



bifurcations

63

Example As an example consider the piecewise-C ∞ , continuous system 1 2 u˙ = −α + β + v + u2 + u3 , 15 5 (3.16) 1 3 1 1 1 5 v˙ = − α + β − u + (β − 1)v + | u − v| . 4 6 8 10 8 10 When α = β = 0, the origin is an equilibrium on a switching manifold. Its √ 1 ± 56 i. This two one-sided limiting associated eigenvalues are ± √12 i and − 10 example exhibits the codimension-two scenario in which we are interested and satisfies the required non-degeneracy conditions. A bifurcation set for (3.16) is shown in Fig. 3.6. For small values of α and β the bifurcation set is a smooth distortion of a mirror image of Fig. 3.4, panel (b). However for this example there also exists an unstable periodic orbit. The predictions of Theorem 3.2 break down away from α = β = 0 where this orbit collides with the stable orbit. The resulting locus of saddle-node bifurcations of periodic orbits intersects the saddle-node locus anticipated by Theorem 3.2 at a cusp bifurcation at (α, β) ≈ (0.019, −0.29).

(a) a0 < 0

(b) a0 > 0

Fig. 3.4: Schematics showing unfoldings predicted by Theorem 3.2 when τR < 0, δR > 0. Double lines correspond to Hopf bifurcations or discontinuous bifurcations that create a periodic orbit. Dashed lines correspond to a collision of an equilibrium or periodic orbit with the switching manifold at which no bifurcation occurs. Solid lines correspond to saddle-node bifurcations of periodic orbits. Included are phase portraits showing local behavior. Stable orbits are solid; unstable orbits are dashed. Thin solid lines denote the switching manifold. Lastly, the horizontal dash-dot line segments approximate the µ and η values considered in Fig. 3.5.

November 26, 2009

64

15:34


bifurcations


(a)

(b)

Fig. 3.5: Schematic bifurcation diagrams corresponding to the dash-dot line segments shown in Fig. 3.4. When stable [unstable] the equilibrium is indicated by a solid [dashed] line. The maximum and minimum x-values of periodic orbits are indicated by double lines; solid when stable and dashed when unstable. In order to compare the predictions of Theorem 3.2 and in particular the scaling laws (3.13)-(3.15), we transform the system (3.16) to the form given in the theorem. The switching manifold is the line u = 54 v, therefore we let 4 x=u− v . (3.17) 5 This particular example has been chosen because the required transformation may be computed explicitly. Combining individual transformations discussed Sec. 1.2 and Sec. 1.4 produces 1 y = − (β − 4)u + v , 10 2 1 33 (3.18) ( − β)(α − β) , µ= 10 2 15 1 β. η= 10 In the transformed coordinates the system is ¸· ¸ · ¸ · ¸ · 0 η 1 x 1  · ¸  ( 51 u2 + u3 ), x ≤ 0 + +  2 − η x˙ µ − 21 0 y ¸ · ¸ 5· ¸ = · ¸ · , (3.19)  x 1 y˙ 0 η − 51 1   ( 51 u2 + u3 ), x ≥ 0 + 2 + 1 −4 0 y µ 5 −η where 25x + 20y . (3.20) u= 33 − 20η

November 26, 2009

15:34



bifurcations

65

Fig. 3.6: A bifurcation set of the example system (3.16). Sketches of representative phase portraits are included though transient solutions are omitted for clarity. The line styles are the same as in Fig. 3.4. The values of the important constants are ¶ µ 1 1 25 1 √ ,− , , , (a0 , ω, τR , δR ) = 88 2 5 4 ¶ µ ¯ 250 80 (L) (L) ¯ , . (fxx , gxy ) (0,0;0,0) = 1089 1089

(3.21)

Fig. 3.7 shows comparisons of numerical computations of the curves h1 , h2 and h3 , with their predicted scalings, for the transformed example (3.19). The numerical results are in full agreement with Theorem 3.2. A calculation of error terms to quantitatively estimate the difference between the lowest order approximations and the true curves is beyond the scope of this book. Proof Outline The proof of Theorem 3.2, given in Appendix A, is now outlined. By assumption, when µ < 0, there is an equilibrium, (x∗(L) , y ∗(L) )T , in the left

November 26, 2009

66

15:34


bifurcations


half-plane. Close to this point there will exist an appropriate Poincaré secˆ in the left half-plane, see Fig. 3.8. The trajectory that begins from tion, Π, ˆ spirals clockwise around (x∗(L) , y ∗(L) )T and reintersects a point p0 on Π, ˆ Π at some point p5 . We are interested in periodic orbits of the flow, thus when p5 = p0 . It will be more convenient to use a second Poincaré section, Π, that is a semi-infinite line intersecting the equilibrium and the origin. Artificially following the left half-flow from p0 , we arrive at a point p1 on Π. If p1 were in the left half-plane, by continuing from p1 along the left half-flow we would arrive at p5 . However if p1 is in the right half-plane, we must first calculate a correction, following the left half-flow from a different point on Π, p4 , in order to arrive at p5 . The correction results from the lack of smoothness at the switching manifold. The mapping between p1 and p4 is known as the Poincaré-section discontinuity map [Dankowicz and Nordmark (2000); di Bernardo et al. (2001b)], see Sec. 1.7. To compute the discontinuity map, we follow the left half-flow back from p1 until we arrive at a point, p2 , on the y-axis after a time T1 < 0. We then follow the right half-flow from p2 until the next intersection with the y-axis at p3 after a time T2 > 0. Finally we follow the left half-flow to p4 on Π after a time T3 < 0. Let P1 , P2 and P3 denote maps relating to these three steps, respectively. The discontinuity map is then Pdm = P3 ◦ P2 ◦ P1 . (3.22) As will be shown, Pdm has a 23 -type singularity. This is because the system 0.3

0.006

0.3

1

1

η

η12

η26

0.003

0.15

0.15

0 0

0.005

(a)

|µ|

0.01

0 0

0.05

0.1

(b)

|µ|

0.15

0 0

0.05

|µ|

0.1

(c)

Fig. 3.7: Numerical verification of Theorem 3.2 for the transformed example system (3.19). Panel (a) shows h1 (η). Panel (b) is a plot of the square root of the difference between h2 (η) and h1 (η). Panel (c) is a plot of the sixth root of the difference between h3 (η) and h2 (η). The dashed lines in the three panels are the lowest order scaling predictions (3.13)-(3.15), respectively.

November 26, 2009

15:34


bifurcations


67

is continuous on the switching manifold, see Sec. 1.7. When p1 lies in the left half-plane the discontinuity map is taken to be the identity map. ˆ to A map from p0 to p5 may be derived by composing a map from Π ˆ Π with Pdm and with a map from Π to Π. However, a map from p1 to p6 is simpler (where p6 is the point on Π obtained by following the left half-flow from p5 ) and equivalent. Let Plhf denote the map following the left half-flow from Π to itself and let T4 denote the corresponding transition time. Then p1 is mapped to p6 via P = Plhf ◦ Pdm .

(3.23)

A fixed point of P corresponds to p6 = p1 . Notice p6 = p1 exactly when p5 = p0 . The most intensive computations in the proof are in deriving the maps Plhf , P1 , P2 and P3 described above. Once this is accomplished, P is obtained by composition and it remains to derive its fixed points to find h2

ˆ Π

y

p5 p0

p2 p4 p1

p6

Π x

(x * (L) ,y* (L) )T

p3

Fig. 3.8: A schematic illustrating a trajectory and Poincaré sections relating to Theorem 3.2 when µ < 0. A solid [dotted] curve corresponds to following the left [right] half-flow. The true trajectory is the thick curve. The Poincaré maps constructed in the proof are p2 = P1 (p1 ), p3 = P2 (p2 ), p4 = P3 (p3 ), p6 = Plhf (p4 ).

November 26, 2009

15:34

68


bifurcations


and obtain the function h3 by locating where P has a saddle-node bifurcation. In order to derive expressions, not for h2 and h3 , but rather for h2 − h1 and h3 − h2 , adjusted parameters η1 and η2 , that represent the deviation from h1 and h2 respectively, are introduced. Discussion Heuristically, the curves h1 (µ) and h2 (µ) are tangent because, with respect to a linear change in parameter values, the distance between the equilibrium and the switching manifold increases linearly, whereas the amplitude of the Hopf cycle grows as the square root of the magnitude of the parameter change. The mechanism behind the sixth order scaling of h3 (µ) − h2 (µ) can be explained with a simple calculation. Omitting higher order terms, the Poincaré map described in the proof of Theorem 3.2, P, (A.53), is essentially 3

ε0 = η2 + Ξ(µ)ε + γε 2 ,

(3.24)

where ε is a measure of the distance from the origin, Ξ(µ) is the Floquet multiplier of the Hopf cycle and γ is a constant. Grazing occurs when η2 = 0. It is easily determined that a saddle-node bifurcation of the fixed point of (3.24) occurs when η2SN =

4 (1 − Ξ)3 . 27γ 2

(3.25)

The Floquet multiplier is unity at the Hopf bifurcation (η1 = 0) and by assumption varies linearly with respect to η1 , i.e., Ξ ≈ 1 + λη1 , (λ 6= 0). ˆ 2 , (λ ˆ 6= 0). Hence The grazing occurs when η1 = O(µ2 ), thus Ξ ≈ 1 + λµ η2SN ≈ −

ˆ3 4λ µ6 . 27γ 2

(3.26)

For simplicity, it was assumed that the switching manifold was infinitely differentiable. The analysis is unchanged if the switching manifold is only C 3 . However, if the switching manifold were C 2 and not C 3 , we would be unable to determine the same expression for the map P3 , (A.48). Generalization to Higher Dimensions This section ends with a study of the simultaneous occurrence of a discontinuous bifurcation and Hopf bifurcation for the system (1.10) with (1.11) when N ≥ 2. As above when N = 2, it is assumed AL has purely imaginary

November 26, 2009

15:34



bifurcations

69

eigenvalues at µ = η = 0. In a similar fashion as for the N -dimensional system studied in Sec. 3.1, it is useful to derive ODEs describing the left half-flow restricted to the center manifold of equilibrium, x∗(L) , (1.21). The following theorem states that when certain non-degeneracy conditions are satisfied, such a system of ODEs may be put in the form (3.8), (where i = L), in preparation for a partial application of Theorem 3.2 as described below. Theorem 3.3. Consider the piecewise-C k , continuous ODE system (1.10) with (1.11) and assume that N > 2 and k ≥ 6. Suppose that near (µ, η) = (0, 0), AL (µ, η) has complex eigenvalues λ± = ν ± iω with associated eigenvectors, z± = u(1) ± iu(2) . Suppose (i) ν(0, 0) = 0, ω(0, 0) > 0, and AL (0, 0) has no other eigenvalues on the imaginary axis, (ii) %T (0, 0)b(0, 0) 6= 0, (iii) ∂ν ∂η (0, 0) = 1, (1)

(iv) either u1

(2)

or u1

is nonzero.

Then, in the extended coordinate system (x, µ, η), there exists a C k−1 four-dimensional center manifold, W c , for the left half-system that passes through the origin and is not tangent to the switching manifold at this point. Furthermore, ∃j 6= 1, such that in the coordinate system · ¸ · ¸ x ˆ1 x1 = , x ˆ2 xj the left half-flow of (1.10) restricted to W c is given by (1.11) with i = L and N = 2 (with “hatted” variables). Moreover, this may then be transformed to (3.8) (with i = L) such that (3.9) and condition (i) of Theorem 3.2 are satisfied. See Appendix A for a proof. Note that it is sufficient to assume only k ≥ 6 since (3.15) is not be used here. Condition (i) is the defining singularity condition. Condition (ii) is a non-degeneracy condition necessary to apply Theorem 1.1 and obtain the observer canonical form. The requirement ∂ν ∂η (0, 0) 6= 0 is sufficient to ensure η is a suitable unfolding parameter. Here the derivative is set to one (condition (iii)) because η may be scaled. For the codimension-two situation to be generic, the center manifold of the left half-system must be non-tangent to the switching manifold. In Theorem 3.1 this requirement was given by condition (ii); for Theorem 3.3 it must be stated explicitly (condition (iv)).

November 26, 2009

70

15:34


bifurcations


Theorem 3.3 states that the restriction of the N -dimensional, left halfsystem to W c is given by a two-dimensional system of the form (3.8). Theorem 3.2 may then be applied, but only partially because W c does not extend into the right half-plane. That is, Theorem 3.3 does not describe an admissible, invariant manifold in a neighborhood of the origin. We may only extract the results of Theorem 3.2 that apply solely to the left halfsystem. Thus we have µ = h1 (η), (3.13): a locus of Hopf bifurcations for the N -dimensional system. If a0 6= 0, tangent to this is the locus µ = h2 (η), (3.14), along which the associated Hopf cycle grazes the switching manifold. By the analysis in this section, the curve µ = h3 (η) may only be speculated. It seems plausible that for the N -dimensional system there may exist a locus of saddle-node bifurcations of periodic orbits emanating from the codimension-two point and if so that this curve deviates only to order six from h2 . Such a locus remains to be derived in systems of any dimension. 3.3

A Codimension-Two, Discontinuous Hopf Bifurcation

This section studies the system (1.10) with (1.11) in two dimensions when the equilibria x∗(L) and x∗(R) are foci of opposing stabilities such that when η = 0, at the discontinuous bifurcation the effective strengths of attraction and repulsion of the foci are equal in the sense that Λ = 0, see (2.17). This is an analogue of the Bautin bifurcation [Kuznetsov (2004); Guckenheimer and Holmes (1986)] which occurs in smooth systems when an equilibrium has multipliers on the unit circle and the coefficient for a nondegenerate Hopf bifurcation vanishes. In a generic two-parameter picture in a neighborhood of a Bautin bifurcation, a locus of saddle-node bifurcations of the Hopf cycle emanates from a locus of Hopf bifurcations and the loci are tangent at the intersection point. The discontinuous analogue studied in this section exhibits essentially the same unfolding. As in Sec. 3.2, since AL (0, 0) has complex eigenvalues, the system (1.10) with (1.34) may be transformed to the observer canonical form in two dimensions, i.e. (3.7) with (3.8). The following theorem is the main result of this section. Theorem 3.4. Consider the two-dimensional, piecewise-C k (k ≥ 3), continuous ODE system (3.7) with (3.8). Let τi = τ (i) (0, 0) and δi = δ (i) (0, 0) for i = L, R ,

(3.27)

November 26, 2009

15:34


bifurcations


71

and suppose (i) δi > 41 τi2 , for i = L, R, (ii) τR < 0 < τL . Let τ (R) τ (L) +p , Λ= p 4δ (L) − τ (L)2 4δ (R) − τ (R)2

(3.28)

and suppose (iii) Λ(0, 0) = 0, (iv) Λη (0, 0) = 1. For small η, let γL (η) [γR (η)] be the positive y-value of the next [previous] intersection of the trajectory passing through the origin with the y-axis for the piecewise-linear approximation of (3.7) when µ = −1 [µ = 1]. Let µ 1 (i) (i) (i) (i) − 3δi fxx + 4δi τi fxy − 2τi gxx Ki = 2 − δi (3δi + 2τi2 )fyy 9δi − 2δi τi2 ¶¯ ¯ (i) (i) ¯ + (−3δi + 2τi2 )gxy + τi (5δi − 2τi2 )gyy , (3.29) ¯ (0,0;0,0)

for i = L, R, and suppose (v) KL 6= KR . Then, for small µ and η, (1) the positive and negative η-axes are loci of subcritical and supercritical discontinuous Hopf bifurcations (defined in Sec. 2.3), respectively, (2) there exists a unique C k−1 function h : R → R with h(0) = h0 (0) = 0 and h00 (0) =

π2 Ã 2γi (0)(KL − KR ) 1 + e

√−πτi

!

(3.30)

4δi −τ 2 i

where i = L if KL < KR and i = R if KL > KR , such that the curve µ = h(η) corresponds to saddle-node bifurcations of the associated Hopf cycles when sgn(η) = −sgn(KL − KR ).

November 26, 2009

72

15:34



As with other theorems in this chapter, a proof is provided in Appendix A. Conditions (i) and (iii) define the codimension-two situation. Without loss of generality, x∗(L) is chosen to be repelling and x∗(R) chosen to be attracting (condition (ii)). Conditions (iv) and (v) are non-degeneracy conditions for the parameter η and the nonlinear terms of the system, respectively. Theorem (3.4) predicts that a locus of saddle-node bifurcations of periodic orbits emanates from the codimension-two point and is tangent to the curve of discontinuity here, Fig. 3.9. However, the expression for the second derivative of this locus at the origin, (3.30), is not simple. In a similar fashion as for the Hopf bifurcation theorem [Guckenheimer and Holmes (1986); Kuznetsov (2004); Glendinning (1999)], and Theorem 3.2, it is necessary for a complicated function of the nonlinear terms, here KL − KR , to be nonzero. Also h00 (0) is dependent upon an intersection point of a trajectory, γi . As discussed in Sec. 2.2, γi is not known to be explicitly expressible in terms of coefficients of the ODE system. Note, the point γL is shown in Fig. 2.1, labeled yˆ. To illustrate Theorem 3.4, consider the system #· ¸ · ¸ " √ 3 3  0 x η + 1 1  4  · ¸  + , x≤0 x˙ µ y −1 0 = · ¸ · . (3.31) ¸· ¸ · 2¸  y˙ 0 −2 1 x ξx   + + ,x≥0  µ −4 0 y 0

(a) KL > KR

(b) KL < KR

Fig. 3.9: Unfoldings predicted by Theorem 3.4. SNorb - saddle-node bifurcation of a periodic orbit; super [sub] DHB - supercritical [subcritical] discontinuous Hopf bifurcation, see also Fig. 3.1. Included are phase portraits showing local behavior. Stable orbits are solid; unstable orbits are dashed. Thin solid lines denote the switching manifold.

bifurcations

November 26, 2009

15:34



bifurcations

73

√ √ Here AL (0, 0) and AR (0, 0) have eigenvalues 21 ± 23 i and −1 ± 3i, respec3ξ tively. Also Λ(0, 0) = 0, Λη (0, 0) = 1, KL = 0 and KR = 9δ−3(2ξ) 2 = − 14 . R −2τR Numerically it has been found that γL (0) ≈ 12.1857. Consequently, when for instance ξ = 0.1, KL > KR thus Theorem 3.4 predicts the bifurcation set will resemble Fig. 3.9(a) and

h00 (0) ≈

70 2 3 π

12.1857(1 + e

−π √ 3

)

≈ 16.2492

(3.32)

Fig. 3.10 shows that this prediction fits well with a numerical computation of µ = h(η). 0

−0.02

−0.04

η −0.06

−0.08

−0.1 0

0.1

0.2

1

0.3

|µ| 2

Fig. 3.10: The solid curve is a numerical computation of the saddle-node locus µ = h(η) for the example system (3.31). The dashed line is the predicted scaling (3.30).

November 26, 2009

15:34



bifurcations

November 26, 2009

15:34


Chapter 4


Yeasts are single-celled fungi of which more than one thousand different species have been identified. The most commonly used yeast is Saccharomyces cerevisiae which has been utilized for the production of bread, wine and beer for thousands of years. Biologists in a wide variety of fields use S. cerevisiae as a model organism. A common experimental method for observing biochemical processes involved in yeast growth is that of continuous cultivation in a chemostat [Najafpour (2007); Bailey and Ollis (1986)]. Fig. 4.1 shows the basic setup. Cell growth takes place in a vessel that is continuously stirred. A nutrient containing fluid is pumped into the vessel and cell culture flows out of the vessel at the same rate, ensuring that the volume of culture in the reaction vessel remains constant. The rate of flow in and out divided by culture volume is called the dilution rate, denoted D (in h−1 ). Quantities such as concentrations of chemicals can be measured in a variety of ways, see [Porro et al. (1988); Satroutdinov et al. (1992)] for methods used in S. cerevisiae experiments. As a continuous culture experiment is carried out, it is common for the system to reach a mathematical equilibrium (i.e. steady state, abbreviated to equilibrium throughout this chapter and different from an equilibrium in the biochemical sense). At equilibrium, the rate of cell division in the culture is equal to the dilution rate. However experimentalists in the late 1960’s, [Fiechter (1968)], observed that instead of settling to an equilibrium, continuous culture experiments of S. cerevisiae could in some cases produce stable oscillations. Von Meyenburg, [von Meyenburg (1973)], discovered in subsequent experiments that these oscillations only occur in an intermediate range of values of the dilution rate (between about 0.08h−1 and 0.22h−1 ). Much work has since been done to understand the cause of such oscillations, 75

bifurcations

November 26, 2009

76

15:34



nutrient containing fluid

out flow

cell culture

air/oxygen sparging stirrer

Fig. 4.1: A diagram illustrating continuous cultivation in a chemostat for S. cerevisiae growth. Nutrients pumped into the system allow for continuous yeast growth and the possibility of oscillatory behavior. A well-mixed solution exits the system such that the cell culture volume does not change with time. Air or oxygen bubbles enter the vessel from the bottom and are broken up by the stirrer.

see for instance [Richard (2003); Henson (2003); Zhang et al. (2002); Danø et al. (2001)]. S. cerevisiae has three metabolic pathways for glucose: fermentation, ethanol oxidation and glucose oxidation. The model of Jones & Kompala [Jones and Kompala (1999)] hypothesizes that the competing metabolic pathways of the growing yeast cells create feedback responses that produce stable oscillations. It assumes that micro-organisms will utilize the available substrates in a manner that maximizes their growth rate at all times. To enforce this optimization a “maximum function” is introduced in the model equations; as a result, the model is an example of a piecewise-smooth, continuous dynamical system. In addition to the dilution rate, the speed of the stirrer is an easily controllable system parameter which affects qualitative changes to the yeast growth. Via a tube penetrating the bottom of the vessel, air or oxygen bubbles are pumped into the culture and are broken up by the stirrer. An increase in stirrer speed results in more bubble break up and therefore more surface area between the bubbles and the culture. This in turn leads to a

bifurcations

November 26, 2009

15:34



bifurcations

77

faster mass transfer of oxygen into the culture liquid. The corresponding model parameter is the dissolved oxygen mass transfer coefficient, kL a (in h−1 ). This chapter studies the model of Jones & Kompala [Jones and Kompala (1999)] under variation of D and kL a. Section 4.1 states the model equations and provides some explanation as to their form. Emphasis is placed on the biochemical reasoning that leads to nonsmoothness. Section 4.2 briefly discusses some basic properties of the model including switching manifolds. A bifurcation analysis of the model is presented in Sec. 4.3. This section describes regions in parameter space where stable oscillations occur and uses the results of earlier sections to explain a variety of codimension-one and two discontinuous bifurcations. Stable oscillations are then studied in Sec. 4.4. This section gives a detailed description of the biochemical process that the model predicts induces stable oscillations and briefly discusses period-adding. Lastly, the reader who wishes to numerically explore the dynamical behavior of the model themselves may do so without needing to code the equations by visiting the website [Simpson and Kompala (2008)]. The interface plots the time variation of several variables in response to user entered parameter values.

4.1

Mathematical Model

Jones & Kompala [Jones and Kompala (1999)] give the following model equations: dX = dt

Ã X

! ri vi − D X ,

(4.1)

i

¶ µ ¶ µ r3 v3 dX dC dG r1 v1 = (G0 − G)D − + X − φ4 C +X , dt Y1 Y3 dt dt ¶ µ r2 v2 dE r1 v1 = −DE + φ1 − X, dt Y1 Y2 µ ¶ r2 v2 r 3 v3 dO ∗ = kL a(O − O) − φ2 + φ3 X, dt Y2 Y3 Ã ! X de1 G = αu1 − ri vi + β e1 + α∗ , dt K1 + G i

(4.2) (4.3) (4.4) (4.5)

November 26, 2009

78

15:34


bifurcations


de2 E = αu2 − dt K2 + E de3 G = αu3 − dt K3 + G

Ã

X

! r i vi + β

i

Ã X

e2 + α ∗ ,

(4.6)

e3 + α ∗ ,

(4.7)

! ri vi + β

i

dC = γ3 r3 v3 − (γ1 r1 v1 + γ2 r2 v2 )C − dt

Ã X

! ri vi

C,

(4.8)

i

where X, G, E and O represent the concentrations of cell mass, glucose, ethanol (in gL−1 ) and dissolved oxygen (in mgL−1 ) in the culture volume, respectively, C represents the intracellular carbohydrate mass fraction and each ei represents the intracellular mass fraction of a key enzyme in the ith metabolic pathway. The subscripts 1, 2 and 3 correspond to the three pathways: fermentation, ethanol oxidation and glucose oxidation, respectively; ri represents the growth rate on each pathway. Formulas for the growth rates and other functions are discussed later in this section. Values for all parameters except D and kL a (which are varied), are listed in Appendix D. Further details concerning the derivation of the model are found in [Jones and Kompala (1999); Kompala et al. (1986, 1984)] and in the M.S. thesis of Kenneth Jones [Jones (1995)]. As stated above, S. cerevisiae has the following three metabolic pathways for glucose: (1) Fermentation. C6 H12 O6 → 2C2 H5 OH + 2CO2 Glucose is consumed by the well-known fermentation pathway to produce ethanol. This is the essential process in beer production. In continuous cultivation this pathway typically dominates at high dilution rates. (2) Ethanol oxidation. C2 H5 OH + 3O2 → 2CO2 + 3H2 O The presence of ethanol and oxygen allows for ethanol oxidation. (3) Glucose oxidation. C6 H12 O6 + 6O2 → 6CO2 + 6H2 O Glucose is oxidized completely to carbon-dioxide and water. This is a fundamental process of bread making and is prevalent at low dilution rates.

November 26, 2009

15:34



bifurcations

79

As detailed below, the model assumes S. cerevisiae prefers different metabolic pathways at different times in a manner that maximizes its growth. This modeling approach replaces the thousands of rate equations necessary in a detailed metabolic model with a handful equations in terms of so-called cybernetic variables, ui and vi , that represent optimal growth strategies. Many equations in the model of Jones & Kompala are based on the Michaelis-Menten rate equation or the similar Monod rate equation. The Michaelis-Menten rate equation concerns the conversion of a substrate into a product with the help of an enzyme giving the reaction rate, r, in terms of the substrate concentration, cS , by rmax cS , (4.9) r= KS + cS where rmax and KS are positive-valued constants [Lee (1992)]. By (4.9), when there is no substrate (cS = 0), the reaction does not proceed. Furthermore, the reaction rate increases monotonically with substrate concentration but cannot exceed rmax . The Monod rate equation has the same basic form as the Michaelis-Menten rate equation but applies to cell growth kinetics. Jones & Kompala model the growth rates, ri , for the three metabolic pathways by G , (4.10) r1 = µ1 e1 K1 + G O E , (4.11) r2 = µ2 e2 K2 + E KO2 + O O G , (4.12) r3 = µ3 e3 K3 + G KO3 + O where each µi is a constant given in terms of other constants that are listed in Appendix D by µi,max + β . (4.13) µi = µi,max α + α∗ Each pathway is catalyzed by an enzyme of concentration, ei , and in the absence of this enzyme, growth along the pathway does not proceed. The synthesis rate of the ith enzyme, rei , is modeled by αSi , Ki + Si where S1 = S3 = G, S2 = E and α is a constant. As in (4.5)-(4.7), the actual rate of synthesis of the ith enzyme is rei ui , where ui is the fractional rei =

November 26, 2009

80

15:34



allocation of a critical resource for the synthesis of the ith enzyme. The ui P satisfy 0 ≤ ui ≤ 1 and j uj = 1. The model of Jones & Kompala chooses these cybernetic variables to maximize the cellular growth rate of the yeast at all times. Via a simple application of Lagrange multipliers, see [Kompala et al. (1984)], cellular growth is maximized when the ui ’s are in the same ratios as the ri ’s. Therefore ri . (4.14) ui = P j rj Similarly, the actual growth rate of S. cerevisiae along the ith metabolic pathway is ri vi , where each vi is a cybernetic variable satisfying 0 ≤ vi ≤ 1 that controls the activation and inhibition of the ith enzyme. Consequently the rate of change of cell mass, X, is given by (4.1). Maximal growth would occur when vi = 1 for every i, but such growth is not observed experimentally. Inhibition occurs on the slower growth pathways; this is modeled by setting the corresponding vi to values less than 1. As was first described in [Kompala et al. (1986)], see also [Ramkrishna et al. (1987)], the exact choice for vi in this model is arrived at by assuming the degree of activation of the ith pathway is directly proportional to the magnitude of the growth rate of this pathway, i.e. vi ∝ ri or vi = λri , for some λ ∈ R, for all i. Since vi = 1 for some i, we have ri , (4.15) vi = maxj rj The presence of this maximum function causes the model to be piecewise-smooth, continuous. The nonsmooth choice (4.15) of vi seems to be significant to the existence of stable oscillations over a large region of parameter space. Certainly if the denominator is replaced with an accurate 1 smooth approximation such as the p-norm, ||r||p = (r1p + r2p + r3p ) p , on the vector r = [r1 , . . . , r3 ] for a large value of p the model will still exhibit stable oscillations with the same qualitative properties. But numerical investigations for simple, smooth alternatives that have more physical meaning, such as vi = 1 or vi = ui for all i, have found that stable oscillations are less prevalent than with the nonsmooth choice for vi . For instance if vi = ui for all i, (equivalently, if the denominator in (4.15) is replaced with ||r||1 ), when kL a = 150, stable oscillations have only been found for 0.09 ≤ D ≤ 0.096, whereas for the piecewise-smooth model stable oscillations occur throughout the larger interval, 0.093 ≤ D ≤ 0.123. In many situations the model of Jones & Kompala fits well with experimental data, see for instance Fig. 4.2 (reproduced from [Jones and

bifurcations

November 26, 2009

15:34



bifurcations

81

Fig. 4.2: This figure is taken from [Jones and Kompala (1999)]. It shows a comparison of the mathematical model of Jones & Kompala with experimental results of von Meyenburg in a batch process (D = 0). See [Jones and Kompala (1999)] or [Jones (1995)] for parameter values used. The yeast grows via fermentation until nearly all available glucose has been consumed after which the reaction proceeds along the ethanol oxidation pathway. This is known as diauxic growth.

Kompala (1999)]). In this particular batch experiment (in a batch process no nutrients are fed into the system, i.e. D = 0) the yeast initially prefers the fermentation pathway, creating cell mass by consuming glucose and producing ethanol. Throughout this stage the value of r1 is greater than r2 and r3 . After about 10 hours, once almost all the available glucose is consumed, the yeast switches, creating cell mass via the ethanol oxidation pathway. The rate of cell growth is low as the yeast switches pathways because some time is required to increase the level of the 2nd key enzyme to catalyze the ethanol oxidation pathway. The related piecewise-smooth, continuous bacterial growth model of [Kompala et al. (1986)] is studied in detail in [Namjoshi and Ramkrishna (2001)]. Here the authors compute equilibria and describe discontinuous bifurcations (the term “catch-up bifurcation” is used in place of “nonsmooth fold”). Coexisting equilibria are found in a small region of parameter space and a cusp point, like that shown in Fig. 3.2(a), is located. A new model that extends [Kompala et al. (1986)] by including a “maintenance” term

November 26, 2009

82

15:34


bifurcations


that summarizes non-growth associated cellular processes is formulated and analyzed in [Kumar et al. (2008)]. In this model stable oscillations are created via supercritical Hopf bifurcations. 4.2

Basic Mathematical Observations

A key property of (4.1)-(4.8) is that the positive hyper-octant (where the variables all have positive values) is forward invariant. That is, given any initial condition in the positive hyper-octant, any point on the solution curve at a later time will also be located in the positive hyper-octant. This is a common feature of mathematical models whose variables are not sensible when non-positive valued, such as the model studied here. This property is easily proved by supposing one variable is zero and showing this implies the differential equation of that variable is nonnegative, for all eight variables. For example if G = 0, then r1 , v1 , r3 , v3 = 0 dC and v2 = 1, thus dX dt = (r2 − D)X and dt = −(γ2 + 1)r2 C. Hence, upon dG further algebraic simplification, dt = G0 D + φ4 (D + r2 γ2 )CX which is non-negative because we are assuming X, C, D ≥ 0. The bifurcation analysis in the next section is greatly simplified by a restriction to the positive hyper-octant. For instance several equilibria exist outside the positive hyper-octant; these are not studied. Within the positive hyper-octant all trajectories are bounded forward in time. In other words, solutions always approach some attractor whether it is an equilibrium, a periodic orbit or a more complicated and possibly chaotic attractor. This is also an expected property and common in physical models. As mentioned earlier, the model is piecewise-smooth, continuous. The system is non-differentiable on codimension-one switching manifolds. By (4.15), there are three distinct switching manifolds: Σ1,2 = {Z ∈ R8 | r1 = r2 ≥ r3 } , Σ1,3 = {Z ∈ R8 | r1 = r3 ≥ r2 } ,

(4.16)

8

Σ2,3 = {Z ∈ R | r2 = r3 ≥ r1 } , where Z represents a point in phase space. At the intersection of any two switching manifolds, all the ri are equal and therefore the third switching manifold intersects also. Except at these intersection points, the switching manifolds are smooth because each ri is a smooth function of the system variables.

November 26, 2009

15:34


bifurcations


83

magnified in Fig. 4.4(b)

magnified in Fig. 4.4(a) magnified in Fig. 4.6

Fig. 4.3: A bifurcation set of the system (4.1)-(4.8). HB - Hopf bifurcation, SN - saddle-node bifurcation. Curves of discontinuity (where the equilibrium lies on a switching manifold, Σi,j (4.16)) are shown dashed. In each region bounded by the curves of discontinuity, the growth rate that is maximal at equilibrium is indicated.

4.3

Bifurcation Structure

This section discusses the numerically computed bifurcation set for the system (4.1)-(4.8) shown in Fig. 4.3. Accurate numerical solutions were obtained by ensuring time steps were not taken across a switching manifold, i.e. whenever a trajectory crossed a switching manifold, a data point for the trajectory at the switching manifold was approximated, see [Gear and Østerby (1984)]. Numerical continuation was performed using the software auto [Doedel et al. (2007)]. The system (4.1)-(4.8) has a single, physically meaningful equilibrium (steady-state) except in small windows of parameter space between saddle-

November 26, 2009

84

15:34



node or nonsmooth fold bifurcations. For small values of D, this equilibrium is stable. If we fix the value of kL a and increase D, the first bifurcation encountered is an Andronov-Hopf bifurcation (labeled HB1 in Fig. 4.3). Slightly to the right of HB1 the equilibrium is unstable and solutions approach a periodic orbit or complicated attractor (see Sec. 4.4). As the value of D is increased further a second Hopf bifurcation (HB2a or HB2b ) is encountered that restores stability to the equilibrium (unless kL a ≈ 230, see below). Since the switching manifolds (4.16) are codimension-one, it is a codimension-one phenomenon for the equilibrium to lie precisely on a switching manifold. Though an analytical formula for the equilibrium is not known, one may numerically compute curves in two-dimensional parameter space along which this codimension-one phenomenon occurs (the dashed curves in Fig. 4.3). As mentioned in Chapter 3, throughout this book such curves are referred to as curves of discontinuity. The curves of discontinuity divide parameter space into three regions where one of the ri is larger than the other two, at the equilibrium. They may also correspond to discontinuous bifurcations, as described below. Physically, crossing a curve of discontinuity corresponds to a change in the preferred metabolic pathway at equilibrium. At a codimension-two point near (D, kL a) = (0.26, 250), the equilibrium lies at an intersection point of all three switching manifolds. Fig. 4.4 shows enlargements of Fig. 4.3 near two points on the left-most curve of discontinuity along which the equilibrium lies on Σ2,3 , (4.16). In panel (a), along the curve of discontinuity, below the point (a) and above the point (c), there is no bifurcation. Between (a) and (c), numerical simulations show that a periodic orbit is created when the equilibrium crosses the switching manifold. Between (a) and (b), the orbit is unstable and emanates to the right of the curve of discontinuity. Between (b) and (c) the orbit is stable and emanates to the left. Points (a) and (c) are codimension-two points studied from a general viewpoint in Sec. 3.2. At both points, on one side of Σ2,3 there exists a complex conjugate pair of limiting associated eigenvalues of the equilibrium that are purely imaginary. As predicted by Theorem 3.3, a locus of Hopf bifurcations emanates non-tangentially from the curve of discontinuity. Grazing curves along which the corresponding Hopf cycle grazes Σ2,3 emanate from (a) and (c) and are tangent to the Hopf loci here. Note that the grazing curve that emanates from (a) is so close to the Hopf locus, HB2b , that in Fig. 4.4(a) the two curves are barely distinguishable.

bifurcations

November 26, 2009

15:34



bifurcations

85

magnified in Fig. 4.5(b) magnified in Fig. 4.5(a)

(a)

(b)

Fig. 4.4: Magnified views of Fig. 4.3. HB - Hopf bifurcation, SN - saddlenode bifurcation. The curves of discontinuity are shown dashed. The dotted curves correspond to the grazing of a Hopf cycle with a switching manifold. There are three such curves, these emanate from the points (a), (c) and (d) (note, the curve that emanates from (a) is barely distinguishable from HB2b ). At the top of panel (a), one point on a locus of saddle-node bifurcations of a Hopf cycle is shown with a cross.

Recall, Theorem 3.2 states that for two-dimensional systems when the stability of the periodic orbits created at the Hopf and Hopf-like bifurcations arbitrarily close to the codimension-two point are different, there generically exists a locus of saddle-node bifurcations of the periodic orbits and that this locus deviates from the grazing curve to only order six. Saddlenode loci obeying the same scaling laws are hypothesized to exist in higher dimensional systems, such as the yeast growth model. Near (a) and (c) the (smooth) Hopf bifurcations are subcritical. Since between (b) and (c) the discontinuous bifurcation generates a stable periodic orbit, a locus of saddle-node bifurcations is expected to emanate from (c) and lie extremely close to the grazing curve. No such locus is expected to emanate from (a) because along (a) and (b) unstable orbits are created (or more precisely orbits that have stable and unstable manifolds of the same dimensionality as those of Hopf cycles generated along HB2b ). Unfortunately, periodic orbits of piecewise-smooth systems that lie in more than one smooth region of phase space are typically considerably more difficult to numerically compute than periodic orbits of a smooth system, or periodic orbits that lie in only one smooth component of a piecewise-

November 26, 2009

86

15:34



smooth system. For the system (4.1)-(4.8), numerical difficulties also arise due to high dimensionality and stiffness. Periodic orbits at a saddle-node locus predicted by Theorem 3.2 lie in two smooth regions of phase space. Consequently, not more than a single point on a such a saddle-node locus has been computed numerically for the system (4.1)-(4.8), see Fig. 4.4(a). In contrast, grazing curves are relatively easy to compute because it suffices to solve only one smooth system component. Sophisticated algorithms are required for bifurcation continuation in piecewise-smooth systems. This is the subject of on-going research, see for instance [Batako et al. (2007); Piiroinen et al. (2004)]. The codimension-two point (b) is analogous to the scenario studied in two dimensions in Sec. 3.3 at which the discontinuous Hopf bifurcation is of indeterminable criticality. It is anticipated that as in the two-dimensional case summarized by Theorem 3.4, there exists a locus of saddle-node bifurcations of the Hopf cycles that emanates from (b) and is tangent to the curve of discontinuity here. Numerical analysis suggests that such a curve intersects (b) and exists below (b) and to the right of the curve of discontinuity and HB2b . However, for the same reasons as above, an accurate computation of this proposed curve has not been accomplished. Since periodic orbits generated at discontinuous bifurcations were not able to be numerically computed, the codimension-two point, (b), was located by studying piecewise-linear approximations of the form (1.18) via a procedure now summarized. For a given value of kL a, first the value of D at the curve of discontinuity is computed. Then, by deriving a linear approximation to Σ2,3 , the system can be transformed such that locally the switching manifold is orthogonal to e1 . The matrices AL and AR are then determined by numerically computing Jacobians of the corresponding smooth components of the system at the equilibrium. Numerical simulations of the piecewise-linear approximation show the existence of a stable periodic orbit for relatively large values of kL a. As kL a is decreased the amplitude of this orbit increases. The point at which the amplitude appears to limit on infinity is the point (b). Note, between (a) and (c), on both sides of the discontinuous bifurcation, the equilibrium has a complex pair of associated eigenvalues and six real-valued negative associated eigenvalues. At (b), Λ (2.17), as computed using the two complex eigenvalue pairs, is not equal to zero, which it would be if the system was two-dimensional, Sec. 3.3. This suggests that a condition (like Λ = 0) governing criticality in systems of arbitrary dimension may not have a simple form.

bifurcations

November 26, 2009

15:34


bifurcations


87

Fig. 4.4(b), shows a second magnification of Fig. 4.3 near D = 0.225 and kL a = 320. Loci of Hopf bifurcations and saddle-node bifurcations of the equilibrium have endpoints at (d) and (e) that lie on a curve of discontinuity. The point (d) exhibits the unfolding predicted by Theorem 3.3. Near (d), HB3 corresponds to Hopf bifurcations that are subcritical. Along the curve of discontinuity to the right of (d), a stable periodic orbit is created at the discontinuous bifurcation. Consequently, as for point (c), a locus of saddle-node bifurcations of periodic orbits is expected to exist very close to the grazing locus. The system exhibits stable oscillations in the region between the Hopf bifurcations and the curve of discontinuity, but oscillations in this parameter region have yet to be observed experimentally. Note that HB2a and HB3 are actually part of the same curve; the joining section is not seen because it corresponds to virtual solutions. The point (e) lies at the tangential intersection of the curve of discontinuity with a locus of saddle-node bifurcations as predicted by Theorem 3.1. Along the curve of discontinuity to the right of (e), the discontinuous bifurcation is a nonsmooth fold. This is the scenario depicted in Fig. 3.2(b). A Takens-Bogdanov bifurcation occurs at (f) where the Hopf locus, HB3 , terminates at the saddle-node locus, and the point (g) corresponds to a cusp bifurcation [Kuznetsov (2004)]. Periodic orbits are created at the curve of discontinuity between (d) and a point to the left of (e). A precise computation of this point is left for

(a)

(b)

Fig. 4.5: Magnified views of Fig. 4.4(b). Along the dotted curves in panel (a) the admissible equilibrium has associated eigenvalues that are purely imaginary. Locally, to the left of the dotted curves the admissible equilibrium has a complex conjugate eigenvalue pair, whereas to the right all associated eigenvalues are real-valued.

November 26, 2009

88

15:34



future work but it is expected to lie near (h) and (i), see Fig. 4.5(a). Left of (h), complex-valued associated eigenvalues exist for the equilibrium on both sides of the switching manifold, thus here periodic orbits are likely to be created. Right of (i) all associated eigenvalues are real-valued and no periodic orbits are created. A complete analysis of all bifurcations in this region is left for future work. Hopf bifurcations along HB3 are subcritical between (d) and (j) and supercritical to the right of (j), see Fig. 4.5(b). A locus of saddle-node bifurcations of the associated Hopf cycle emanates from (j) as predicted by smooth bifurcation theory. This locus tangentially intersects the grazing curve at the point (k) beyond which the saddle-node locus is believed to persist. However, beyond (k) associated periodic orbits lie in two smooth regions of phase space and for this reason have not been computed. Fig. 4.6 shows the bifurcation set superimposed on a sequence of bifurcation diagrams that vary with D. At the codimension-two point (l), at equilibrium all three metabolic pathways have the same growth rate. Equivalently, (l) lies at the intersection of three distinct curves of discontinuity.

Fig. 4.6: A bifurcation set of the system (4.1)-(4.8) near the point, labeled (l), at which, at equilibrium, the growth rate along all three metabolic pathways is identical (i.e. r1 = r2 = r3 ). The third axis shows the value of C (the variable C was chosen arbitrarily from the eight variables in the model). The locus of saddle-node bifurcations is shown as a thick, solid curve. Curves of discontinuity are shown dashed. For several fixed values of kL a, the equilibrium is shown under variation of D. Equilibrium curves are shown solid [dashed] when the equilibrium is stable [unstable].

bifurcations

November 26, 2009

15:34



bifurcations

89

The point (m) lies at the intersection of SN1 with a curve of discontinuity. The unfolding of (m) is in accordance with Theorem 3.1 and appears like Fig. 3.2(a). Lastly, the intersection shown in Fig. 4.3 of SN2 with a curve of discontinuity, occurs in the manner predicted by Theorem 3.1. In a neighborhood of the intersection the bifurcation set resembles Fig. 3.2(a). Three equilibria (two of which are stable) coexist in the thin region between SN2 and the curve of discontinuity.

4.4

Simple and Complicated Stable Oscillations

Experimentally observed oscillations correspond to the region between HB1 and HB2 in Fig. 4.3. This section discusses the dynamics in this region in more detail.

Fig. 4.7: A bifurcation diagram of the system (4.1)-(4.8) when kL a = 150. The equilibrium is shown as a solid line when stable and a dashed line when unstable. Dots [small circles] correspond to local maximum [minimum] values of O that stable oscillations obtain. Two Hopf bifurcations are indicated by circles. The asterisk corresponds to where the equilibrium lies on the switching manifold, Σ2,3 , (4.16). The period of these oscillations is also indicated. See Fig. 4.10 for a magnification near the left-most Hopf bifurcation.

November 26, 2009

90

15:34



Fig. 4.7 shows a bifurcation diagram of the system (4.1)-(4.8) when the value of kL a is fixed at 150. For values of D between about 0.0927 and 0.1172, all three pathways are at some time preferred over one period of the solution. In particular, very soon after the preferred pathway changes from glucose oxidation to fermentation, the concentration of dissolved oxygen rebounds slightly before continuing to decrease, see Fig. 4.9. Thus local minima and maxima appear below the equilibrium value in Fig. 4.7. For larger values of D, still to the left of the rightmost Hopf bifurcation, fermentation is no longer a preferred pathway at any point on the stable solution, and the lower local maximum is lost. Also, the absolute maximum undergoes two cusp catastrophes [Ott (1993); Grebogi et al. (1983)] at D ≈ 0.111, 0.117. Different values of kL a yield similar bifurcation diagrams, a collection are shown in Fig. 4.8. As a general rule there is a rapid change from a stable equilibrium to a large amplitude orbit near the left-most Hopf bifurcation and as D is increased the amplitude and period of the orbit decrease. A careful study of time series plots over one oscillation period can reveal the underlying biochemical processes that cause stable oscillations. Fig. 4.9

Fig. 4.8: Bifurcation diagrams of (4.1)-(4.8) at six different values of kL a with the same line style scheme as Fig. 4.7. Hopf loci and a curve of discontinuity (here indicated by a solid line) shown in Fig. 4.3 are also included.

bifurcations

November 26, 2009

15:34


bifurcations


0.12

3

O

91

0.08

2

r

1

1 0 0

10

20

30

40

0.04 0 0

50

10

20

30

40

50

10

20

30

40

50

10

20

30

40

50

0.12 1.5

3

1

2

0.5

1

0

0

13.2 13.46

14.17

0.08

r2 0.04 18.99 19.06

19.67

0 0 0.12

0.1

0.08

G

r

0.05

3 0.04

0 0

10

20

30

40

50

1

E

0 0

time preferred metabolic pathway

0.5

0 0

fermentation ethanol oxidation glucose oxidation 10

20

30

40

50

time

Fig. 4.9: Time series showing stable oscillations when kL a = 150 and D = 0.1. Plots of the remaining five variables are shown in Fig. B.2. The point on the stable oscillation at which O is maximal has been taken as the initial condition. The preferred metabolic pathway changes with time and is indicated by the line style. Times discussed in the text at which an important change occurs are illustrated in the insets to the plot of dissolved oxygen.

shows the variation of dissolved oxygen, glucose, ethanol and the growth rates of the three metabolic pathways when D = 0.1 and kL a = 150. Plots of the remaining variables are given in Fig. B.2. For ease of explanation, time is set to zero at a point where O is maximal. Initially the concentration of dissolved oxygen is high, thus the yeast is expected to prefer one of the two oxidative pathways. The concentrations of glucose and ethanol are low thus since K3 ¿ K2 , we have K3G+G À K2E+E . The remaining terms in (4.11) and (4.12) are comparable thus r3 is much greater than r2 . This is confirmed in Fig. 4.9: glucose oxidation dominates.

November 26, 2009

92

15:34



O decreases because the rate of oxygen consumption is greater than the rate at which oxygen is supplied. At approximately t = 13.2h (see the left inset of the time series plot of O in Fig. 4.9), the yeast begins to significantly oxidize ethanol in addition to glucose and as a result the rate of oxygen consumption increases sharply. The stimulus to ethanol oxidation at this point is not clear but may be due to a drop in the value of C. (No oscillations occur at these parameter values if the effect of C is removed from the model by setting φ4 = 0.) When dC dt becomes negative the last term of (4.2) becomes large and positive and G and consequently r1 increase. This in turn causes E and r2 to increase, by (4.3) and (4.11), thus we have ethanol oxidation. At approximately t = 13.46h the fermentation pathway becomes preferred due to the lack of oxygen. For a short time all three metabolic pathways are used to a significant degree. The most important feature of this “combined” stage is the rapid increase of ethanol concentration as a result of fermentation. Soon ethanol oxidation becomes the preferred pathway (at t ≈ 14.17h). Fermentation still occurs significantly but glucose oxidation is minimal. This is because the concentration of dissolved oxygen is low, thus since KO2 ¿ KO3 , we have KOO+O À KOO+O and r2 À r3 , see 2 3 (4.11) and (4.12). Throughout this stage of the yeast cycle, ethanol concentration decreases. At approximately t = 18.99h, the value of E drops below K2 and r2 decreases suddenly. Unlike before, the value of C is small and glucose concentration does not increase leading to fermentation. Instead, since neither oxidation pathway is being used greatly, the concentration of dissolved oxygen is able to increase. By t ≈ 19.67, O has reached its maximum value, glucose oxidation dominates and the system has returned to its state at t = 0. To summarize, glucose oxidation is the dominate metabolic pathway when the concentration of dissolved oxygen is high. Once available oxygen is consumed, the only pathway that does not require oxygen: fermentation, becomes preferred. As a result the level of ethanol increases; soon ethanol oxidation is preferred. Once the available ethanol is used up by this pathway the dissolved oxygen concentration rises and the system returns to glucose oxidation. As mentioned above, when D = 0.12 (and kL a = 150), fermentation is not a preferred pathway at any point during the oscillation. The basic feedback processes described above again cause oscillations in this case,

bifurcations

November 26, 2009

15:34



bifurcations

93

however all three pathways are used to a significant degree throughout the oscillation and key metabolic changes are less obvious. Overall, chemical concentrations fluctuate less and the oscillation period is only about 4.33h. Time series plots are given in Fig. B.3. Hopf bifurcations provide the onset for stable oscillatory behavior, however, the behavior near the left-most Hopf bifurcation is actually quite complex, as indicated in Fig. 4.10, which is a magnification of Fig. 4.7. Here the Hopf bifurcation is supercritical giving rise to a stable orbit which then undergoes a period-doubling cascade to chaos over an extremely small interval. The first period-doubling occurs at D ≈ 0.092697 and the solution appears chaotic by D = 0.092700. At D ≈ 0.092701 the attractor suddenly explodes in size and the oscillation amplitude grows considerably. This sudden transition from a small amplitude orbit to a large amplitude orbit is reminiscent of the canard phenomenon [Krupa and Szmolyan (2001); Wechselberger (2005)]. As D decreases from the largest value shown in Fig. 4.10, a periodadding sequence is observed. As discussed in Sec. 1.8, period-adding sequences are characterized by successive jumps in the period in a manner that forms an approximately arithmetic sequence. Dynamical behavior

Fig. 4.10: A magnified view of Fig. 4.7, near the leftmost Hopf bifurcation. Local minimums are not shown. A different scale is used for the period axis.

November 26, 2009

94

15:34



between period-adding windows is determined by the types and order of various local bifurcations. In Fig. 4.10, the period appears to go to infinity in the period-adding sequence. Within the extremely small regions between windows, there exists period-doubling bifurcations and complicated attractors although these attractors deviate only slightly from the observed periodic orbits. The period adding observed here bears an especially strong resemblance to that in the neuronal Chay model [Yang et al. (2006)].

bifurcations

November 26, 2009

15:34


Chapter 5


A border-collision bifurcation occurs for the piecewise-smooth, continuous map (1.14) with (1.11) at µ = 0. At the bifurcation the origin is a fixed point that lies on the switching manifold. As the value of µ is varied from zero, one or more invariant sets such as fixed points, periodic cycles and invariant circles, may emanate from the bifurcation. As discussed in Sec. 1.6, the number and nature of these sets is typically determined by linear terms of the map. This chapter performs rigorous unfoldings of two special situations for which nonlinear terms affect local dynamical behavior. In the literature there are a very limited number of investigations into piecewise-smooth maps for which nonlinear terms affect local dynamics. Perhaps this is because a complete understanding of piecewise-linear maps, even in only two dimensions, is unknown, see Chapter 7. Viktor Avrutin and coworkers have unfolded codimension-two and three bifurcations in one-dimensional, discontinuous maps [Avrutin and Schanz (2005a); Avrutin et al. (2007, 2006)]. They find a codimension-three point that is an organizing center for period-adding phenomena. Unfoldings of codimension-two, sliding bifurcations have been described [Kowalczyk and Piiroinen (2008); Nordmark and Kowalczyk (2006)], see also [Kowalczyk and di Bernardo (2005); Kowalczyk et al. (2006)]. Here a codimension-two point is the intersection of loci of various, distinct, codimension-one, sliding bifurcations. Codimension-two, grazing bifurcations have also been described, see [Zhao and Dankowicz (2006)]. When µ = 0, the origin is a fixed point of both half-maps of (1.14). The multipliers associated with the origin are those of the matrix AL (0), for the left half-map, and AR (0) for the right half-map. If for one halfmap, say the left half-map, the origin is non-hyperbolic (i.e., AL (0) has an multiplier on the unit circle), then a local smooth bifurcation may occur 95

bifurcations

November 26, 2009

96

15:34



for the left half-map at µ = 0 [Kuznetsov (2004); Robinson (2004)]. The nature of the smooth bifurcation is determined by nonlinear terms of the left half-map. Consequently these nonlinear terms affect dynamics of the full piecewise-smooth map local to the border-collision bifurcation at µ = 0. There are three codimension-two scenarios to consider. Namely that AL (0) has a multiplier of 1, a multiplier of -1, and a complex conjugate pair of multipliers with unit modulus. Cases involving a combination of these or AR (0) also having a multiplier on the unit circle, are of a codimension greater than two for the map (1.14) and for this reason are not considered in this book. To unfold codimension-two situations, as elsewhere in this book, a second independent parameter, η, is used. The codimension-two, border-collision bifurcations are assumed to occur at µ = η = 0, and in each case a transversality condition is imposed on η to ensure its utility. A recent analysis of these situations in a general piecewise-smooth map is given in [Colombo and Dercole (unpublished)]. Section 5.1 studies the case that AL (0) has a multiplier of 1. This case is the discrete analogue of the situation studied in Sec. 3.1. As for a piecewisesmooth, ODE system, a locus of saddle-node bifurcations emanates from the codimension-two point and is tangent to the η-axis here. The case that AL (0) has a multiplier of -1 is more complicated because the existence and admissibility of 2-cycles must also be considered. Summarizing the analysis presented in Sec. 5.2, a locus of period-doubling bifurcations emanates non-tangentially from µ = 0 and the generated 2-cycles collide with the switching manifold along a second tangential locus. Different 2-cycles are created at µ = 0 for one sign of η; these collide with the switching manifold and coincide with the former 2-cycles along the second locus. A rigorous unfolding of the case that AL (0) has complex multipliers on the unit circle, say λ = e±2πiω , remains for future investigations, see however [Colombo and Dercole (unpublished)]. Resonance tongues may exist arbitrarily close to the codimension-two point and if ω is rational it seems reasonable that a resonance tongue boundary will emanate from this point.

5.1

A Nonsmooth, Saddle-Node Bifurcation

This section studies (1.14) with (1.11) when 1 is a multiplier of AL (0). This codimension-two situation corresponds to the simultaneous occurrence of a border-collision bifurcation with a saddle-node bifurcation. The generic

bifurcations

November 26, 2009

15:34


bifurcations


97

unfolding is summarized by Theorem 5.1. Note that this theorem is very similar to Theorem 3.1 which unfolds the simultaneous occurrence of a discontinuous bifurcation with a saddle-node bifurcation. Theorem 5.1. Consider the piecewise-C k (k ≥ 4), continuous map (1.14) with (1.11). Suppose that near (µ, η) = (0, 0), AL (µ, η) has a multiplier λ(µ, η) ∈ R with an associated eigenvector, v(µ, η). In addition, suppose (i) λ(0, 0) = 1 is of algebraic multiplicity 1 and is the only multiplier of AL (0, 0) on the unit circle, (ii) b0 = %T (0, 0)b(0, 0) 6= 0, where %T = %T map is given by (1.26). Then v(0, 0) is not orthogonal to e1 thus by scaling we may assume eT 1 v(0, 0) = 1. Finally suppose (iii) ∂λ ∂η (0, 0) = 1, ¯ (iv) a0 = %T ((Dx2 f (L) )(v, v))¯(0,0,0) 6= 0. Then p0 = %T (0, 0)v(0, 0) 6= 0 , and there exists a unique C and

k−2

(5.1) 0

function h : R → R with h(0) = h (0) = 0

p20 , (5.2) a0 b0 such that in a neighborhood of (µ, η) = (0, 0), the curve µ = h(η) corresponds to a locus of saddle-node bifurcations of fixed points of (1.14) that are admissible when h00 (0) =

sgn(η) = sgn(a0 p0 ) .

(5.3)

This theorem may be proved in the same manner as Theorem 3.1. See also the discussion immediately after Theorem 3.1. Basically Theorem 5.1 states that a locus of saddle-node bifurcations emanates from the codimension-two point and at this point is tangent to the η-axis (along which border-collision bifurcations of a fixed point occur). To illustrate Theorem 5.1, consider the following two-dimensional, piecewise-C ∞ , continuous map 1 x0 = 3µ + ηx − 2y + αx2 , 2 (5.4) y 0 = µη − (µ + 1)|x| + 3y ,

November 26, 2009

15:34


98

bifurcations


where α 6= 0 is a constant. The map may easily into the form · 1 be rewritten ¸ η −2 2 (1.14) with (1.11). Then, here, AL (µ, η) = has an eigenvalue µ+1 3 λ(µ, η) = 1 + 2µ + η + O(2), thus conditions (i) and (ii) of Theorem 5.1 are satisfied. When µ = η = 0, the associated eigenvector is v(0, 0) = [1, − 21 ]T . Also %T (0, 0) = [2, 2] and b(0, 0) = [3, 0]T . Consequently (a0 , b0 , p0 ) = (4α, 6, 1) ,

(5.5)

and thus Theorem 5.1 predicts saddle-node bifurcations along µ = h(η) 1 , that are admissible when sgn(η) = sgn(α). where h00 (0) = 24α This prediction may be verified by a explicit computation of fixed points of (5.4). It is easily determined that the x-component of a fixed point in the left half-plane is given by Ã ! ³η ´ r³ η ´2 1 ∗(L) − +µ ± + µ − 4αµ(3 + η) . (5.6) x (µ, η) = 2α 2 2 Saddle-node bifurcations occur at values of µ and η for which the square root term of (5.6) is zero. Via a series expansion it follows that this term 1 η 2 + O(η 3 ) in agreement with the theorem. is zero when µ = h(η) = 48α Furthermore, the saddle-node bifurcations are admissible when 1 x∗(L) (h(η), η) = − η < 0 , (5.7) 4α

η

0.4

0.4

0.2

0.2

η

0

−0.2

µ=h(η)

0

−0.2 µ=h(η)

−0.4 −0.1

−0.4 −0.05

0

µ

(a) α = −0.1

0.05

0.1

−0.1

−0.05

0

µ

0.05

0.1

(b) α = 0.1

Fig. 5.1: Bifurcation sets of the map (5.4) for two different values of α. Solid curves correspond to saddle-node bifurcations and nonsmooth folds. A single fixed point crosses the switching manifold along the dashed curves (persistence). Within each region bounded by the curves there are sketches showing the existence of admissible fixed points relative to the switching manifold. All fixed points shown are unstable.

November 26, 2009

15:34


bifurcations


99

i.e. when η has the same sign as α as predicted by the theorem. Fig. 5.1 shows bifurcation sets of the map (5.4). 5.2

A Nonsmooth, Period-Doubling Bifurcation

The coincidence of border-collision and period-doubling has been observed in real-world systems. Recall that a corner collision in a Filippov system provides an example of a border-collision bifurcation in a map [di Bernardo et al. (2001a)]. In [Angulo et al. (2005, 2008)] the authors describe the coincidence of a corner collision with period-doubling in a Filippov model of a DC/DC power converter. Grazing-sliding (which also corresponds to a piecewise-smooth, continuous Poincaré map, see [di Bernardo et al. (2002b)]) and period-doubling have been seen to occur simultaneously in a model of a forced, dry-friction oscillator [Kowalczyk et al. (2006)]. Here the map (1.14) with (1.11) is studied near the codimension-two scenario that AL (0) has a multiplier of -1. This situation corresponds to the coincidence of a border-collision bifurcation and a period-doubling bifurcation. As for the situation studied in Sec. 3.2, first a highly detailed unfolding is presented in the lowest possible dimension, in this case, in one dimension, see Theorem 5.2. In one dimension the border-collision bifurcations that occur at µ = 0 when η 6= 0 are fully understood. The unfolding is then described in an arbitrary number of dimensions, see Theorem 5.3. This unfolding is accomplished by a restriction of the left half-map to the center manifold whereby results of the one-dimensional unfolding may be applied. Theorem 5.2. Consider the one-dimensional, piecewise-C k (k ≥ 3), continuous map ½ (L) f (x; µ, η), x ≤ 0 0 x = , (5.8) f (R) (x; µ, η), x ≥ 0 where f (L) (x; µ, η) = µb(µ, η) + aL (µ, η)x + p(µ, η)x2 + q(µ, η)x3 + o(x3 ) , f (R) (x; µ, η) = µb(µ, η) + aR (µ, η)x + O(x2 ) . (5.9) Suppose (i) aL (0, 0) = −1, (ii) b(0, 0) = 1,

November 26, 2009

15:34

100


bifurcations


(iii)

∂aL ∂η (0, 0)

= 1.

Let (R)

a0

= aR (0, 0) , 2

c0 = p (0, 0) + q(0, 0) .

(5.10) (5.11)

Then there exists δ > 0 such that the left half-map restricted to the neighborhood ¯ n o ¯ N = (x; µ, η) ¯ |x|, |µ|, |η| < δ (5.12) has a unique fixed point given by a C k function, x∗(L) (µ, η) = 21 µ + O(2), and there exist unique, C k−1 functions h1 , h2 : R → R that satisfy µ ¶¯ ¯ ∂aL h1 (µ) = − + p ¯¯ µ + O(µ2 ) , (5.13) ∂µ µ=η=0 c0 (5.14) h2 (µ) = h1 (µ) − µ2 + o(µ2 ) , 4 such that (1) when µ < 0, x∗(L) (µ, h1 (µ)) has an associated multiplier of −1, and if c0 6= 0 the curve η = h1 (µ) corresponds to a locus of admissible, period-doubling bifurcations of x∗(L) , (2) the origin belongs to a period-two orbit of f (L) on η = h2 (µ) that is admissible when µ < 0, (R) (3) if a0 6= ±1 and c0 6= 0, then fixed points and two-cycles of (5.8) exist in the sectors shown in Fig. 5.2, (R) (4) if a0 < 1 or µ > 0 or η > h2 (µ), (5.8) has no n-cycles for any n ≥ 3 in N , (R) (5) if a0 > 1 and µ < 0 and η < h2 (µ), then (5.8) exhibits chaos in N. A proof is given is Appendix A. Condition (i) is the defining singularity condition. The border-collision bifurcation is degenerate if b(0, 0) = 0, thus b(0, 0) must be nonzero. By scaling µ it may be assumed that b(0, 0) = 1, condition (ii). Condition (iii) is the transversality condition and assumes an appropriate scaling of η. In view of extending Theorem 5.2 to higher dimensions, the theorem is written in a manner that yields a partial result when the non-degeneracy condition on the nonlinear terms, c0 6= 0, is not satisfied. The sign of c0 determines the criticality of the period-doubling bifurcations.

(R)

a0

η

a0

November 26, 2009

(R)

(R)

η

η

< −1 c0 > 0

−1 < a0 < 1 c0 < 0

h2 (µ)

< −1 c0 < 0

h2 (µ)

15:34

µ

µ µ h1 (µ)

h1 (µ) h1 (µ)

(a)

(b) (R)

η

(c) (R)

−1 < a0 < 1 c0 > 0

η

a0 > 1 c0 < 0

(R)

η

h2 (µ)

h1 (µ)

µ

µ

h1 (µ)

h1 (µ)

h2 (µ)

h2 (µ)

(d)

(e)

(f) (R)

101

Fig. 5.2: Sketches of bifurcation sets of (5.8) for different values of a0 and c0 , see Theorem 5.2. Each curve corresponds to either a locus of period-doubling bifurcations or a locus of border-collisions and is dashed when no topological change occurs at the border-collision. Insets show phase portraits with circles used to denote fixed points and triangles used to denote points on two-cycles. These are filled when the solutions are stable and unfilled otherwise. The small vertical lines denote the switching manifold. Chaotic dynamics occurs only for parameter values in the shaded regions; indeed, periodic solutions of a period higher than two only occur in these regions. The bifurcation diagram shown in Fig. 5.3 is taken along the dash-dot line segment of panel (f).


µ

a0 > 1 c0 > 0


h2 (µ)

bifurcations

November 26, 2009

102

15:34


bifurcations


0.2

0.1

x

0

−0.1

−0.2 −0.3

-1

-1

h1 (η) h2 (η)

−0.1

0

0.1

μ

Fig. 5.3: A bifurcation diagram for (5.8) when b = 1, aL = η − 1, aR = 23 , p = −1, q = 32 and there are no additional higher order terms. The value of η is fixed at −0.25. The parameters considered correspond to the dashdot line segment shown in Fig. 5.2. Stable [unstable] fixed points and two-cycles are indicated by solid [dashed] curves. A supercritical perioddoubling bifurcation occurs at µ = h−1 1 (η) ≈ −0.2169; a border-collision bifurcation of the period-doubled solution occurs at µ = h−1 2 (η) ≈ −0.1937. −1 When h2 (η) < µ < 0 there exists a chaotic attracting set. When µ > 0 there is no local attractor.

Theorem 5.2 predicts six different bifurcation sets depending on the (R) value of a0 and the sign of c0 , see Fig. 5.2. In each case the nature of the border-collision bifurcation at µ = 0 for small η 6= 0 may be determined by referring to the discussion of the one-dimensional, piecewise-linear map (1.39) in Sec. 1.6, and Fig. 1.6. By condition (iii) of Theorem 5.2, if η > 0, then at µ = 0, aL = −1 + ε, and if η < 0, then at µ = 0, aL = −1 − ε, for some small ε > 0. For example, along the positive η-axis in Fig. 5.2(a), we have aL > −1 and aR < −1, thus here a single fixed point persists and a 2-cycle is created that coexists with the left fixed point and is stable. In panels (e) and (f), along the negative η-axis we have aL < −1 and aR > 1. At points just to the left of the negative η-axis, both fixed points and a 2-cycle are admissible and unstable. Forward orbits are attracted to a chaotic solution created at the border-collision bifurcation at µ = 0. Unstable high period orbits are also generated at the border-collision bifurcation; these are of even period. To further illustrate the unfolding, Fig. 5.3 shows a bifurcation diagram corresponding to a one-parameter slice

November 26, 2009

15:34



bifurcations

103

of Fig. 5.2(f). The chaotic attracting set collapses to the origin at µ = 0 and to a two-cycle at µ = h−1 2 (η). Two-cycles created in border-collision bifurcations at µ = 0 consist of one point in each half-plane. In contrast, 2-cycles created in period-doubling bifurcations along η = h1 (µ) lie entirely in the left halfplane. Along η = h2 (µ) the two 2-cycles coincide and are given by {0, µb(µ, h2 (µ))}. By computing the second iterate of (5.8), a map of the form (1.14) may be determined to describe the border-collision bifurcations along η = h2 (µ). This is achieved in the proof of Theorem 5.2, see (A.79). (R) The two limiting multipliers are 1−c0 µ2 +O(µ3 ) and −a0 +O(µ). Conse(R) quently 4-cycles arise from η = h2 (µ) exactly when a0 > 1, i.e. in panels (e) and (f) of Fig. 5.2, though these are not shown. The following theorem unfolds the codimension-two scenario of interest in two or more dimensions. Theorem 5.3. Consider the piecewise-C k , continuous map (1.14) with (1.11) and assume N ≥ 2 and k ≥ 4. Suppose that near (µ, η) = (0, 0), AL (µ, η) has a multiplier λ(µ, η) ∈ R with an associated eigenvector, v(µ, η). In addition, suppose (i) λ(0, 0) = −1 is of algebraic multiplicity one and AL (0, 0) has no other multipliers on the unit circle, (ii) %T (0, 0)b(0, 0) 6= 0, (iii) ∂λ ∂η (0, 0) = 1, (iv) the first element of v(0, 0) is nonzero, thus by scaling it may be assumed that eT 1 v(0, 0) = 1, (v) det(I − AL (0, 0)AR (0, 0)) 6= 0. Then, in the extended coordinate system (x, µ, η), there exists a C k−1 three-dimensional center manifold, W c , for the left half-system that passes through the origin and is not tangent to the switching manifold at this point. Furthermore, the left half-map, x0 = f (L) (x; µ, η), restricted to W c ¯ 2%T b ¯ described in the coordinate system (ˆ x; µ ˆ, ηˆ) = (eT 1 x; det(I−AL ) (0,0) µ, η) is given by the left half-map of (5.8) with “hatted variables” and the conditions (i)-(iii) of Theorem 5.2 will be satisfied. Moreover, a unique 2cycle consisting of one point on each side of the switching manifold exists for µ small µ and η. This cycle ¶is admissible exactly when µ ˆ ≤ 0 and ¯ ∂ det(I+AL ) ¯ det(I−AL ) ∂η h2 (ˆ µ). η ≤ sgn ¯ det(I−AL AR ) (0,0)

A proof is given in Appendix A. Conditions (i)-(iii) are analogous to the

November 26, 2009

104

15:34



first three conditions of Theorem 5.2. Condition (iv) is a non-degeneracy condition that ensures the period-doubled cycles collide with the switching manifold in the generic manner. If this condition is not satisfied, a higher codimension situation that may involve a linear separation between h1 (µ) and h2 (µ) will arise. Finally condition (v) is necessary to ensure that nondegenerate, 2-cycles are created at µ = 0. Theorem 5.3 essentially predicts the same basic bifurcation structure as Theorem 5.2. Since the restriction of the left half-map to the center manifold satisfies the conditions of Theorem 5.2 under an appropriate transformation, the curves h1 and h2 also exist for systems of two or more dimensions. The relative position of h1 and h2 is determined by the sign of c0 . In one dimension, c0 is a simple function of coefficients of nonlinear terms of the left half-map (5.11). To obtain the value of c0 in higher dimensions, one may derive an expression for the restriction of the left half-map to the center manifold, then apply the one dimensional result. This is done for an example below. An explicit expression for c0 in N dimensions is not known but is probably too complicated to be of practical use. To illustrate Theorem 5.3 consider the following map 1 1 x0 = − µ − x + y , 2 2 (5.15) 1 3 1 y 0 = − |x| − ηx + x2 . 2 2 4 As with the example in the previous section, (5.15) is easily rewritten in the piecewise form (1.14). Fixed points of (5.15) are given by · ∗(L) ¸ · 1¸ x (µ, η) −2 µ + O(2) , (5.16) = − 14 y ∗(L) (µ, η) · ∗(R) ¸ · 1¸ x (µ, η) − (5.17) = 14 µ + O(2) . y ∗(R) (µ, η) 8 Thus the left fixed point is admissible when µ ≥ 0 and the right fixed point is admissible when µ ≤ 0. A 2-cycle of the left half-map (obtained by replacing |x| with −x in (5.15)) consists of two points. Of these two points, the one that lies closer to the switching manifold is given explicitly by p x∗(LL) (µ, η) = 3η + 2µ + 3η(4 + 3η) , (5.18) 9 1p 1 2µ + 3η(4 + 3η) . y ∗(LL) (µ, η) = µ + η + 2 2 2 Period-doubling bifurcations occur when the square root term is zero, i.e. when µ = −6η− 29 η 2 . Rearranging to make η the subject of the equation

bifurcations

November 26, 2009

15:34


bifurcations


105

yields 1 1 (5.19) η = h1 (µ) = − µ − µ2 + O(µ3 ) . 6 48 To determine h2 , we solve x∗(LL) (µ, η) = 0 for η. This produces 1 η = h2 (µ) = − µ . (5.20) 6 Now consider 2-cycles of (5.15) that are comprised of one point on each side of the switching manifold. The multipliers of the product √ AL (0, 0)AR (0, 0) are 1±8 17 , thus since these do not lie on the unit circle, the 2-cycles exist (but are not necessarily admissible) in a neighborhood of (µ, η) = (0, 0), see Sec. 6.2. Feigin’s results [di Bernardo et al. (1999)], see Sec. 1.6, may be used to determine the sign of η for which admissible 2-cycles are created √ at µ = 0. The multipliers of AL (0, 0) and AR (0, 0) are −1, 21 and − 41 ± 47 i, respectively. Therefore, for small η < 0, when µ = 0, AL has one multiplier less than -1 and AR has no multipliers less than -1, thus by Feigin’s results the 2-cycle is created here. Since the 2-cycle is admissible along η = h2 (µ) for small µ > 0, the 2-cycle is admissible between the negative η-axis and η = h2 (µ). The stability of the fixed points and 2-cycles is easily determined and the map (5.15) has the bifurcation set shown in Fig. 5.4.

0.2

0

η −0.2

η=h2 (µ) −0.4

η=h1 (µ)

−0.6 −1

0

1

µ

2

3

Fig. 5.4: A bifurcation set of the two-dimensional, piecewise-C ∞ map (5.15) near µ = η = 0. Period-doubling and border-collision bifurcations occur along η = h1 (µ) and η = h2 (µ), respectively, as predicted by Theorem 5.3. As in Fig. 5.2, schematics showing fixed points and 2-cycles are included.

November 26, 2009

106

15:34


bifurcations


Now consider the implications of Theorem 5.3 to the map (5.15). Here we have %T (0, 0) = [1, 1], b(0, 0) = [− 21 , 0]T and det(I − AL (0, 0)) = 1, thus µ ˆ = −µ and therefore h1 (µ) corresponds to admissible ¯solutions when ¯ ∂ µ > 0, in agreement with Fig. 5.4. Also, ∂η det(I + AL )¯ = 23 and (0,0)

det(I − AL (0, 0)AR (0, 0)) = 21 , hence by the last statement of Theorem 5.3, 2-cycles with points on each side of the switching manifold are admissible below h2 , which again is confirmed by Fig. 5.4. Via a series expansion (see also the proof of Theorem 5.3), one finds that the left half-map of (5.15) restricted to the center manifold is given by 2 1 1 2 1 ˆx + ηx + µ ˆ − 2ˆ x0 = µ ˆ − x + x2 − µ µη − x3 + · · · (5.21) 2 3 3 3 ¯ ¯ L + p) , given in Theorem 5.2, is equal to − 61 . Also Here the term −( ∂a ¯ ∂µ ˆ (0,0)

1 . Thus h1 (µ) = − 61 µ + O(µ2 ) and h2 (µ) − h1 (µ) = c0 = − 12 matching the explicitly derived results above.

1 2 48 µ

+ O(µ3 )

November 26, 2009

15:34


bifurcations

Chapter 6

Periodic Solutions and Resonance Tongues

Recall from Chapter 1, a bifurcation resulting from the collision of a fixed point with a switching manifold in a piecewise-smooth, continuous map is known as a border-collision bifurcation. As illustrated for the onedimensional, piecewise-smooth, continuous map (1.39), a variety of invariant sets may be created at such bifurcations. Fixed points are the simplest invariant sets. The behavior of fixed points near border-collision bifurcations was described in Sec. 1.6. This chapter studies the existence, admissibility and bifurcations of periodic solutions near border-collision bifurcations. Some discussion of more complex invariant sets may be found in Chapter 7. Dynamical behavior local to a border-collision bifurcation is described by a map of the form (1.14) with (1.11). As argued in Sec. 1.3, nonlinear terms of (1.14) do not influence structurally stable local dynamics. In particular, except in special situations, periodic solutions that emanate from border-collision bifurcations are determined by linear terms of (1.14). This will become clear in Sec. 6.2, where periodic solutions are computed explicitly. Consequently, this chapter studies (1.14) in the absence of nonlinear terms (except in Sec. 6.3 where some special situations are considered). It is useful to denote the first component of a point in phase space, x, by a new variable: s = eT 1x . The map under investigation is then ½ (L) f (x; µ), s ≤ 0 0 x = f (x; µ) = , f (R) (x; µ), s ≥ 0

(6.1)

(6.2)

where f (i) (x; µ) = µb + Ai x , 107

(6.3)

November 26, 2009

108

15:34



for i = L, R. The vector b and the matrices AL and AR (which by continuity of (6.2) differ in only possibly the first column) are assumed to be smooth functions of parameters µ ∈ R and η ∈ RM −1 . A border-collision bifurcation occurs at µ = 0. For fixed µ 6= 0, under variation of η a bifurcation may result when one point of an n-cycle (periodic solution of period n) of (6.2) collides with the switching manifold. Behavior of n-cycles near this bifurcation may be analyzed by studying fixed points of the appropriate nth iterate map of (6.2). As shown in Sec. 6.2, remarkably the nth iterate map will be of the form (6.2) with (6.3). Therefore this bifurcation is a border-collision bifurcation and Feigin’s results [di Bernardo et al. (1999)] (see Sec. 1.6) may be used to determine whether one n-cycle persists or two n-cycles collide and annihilate in a nonsmooth fold. The map (6.2) may be also applied to border-collision bifurcations of periodic solutions that are not local to a single switching manifold. Resonance (or Arnold) tongues are regions in parameter space within which there exists a particular stable periodic solution. Since all bounded invariant sets of (6.2) collapse to a point as µ → 0, in this chapter resonance tongues of (6.2) will be considered within η-space, for fixed µ 6= 0. As was first described in a 1987 paper by Yang and Hao [Yang and Hao (1987)], resonance tongues of piecewise-smooth, continuous maps commonly exhibit a distinctive lens-chain (or sausage) geometry. Alternative nonsmooth scenarios may yield resonance tongues with other interesting geometries, see for instance [Maistrenko et al. (1995); Griffiths and Chou (1986)]. Boundaries of resonance tongues near shrinking points correspond to nonsmooth folds of the stable n-cycle. At such a boundary, one point of the n-cycle lies on the switching manifold. Consequently, a shrinking point is defined geometrically by the occurrence of an n-cycle with two points on the switching manifold. However, it will be seen that there are two cases that must be treated separately: terminating and non-terminating shrinking points. Non-terminating shrinking points are defined algebraically by the singularity of certain matrices (the “border collision” matrices). Terminating shrinking points correspond to the case that the n-cycle has only one point in one half plane and are also defined algebraically but by the occurrence of certain multipliers. It will be shown that the algebraic shrinking point conditions imply the geometrical condition of having two points on the switching manifold. Furthermore, at a shrinking point, the map has an invariant polygon (that is typically nonplanar) on which the dynamics are conjugate to a rigid rotation.

bifurcations

November 26, 2009

15:34



bifurcations

109

Since a shrinking point is defined by two conditions (two points on the switching manifold), the unfolding of a shrinking point bifurcation requires the variation of two parameters. In the generic two-parameter picture, a (non-terminating) shrinking point appears to lie at the intersection of two smooth curves, see Fig. 6.1. However, really there are four distinct curves corresponding to four different nonsmooth folds. Each of the four boundaries is quadratically tangent to one of the others and appears on only one side of the shrinking point. The extension of these boundaries through the shrinking point corresponds to virtual solutions. At each boundary one point of a particular n-cycle lies on the switching manifold. There are curves in parameter space along which each point of this cycle lies on the switching manifold, see Fig. 6.1; however except for the four that form the resonance tongue boundaries, these correspond to virtual solutions. The remainder of this chapter is organized as follows. Symbolic dynamics are introduced in Sec. 6.1 to describe periodic solutions. The periodic orbit corresponding to a particular symbol sequence may be found by solving a linear system, see Sec. 6.2. Section 6.3 discusses resonance tongue boundaries which correspond to bifurcations of stable periodic solutions. The new concept of a “rotational symbol sequence” is introduced in Sec. 6.4 and using symbolic dynamics, periodic solutions may be classified as either rotational or non-rotational. The motivation is that rotational periodic solutions correspond to lens-chain resonance regions whereas nonrotational periodic solutions may not. In Sec. 6.5 the number of distinct rotational periodic solutions is determined. Formal definitions for terminating and non-terminating shrinking points are provided in Sec. 6.6. This section describes the singular nature of shrinking points and the construction of invariant, nonplanar polygons. This sets up Sec. 6.7 that gives the unfolding of the shrinking point bifurcation.

6.1

Symbolic Dynamics

Consider a map g:M→M. (6.4) Sometimes it is not the precise values of points in M that are of interest, but rather their location relative to one or more key points or lines in M. With this in mind, one may partition the phase space M into a small handful of physically meaningful regions, R1 , . . . , Rr . Then each point, x ∈ M, is assigned one of r distinct symbols as determined by the region, Ri , in which

November 26, 2009

15:34


110

bifurcations


0.78

(0)

(1)

0.77

(6) 0.76

Γ

(4)

s

R (2)

0.75

0.74

(3) (5) 0.73 0.282

0.283

0.284

ω

0.285

0.286

Fig. 6.1: A magnified view of Fig. 7.6 showing part of a resonance tongue corresponding to stable 7-cycles for the two-dimensional, piecewise-linear, continuous map (7.5) investigated in Chapter 7. Sketches of four 7-cycles are shown. The orbit with l = 3 (where l denotes the number of points in the left half-plane) is admissible in both gray regions. In the upper region this orbit is stable; in the lower region it is a saddle. Let {xi } denote the points of this orbit. On the curves labeled (i) the point xi lies on the switching manifold. By Theorem 6.1, the curves (0), (1), (3) and (5) form tongue boundaries. A saddle 7-cycle with l = 2 is admissible in the upper region and coincides with {xi } on the boundaries (0) and (1). Similarly, a stable 7-cycle with l = 4 is admissible in the lower region and coincides with {xi } on the boundaries (3) and (5). At the shrinking point there is an invariant heptagon. On the curve Γ, the linear solution system (6.9) is singular. x is located. Thus any forward orbit, {x0 , x1 , x2 , x3 , x4 , . . .} is described by a symbol sequence, e.g. {ABCBC . . .}. A study of the symbol sequences of g may lead to a useful understanding of the map. This is known as symbolic dynamics. Symbolic dynamics seems to have been first developed for onedimensional, unimodal maps (such as the logistic map and the tent map), see [Metropolis et al. (1973)]. Points to the left of the single critical point

November 26, 2009

15:34



bifurcations

111

of the map are assigned the symbol L; similarly points to the right are labeled R. The critical point is labeled C. Corresponding symbol sequences are found to obey certain ordering and composition rules [Hao and Zheng (1998)]. For maps that have multiple critical points more symbols are used. Symbol sequences that begin at a critical point are known as kneading sequences. The overall dynamical behavior of a map is often well determined by its kneading sequences [Milnor and Thurston (1988)]. Symbolic dynamics are commonly applied to circle maps, i.e. with M = S1 in (6.4), see [Hao and Zheng (1998); Dullin et al. (2005)]. If g is a homeomorphism, it is useful to assign the symbol L to any θ ∈ S1 for which g(θ) > θ, and R otherwise. This formulization leads to an association between symbol sequences and rotation numbers and consequently a useful symbolic representation of the Farey tree [Hao and Zheng (1998)]. Piecewise-smooth maps have a natural division of phase space by switching manifolds thus are well-suited to be analyzed with symbolic dynamics. Recent studies of piecewise-smooth, continuous maps that utilize symbolic dynamics include [Zhusubaliyev and Mosekilde (2006b); Sushko et al. (2005); Chang and Juang (2004); Belghith (2000)]. Symbolic dynamics applied to piecewise-smooth, discontinuous maps may be found in [Avrutin and Schanz (2008); Fu and Ashwin (2003); Tse et al. (2005)]. For the remainder of this book, a symbol sequence refers to any sequence, S, that has elements taken from the alphabet, {L, R}. Symbolic dynamics will be used to describe periodic solutions. For this reason all symbol sequences will be of a finite length, n. The elements of S are indexed from 0 to n − 1. Arithmetic on the indices of S is usually modulo n. For clarity, “mod n” will be omitted where it is clear modulo arithmetic is being used. Given n ∈ N, the collection of all symbol sequences of length n is {L, R}n ≡ Σn2 . The ith left cyclic permutation is an operator, σi : Σn2 → Σn2 , defined by (σi S)j = Si+j and the alternative notation, S (i) ≡ σi S will also be used. The ith flip permutation is an operator, χi : Σn2 → Σn2 , that flips the ith element of S (i.e. L → R and R → L) and leaves all other elements unchanged. The notation, S i ≡ χi S will be used. For example if S = LRLRR then S 3 = LRLLR and S (2) = LRRLR. In general S i(j) ≡ (S i )(j) 6= (S (j) )i ≡ S (j)i because with the same example S 3(2) = LLRLR and S (2)3 = LRRRR. The ith multiplication permutation is an operator, πi : Σn2 → Σn2 , defined by (πi S)j = Sij . Notice (πi πj S)k = (πj S)ik = Sijk = (πij S)k thus πi πj = πij . (6.5) Consequently πi is an invertible operator if and only if gcd(i, n) = 1 and

November 26, 2009

112

15:34


bifurcations


the inverse of πi is πi−1 (where i−1 is the multiplicative inverse of i modulo n). Also notice (σi πj S)k = (πj S)i+k = Sij+jk = (σij S)jk = (πj σij S)k . Hence σi πj = πj σij .

(6.6)

Let S Sˆ denote the concatenation of the symbol sequences S and Sˆ and let S k ∈ Σkn 2 denote the symbol sequence formed by the concatenation of k copies of S. A symbol sequence is called primitive if it cannot be written as a power, S k , for any k > 1. It is straight-forward to show that S is primitive if and only if S 6= S (i) for all i 6= 0. 6.2

Describing and Locating Periodic Solutions

Each orbit of (6.2) can be coded by a symbol sequence that gives its itinerary relative to the switching manifold. However, instead of defining symbol sequences for orbits, here it preferable to do the reverse. Given a point x = x0 ∈ RN , let xi denote the ith iterate of x under the maps f (L) and f (R) in the order determined by S ∈ Σn2 : xi+1 = f (Si ) (xi ; µ) .

(6.7)

In general this is different from iterating x under the map (6.2). However, if the sequence {xi } satisfies the admissibility condition: ½ L, whenever si < 0 Si = (6.8) R, whenever si > 0 for every i, then {xi } coincides with the forward orbit of x under (6.2). When (6.8) holds for every i, {xi } is admissible, otherwise it is virtual. For a given symbol sequence S, it is of interest to find x0 ∈ RN such that x0 = xn , because then {x0 , x1 , . . . , xn−1 } is an n-cycle. This particular orbit will be referred to as an S-cycle. S-cycles are determined by the linear system x1 = AS0 x0 + µb , x2 = AS1 x1 + µb , .. . x0 = ASn−1 xn−1 + µb . Elimination of the points x1 , . . . , xn−1 , gives (I − MS )x0 = µPS b .

(6.9)

November 26, 2009

15:34



bifurcations

113

where MS = ASn−1 . . . AS0 ,

(6.10)

PS = I + ASn−1 + ASn−1 ASn−2 + · · · + ASn−1 . . . AS1 .

(6.11)

The linear system (6.9) will be referred to as the n-cycle solution system of S. If (I − MS ) is nonsingular, then (6.9) has the unique solution x0 = (I − MS )−1 PS bµ .

(6.12)

(Note, if (6.2) were ¯ to include nonlinear terms, then we would have x0 (µ) = ¯ (I − MS )−1 PS b¯ µ + O(µ2 ). Thus as long as (I − MS ) is nonsingular µ=0

−1 PS b 6= 0, the point x0 is not qualitatively affected by and eT 1 (I − MS ) −1 PS (i) b 6= 0 for all i, as is typically the nonlinear terms. If eT 1 (I − MS (i) ) case, then by Lemma 6.7 nonlinear terms are unimportant to the entire n-cycle.) Stability of the S-cycle is determined by MS and for this reason MS will be called the stability matrix of S. In view of Corollary 6.1 below, PS will be called the border-collision matrix of S. Notice PS is independent of S0 , thus

PS = PS 0 .

(6.13)

A relationship between MS and MS 0 is deduced from the following lemma. Lemma 6.1. For any N × N matrix, X, XAR = XAL + ξeT 1 , for some ξ ∈ RN . Proof. Since AL and AR are identical in all but possibly their first N columns, we may write AR = AL + ζeT 1 for some ζ ∈ R . This proves the result with ξ = Xζ. ¤ By putting X = ASn−1 . . . AS1 into Lemma 6.1 it follows that MS and MS 0 differ in only their first column. Consequently, the map that describes the nth iterate of x0 under either S or S 0 : ½ µPS b + MS x, s ≤ 0 xn = , (6.14) µPS b + MS 0 x, s ≥ 0 is piecewise-smooth, continuous and has the same form as (6.2). For this reason (6.2) may be used to investigate dynamical behavior local to bordercollision bifurcations of periodic solutions. By (6.12), the first component of the solution to the n-cycle solution system of S is −1 s0 = eT PS bµ . 1 (I − MS )

November 26, 2009

15:34

114


bifurcations


If we let T %T S = e1 adj(I − MS ) ,

(6.15)

(where adj(X) denotes the adjugate of X, see Appendix C), then s0 =

%T S PS b µ. det(I − MS )

(6.16)

An alternative route by which to arrive at (6.16) is to apply the fixed point formula, (1.25), to the piecewise-smooth, continuous map (6.14). The following two lemmas lead to a quite remarkable third formula for s0 . Lemma 6.2. The matrices PS (I −AS0 ) and (I −MS ) differ in only possibly their first columns. Proof. PS (I − AS0 ) = (I + ASn−1 + ASn−1 ASn−2 + · · · + ASn−1 . . . AS1 )(I − AS0 ) expand and group terms differently: = I − MS + (ASn−1 − AS0 ) + ASn−1 (ASn−2 − AS0 ) + · · · + ASn−1 . . . AS2 (AS1 − AS0 ) apply Lemma 6.1: T T = I − MS + ξn−1 eT 1 + ξn−2 e1 + · · · + ξ1 e1

where each ξi ∈ RN , Ãn−1 ! X = I − MS + ξi eT 1 . i=1

¤

T T T Lemma 6.3. %T S PS = det(PS )% , where %S is given by (6.15) and % = T %map is given by (1.26).

Proof.

By Lemma 6.2 and (C.3) we have T T eT 1 adj(PS (I − AS0 )) = e1 adj(I − MS ) = %S T ⇒ eT 1 adj(I − AS0 )adj(PS ) = %S by (C.2)

⇒ %T adj(PS )PS = %T S PS by (1.26) ⇒

det(PS )%T = %T S PS by (C.1)

¤

November 26, 2009

15:34



bifurcations

115

By Lemma 6.3, if (I − MS ) is nonsingular, then by (6.16), s0 =

det(PS ) %T bµ . det(I − MS )

(6.17)

This elegant expression relates s0 simply in terms of the key quantities %T b and µ and the determinants of PS and (I −MS ). (Feigin’s result concerning the existence of 2-cycles (see Sec. 1.6) can be seen by substituting S = LR and S = RL into (6.17).) The next result follows immediately from (6.17). Corollary 6.1. Suppose (I − MS ) is nonsingular, µ 6= 0 and %T b 6= 0. Then the point x0 , given by (6.12), lies on the switching manifold if and only if PS is singular. The following lemma has many symmetries with Corollary 6.1. Lemma 6.4. Suppose PS is nonsingular, µ 6= 0 and %T b = 6 0. Then the n-cycle solution system (6.9) has a solution if and only if (I − MS ) is nonsingular. Proof. Clearly if (I − MS ) is nonsingular, (6.9) has the unique solution (6.12). To prove the converse, suppose that (I − MS ) is singular and for a contradiction suppose (6.9) has a solution, x0 . That is we have (I − MS )x0 = µPS b . Multiplication of this by %T S (6.15) on the left yields det(I − MS )s0 = µ%T b , where we have also used Lemma 6.3. This provides a contradition because the left hand side of the previous equation is zero, whereas by assumption the right hand side is nonzero. ¤ An interpretation of Corollary 6.1 and Lemma 6.4 is presented in Table 6.1. The situation det(I − MS ) = det(PS ) = 0 is generically codimensiontwo. When appropriate non-degeneracy conditions are satisfied it is equivalent to a shrinking point, see Sec. 6.6. Lastly, three basic lemmas relating to n-cycle solution systems that will be used in Sec. 6.6 and Sec. 6.7 are stated and proved. Lemma 6.5. Suppose x solves the n-cycle solution system (6.9) of S and si = 0. Then x also solves the n-cycle solution system of S i . Proof. By continuity: AL xi = AR xi , hence there is no restriction on the ith element of S. ¤

November 26, 2009

116

15:34



Table 6.1: A grid summarizing the nature of solutions to (6.9) when µ 6= 0 and %T b 6= 0 as determined by Corollary 6.1 and Lemma 6.4. MS is the stability matrix of S, (6.10), and PS is the border-collision matrix of S, (6.11).

det(PS ) 6= 0 det(PS ) = 0

det(I − MS ) 6= 0 unique solution and s0 6= 0 unique solution and s0 = 0

det(I − MS ) = 0 no solution possibly uncountably many solutions

Lemma 6.6. Suppose x and x ˆ solve the n-cycle solution systems of S and S 0 respectively. Then det(I − MS )s = det(I − MS 0 )ˆ s. Proof. By (6.9) and (6.13), we have (I − MS )x = (I − MS 0 )ˆ x. Since (I − MS ) and (I − MS 0 ) are identical except in the first column, by (C.3), the first row of their adjugates are identical. Multiplication on the left by this row to the previous equation yields the desired result. ¤ Lemma 6.7. For any i, det(I − MS (i) ) = det(I − MS ). Proof. Suppose w.l.o.g., S0 = L. If AL is nonsingular, then (I −MS (1) ) = AL (I − MS )A−1 L which verifies the result for i = 1. Since nonsingular matrices are dense in the set of all matrices and the determinant of a matrix is a continuous function of its elements, the result for i = 1 is also true even when AL is singular. Repetition of this argument completes the result for any i. ¤ 6.3

Resonance Tongue Boundaries

A resonance tongue is a region in parameter space within which a particular periodic solution exists and is attracting, see Fig. 6.2 for an example. For a smooth map, codimension-one boundaries correspond to familiar smooth bifurcations such as saddle-node and period-doubling bifurcations. For a piecewise-smooth system, tongue boundaries may be border-collision bifurcations. This section looks at the bifurcations that form tongue boundaries for the piecewise-linear, continuous map (6.2). Some discussion concerning the effects of nonlinear terms is also presented. Let R be a resonance tongue for the map (6.2). Let {xi }n−1 i=0 be the associated attracting periodic solution and S its symbol sequence. The

bifurcations

November 26, 2009

15:34


bifurcations


s1 =0

0.16

λ=−1

0.14

ωR

117

s0 =0 S=LLRRRR

0.12

|λ|=1, λ∈C

λ=1 0.1

−0.2

0

0.2

rL

0.4

0.6

Fig. 6.2: A resonance tongue corresponding to an attracting 6-cycle, {xi }, with symbol sequence S = LLRRRR, for the piecewise-linear map (7.5) when ωL = 0.45, sR = 0.7 and µ = 1. The left-most and upper-most tongue boundaries correspond to a collision of x0 and x1 (in the notation of this chapter) with the switching manifold, respectively. Each of the remaining three boundaries corresponds to a multiplier of the associated stability matrix, MS , crossing the unit circle. following two types of codimension-one boundaries arise commonly: (I) sj = 0, for exactly one index j. (II) MS , given by (6.10), has a multiplier on the unit circle. A third scenario is the simultaneous occurrence of several xi on the switching manifold. When this occurs in a codimension-one fashion the boundary is a type I boundary of some lower period solution (or a fixed point) which may or not be stable. Border-collision bifurcation tongue boundaries (type I) For a tongue boundary of type I, there is an index, j, for which xj collides with the switching manifold at the boundary. As shown in Sec. 6.2, this bifurcation is a border-collision bifurcation because local dynamics are unfolded by the map (6.14), which, to lowest order, has the same form as the original map (6.2). Consequently, Feigin’s results [di Bernardo et al. (1999)] (see Sec. 1.6) may be used to classify the bifurcation as either persistence or a nonsmooth fold. The latter case is more frequently encountered and

November 26, 2009

118

15:34


bifurcations


is sometimes called a border-collision fold bifurcation or a border-collision pair bifurcation. In this book it will be referred to as a nonsmooth fold of the periodic solution, or simply a nonsmooth fold. At a nonsmooth fold of {xi }, the periodic solution collides with another periodic solution, say {yi }, that has the same period, at the bifurcation. The orbit {yi } will be unstable and its symbol sequence will be S j . The two periodic solutions will coexist in R near the tongue boundary. This is reminiscent of resonance tongues of circle maps [Boyland (1986)] where stable and unstable periodic solutions coexist throughout tongues and collide and annihilate in saddle-node bifurcations along tongue boundaries. Fig. 6.3 illustrates the other type of border-collision bifurcation: persistence, for a 9-cycle. Note that in both panels only three of the nine points of the periodic solution are shown. Note also that the stable periodic solutions are non-rotational and are discussed more in Sec. 7.4. In panel (a), two distinct, stable 9-cycles are admissible on opposite sides of the bifurcation. In panel (b), a stable 18-cycle is created. The effect of period-doubling is not due to a multiplier of -1, but is rather an artifact of the particular border-collision bifurcation. In general, any solutions with

(a)

(b)

Fig. 6.3: Bifurcation diagrams showing persistence of a 9-cycle of the piecewise-linear map (7.5) when rL = 0.475, ωL = 0.09, µ = 1 and ωR = 0.38 in panel (a), and ωR = 0.375 in panel (b). For all values of sR shown there exists a 9-cycle; drawn solid when stable and dashed when unstable. For clarity, only the three points of the 9-cycle closest to the switching manifold are shown. In panel (b) for sR greater than approximately 0.9479 there exists a stable 18-cycle. Associated resonance tongues are shown in Fig. 7.16.

November 26, 2009

15:34


bifurcations


119

a period that is a multiple of the period of {xi }, in this case nine, may conceivably be created. Except in special cases, the inclusion of nonlinear terms to the map will not affect local dynamics near a border-collision bifurcation tongue boundary. This is because the nth -iterate map, (6.14), has the same piecewise form as (1.14) and the discussion concerning nonlinear terms and structurally stable dynamics given in Sec. 1.2 applies. In contrast, nonlinear terms are important to boundaries of the second type. Stability loss tongue boundaries (type II) The second tongue boundary type listed above corresponds to a loss of stability of {xi }. At such a boundary, one or more multipliers of the stability matrix, MS (6.10), escape the unit circle. In codimension-one situations this may happen in three ways: a real multiplier may pass through 1 or −1 or a complex conjugate multiplier pair may cross the unit circle. Interestingly, for the piecewise-linear map (6.2), the first case does not resemble a saddle-node bifurcation in a smooth map. This is because if 1 is a multiplier of MS , then (I − MS ) is singular. Therefore by Lemma 6.4, the n-cycle solution system of S, (6.9), has no solution (provided the non-degeneracy assumptions of the lemma are satisfied). Consequently,

(a)

(b)

Fig. 6.4: Schematic bifurcation diagrams showing the s-component of one point of an S-cycle near a parameter value at which MS has a multiplier of 1. Panel (a) is a sketch for the piecewise-linear map (6.2). Here the amplitude of the S-cycle approaches infinity as the critical multiplier of MS approaches 1. Panel (b) is a diagram for a piecewise-smooth map with the same linearization as that for panel (a). Here a saddle-node bifurcation occurs as a result of the presence of nonlinear terms.

November 26, 2009

120

15:34


bifurcations


as a multiplier of MS approaches 1, the S-cycle becomes unbounded, see Fig. 6.4(a). Of course this dynamical behavior is somewhat artificial: a result of the absence of nonlinear terms in (6.2). With the addition of nonlinear terms the bifurcation diagram may appear like that shown in Fig. 6.4(b). As µ → 0, the value of η at which the saddle-node bifurcation occurs will approach the bifurcation value in panel (a). The case that a multiplier of MS passes through −1 is now described. Since the resulting bifurcation appears often in Chapter 7, it is useful to assign it a name: nonsmooth period-doubling bifurcation. Assume (I − MS ) is nonsingular and let x0 be given by (6.12). Further, assume that the S-cycle is admissible and has no points that lie exactly on the switching manifold. Then for any point w0 near x0 , the first few iterates of w0 will follow the sequence S. If w0 is sufficiently close to x0 , the first n iterates of w0 will follow the sequence S and consequently wn = µPS b + MS w0 . Near the bifurcation, MS has a multiplier near −1, call it λP D . Let (0) (0) vP D denote the eigenvector of MS at x0 associated with λP D . Since vP D corresponds to the dynamically slow direction of the periodic solution, and since we are assuming the periodic solution is stable on one side of the bifurcation, the remaining multipliers lie inside the unit circle and orbits of (6.2) that start sufficiently close to the periodic orbit approach the image (i) vectors vP D associated with λP D for each xi . This is illustrated in Fig. 6.5.

s=0 (1)

vP D (0)

x0

vP D

x1

s

(2)

vP D

x2

Fig. 6.5: A schematic showing a 3-cycle and its associated slow eigenvectors near a nonsmooth period-doubling bifurcation.

November 26, 2009

15:34


bifurcations


121

In the absence of nonlinear terms, when λP D = −1 points on the slow eigenvectors that are sufficiently close to the n-cycle return to themselves after 2n iterations; therefore, there exists a segment of 2n-cycles with symbol sequence S 2 (the concatenation of S with itself). This family of 2ncycles has a “first” point of intersection with the switching manifold. Let (0) qδ = x0 + δvP D , then for λP D = −1 the orbits of qδ have the symbol sequence S 2 providing δ ∈ [0, δmax ] for some δmax > 0. Moreover, a single point on the 2n-cycle will generically touch the switching manifold at δmax . Without loss of generality, it may be assumed that a permutation of the orbit is selected so that the point that hits the switching manifold first is qδmax . Thus, when λP D = −1 there is a 2n-cycle with symbol sequence S 2 that has its first point on the switching manifold. Since the first symbol is ambiguous, we can also declare that this orbit has the symbol sequence (S 2 )0 . The first component of this solution will typically change and will be admissible for one sign of λP D + 1. This 2ncycle will coexist with either the S-cycle when it is unstable as in Fig. 6.6(a), or when it is stable. A major difference between the nonsmooth perioddoubling bifurcation and its smooth counterpart is that the period-doubled solution appears non-local to {xi }. With the addition of nonlinear terms the bifurcation of Fig. 6.6(a) may appear like in panel (b). Here a smooth period-doubling bifurcation occurs. The generated period-doubled solution quickly collides with the switching manifold in a border-collision bifurcation. Period-doubling-like behavior

(a)

(b)

Fig. 6.6: Schematic bifurcation diagrams showing one point of an S-cycle near where MS has a multiplier of −1. Panel (a) corresponds to the piecewise-linear map (6.2). The inclusion of nonlinear terms will lead to a period-doubling bifurcation and possibly a bifurcation diagram like that shown in panel (b).

November 26, 2009

122

15:34



has also been observed in piecewise-smooth, discontinuous maps [Avrutin and Schanz (2005b)]. A detailed study of the case that MS has complex multipliers that cross the unit circle remains for future work. Some numerical results regarding this situation are presented towards the end of Sec. 7.4. It is anticipated that the bifurcation will have many similarities with the nonsmooth perioddoubling bifurcation described above. Additional complications arise from the effects of strong and weak resonances. 6.4

Rotational Symbol Sequences

Of particular interest is the situation that the map (6.2) exhibits an invariant, topological circle that crosses the switching manifold at two points. When the restriction of the map to this circle is homeomorphic to a monotone increasing circle map, periodic solutions on the circle can only have certain symbol sequences. Here such sequences are given the name rotational symbol sequences. They differ from, but are related to, Sturmian sequences [Morse and Hedlund (1940); Fogg (2002)], see also [Siegel et al. (1992)]. Definition 6.1. Let l, m, n ∈ N, with l, m < n and gcd(m, n) = 1. Let S = S[l, m, n] be the symbol sequence of length n defined by ½ L, i = 0, . . . , l − 1 Sid = (6.18) R, i = l, . . . , n − 1 where d is the multiplicative inverse of m modulo n, i.e. dm = 1 mod n. Then S, and any cyclic permutation of S, is said to be a rotational symbol sequence. Notice d always exists and is unique because m/n is an irreducible fraction [Gallian (1998)]. For example if (l, m, n) = (3, 2, 7) then d = 4, hence S0 = S4 = S8 mod 7=1 = L, thus S[3, 2, 7] = LLRRLRR. Alternatively d may be computed via the Farey tree [Lagarias and Tresser (1995)]. If m1 /n1 and m2 /n2 are the Farey neighbors of m/n (m1 + m2 = m and n1 + n2 = n), then mni mod n = ±1, for i = 1, 2, thus d is either n1 or n2 . A pictorial method for computing S in terms of l, m and n is to select n points on a circle, then draw a vertical line through the circle such that l points lie to the left of the line, see Fig. 6.7. Label the first point to the left of the lower intersection of the circle and line, point 0. Move m

bifurcations

November 26, 2009

15:34



bifurcations

123

5 1 2

4

6 0 3

Fig. 6.7: An illustration of the pictorial method for determining S[3, 2, 7] = LLRRLRR. points clockwise from 0 and label this point 1. Continue stepping clockwise labeling every mth point with a number that is one greater than the previous number until all points are labeled. Then Si = L if the point i lies to the left of the vertical line and R otherwise. The circle represents an invariant circle of (6.2) and the vertical line represents the switching manifold. Taking m steps clockwise corresponds to evaluating the map (6.2) once. Thus S[l, m, n] is the symbol sequence of an n-cycle of (6.2) that has l points to the left of the switching manifold and with rotation number m/n. The following lemma states some basic properties of rotational symbol sequences. Lemma 6.8. Let S[l, m, n] be a rotational symbol sequence. (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f )

S[l, m, n] = πm S[l, 1, n]. (i) (i) If S[l, m, n]0 = L and S[l, m, n]−d = R then i = 0. S[l, m, n] is primitive. S[l, m, n]((l−1)d) = S[l, n − m, n]. S[l, m, n]((l−1)d)0 = S[l, m, n]0(ld) . If 0 < m1 , m2 < n2 are distinct integers coprime to n and l 6= 1, n − 1, then S[l, m1 , n] is not a cyclic permutation of S[l, m2 , n].

Proof. Recall the notation σi S = S (i) , for the ith left cyclic permutation ¯ and χi S = S i for the flip of the ith element.

November 26, 2009

15:34


124

bifurcations


(a) Since dm = 1, (πm S[l, 1, n])id = S[l, 1, n]i = L if and only if i = 0, . . . , l − 1 , matching the definition of S[l, m, n], (6.18). (i) (b) Let j = im (equivalently, i = jd). Then S[l, m, n]0 = (i) S[l, m, n]jd = L implies 0 ≤ j ≤ l − 1. Similarly, S[l, m, n]−d = S[l, m, n](j−1)d = R implies l ≤ j − 1 ≤ n − 1. The only value of j that satisfies both inequalities is zero, hence i = 0. (c) From part (b), S[l, m, n] differs from any non-trivial cyclic permutation of itself in either the 0th or the (−d)th element. Therefore, S[l, m, n] is primitive. (d) By definition, S[l, m, n]id = L if and only if i = 0, . . . , l − 1 , (6.19) and S[l, n − m, n]i(n−d) = L if and only if i = 0, . . . , l − 1 , (6.20) since the multiplicative inverse of (n − m) is (n − d). From (6.19), by letting j = i − l + 1 we obtain ((l−1)d)

thus

S[l, m, n]jd

= L if and only if j = −l + 1, . . . , 0 , (6.21)

((l−1)d) S[l, m, n]j(n−d)

= L if and only if j = 0, . . . , l − 1 ,

which matches (6.20). (e) From (6.21) we obtain ((l−1)d)0

S[l, m, n]id

=L

if and only if

i = −l+1, . . . , −1 . (6.22)

Also S[l, m, n]0id = L if and only if i = 1, . . . , l − 1 , 0(ld)

thus S[l, m, n]jd

= L if and only if j = −l + 1, . . . , −1 , (6.23)

where we have set j = i−l. Equation (6.23) matches (6.22) proving the result. (f) Let d1 and d2 denote the multiplicative inverses of m1 and m2 modulo n, respectively. Let Sˇ = πd1 S[l, m1 , n] , Sˆ = πd1 (S[l, m2 , n](k) ) , where k ∈ Z. Since πd1 is an invertible operator, it remains to show that Sˇ 6= Sˆ for any k ∈ Z. Using (6.5) and part (a) we find Sˇ = S[l, 1, n] .

(6.24)

November 26, 2009

15:34



bifurcations

125

Re-expressing Sˆ in the form we desire is a little more complicated but requires no more that the basic known properties concerning multiplicative permutations, π. Sˆ = (πd1 S[l, m2 , n])(km1 ) , by (6.6) = (πd1 ,n πm2 ,n S[l, 1, n])(km1 ) , by part (a) (km1 ) = (πm,n , where m ˆ = d1 m2 , by (6.5) ˆ S[l, 1, n])

= S[l, m, ˆ n](km1 ) , by part (a). (6.25) Notice m ˆ 6= 1 since m1 6= m2 . Also m ˆ 6= n − 1 since, otherwise, d1 m2 = −1 ⇒ (n − d1 )m2 = 1 ⇒ m2 = n − m1 (since the multiplicative inverse of (n − d1 ) is (n − m1 )), thus m1 + m2 = n which is a contradiction since m1 , m2 < n2 by assumption. Using (6.25), by the definition of a rotational symbol sequence (6.18), if Sî = L, then Sî+dˆ = L for all but one value of i ∈ {0, . . . , n − 1} (where dˆm ˆ = 1). We now show this property ˆ ˇ of S is not exhibited by S and hence Sˇ and Sˆ cannot be equal. ˆ l 6= 1, n − 1, if dˆ ≤ l, then Sˇ ˆ = Using (6.24) and remembering d, l−d Sˇl−d+1 = L and Sˇl = Sˇl+1 = R. Similarly if dˆ > l, we have ˆ Sˇ0 = Sˇ1 = L and Sˇdˆ = Sˇd+1 = R. In either case ˆ Sˇ 6= Sˆ , for any k ∈ Z.

6.5

¤

Cardinality of Symbol Sequences

Let Nn [Nnrot ] denote the number of primitive symbol sequences [primitive rotational symbol sequences] of length n that are distinct up to cyclic permutation. To use combinatorics terminology, Nn is the number of n-bead necklaces of two colors with primitive period n, and it is the number of binary Lyndon words of length n [Lothaire (1983); Charalambides (2002); van Lint and Wilson (2001)]. The formulas below for Nn and Nnrot use the Möbius function:   1 if n = 1 or n is the product of an even number of primes, µ(n) = −1 if n is the product of an odd number of primes,  0 otherwise, i.e. n is not square free, and Euler’s totient function: ϕ(n) = the number of positive integers less than n and coprime to n, where ϕ(1) = 1. The first few values of µ(n) and ϕ(n) are:

November 26, 2009

15:34

126


bifurcations


1 1 1

n µ(n) ϕ(n)

2 -1 1

3 -1 2

4 0 2

5 -1 4

6 1 2

7 -1 6

8 0 4

9 0 6

10 1 4

11 -1 10

12 0 4

Then Nn =

1X n a µ( )2 , n a

(6.26)

a|n

Nnrot = 2 + P

n−3 ϕ(n) , for n ≥ 3 , 2

(6.27)

where a|n denotes summation over all divisors, a, of n. The first formula, (6.26), is well-known (see for instance [Lothaire (1983); Hao and Zheng (1998)] for a derivation). To arrive at (6.27) we count the number of distinct (up to cyclic permutation) S[l, m, n] for an arbitrary fixed n: When l = 1 there is one distinct rotational symbol sequence, namely LRn−1 . Similarly when l = n − 1 there is only Ln−1 R. There are (n − 3) values of l left to consider. For each of these, there are ϕ(n) possible values for m. By n Lemma 6.8f, the ϕ(n) 2 values of m that are less than 2 yield distinct symbol sequences and by Lemma 6.8d, the remaining values of m only produce cyclic permutations. Thus we have (6.27). The first few values of Nn and Nnrot are: n Nn Nnrot

1 2 0

2 1 1

3 2 2

4 3 3

5 6 6

6 9 5

7 18 14

8 30 12

9 56 20

10 99 16

11 186 42

12 335 20

All primitive symbol sequences of length n < 6 are rotational symbol sequences except when n = 1 because L and R are not considered to be rotational. There are four distinct primitive symbol sequences of length six that are not rotational. These are: LRLRRR, LLRLRR, LLRRLR and LLLRLR. Roughly, as n increases the number of distinct primitive symbol sequences of length n that are not rotational also increases. To quantify this statement, Nn (6.26), grows like en , whereas Nnrot (6.27), grows like n2 (since ϕ(n) grows linearly (ϕ(p) = p − 1 for any prime p)). Thus for large n the majority of primitive symbol sequences are not rotational. 6.6

Shrinking Points

Roughly speaking, as in [Yang and Hao (1987)], this book refers to points where lens-chain-shaped resonance tongues have zero width, shrinking

November 26, 2009

15:34



bifurcations

127

points. The aim of this section is to provide a rigorous foundation for the unfolding of shrinking points described in Sec. 6.7. Two classes of shrinking points are defined: terminating and non-terminating. This categorization provides a distinction between shrinking points that lie at the end of a lenschain (terminating) and those that lie in the middle (non-terminating), see Chapter 7. In this section it is assumed that associated symbol sequences are rotational; this assumption is crucial to the analysis. The main results are Lemma 6.9, which states that at a shrinking point there exists an invariant, nonplanar (though planar in special cases) polygon, and Corollary 6.2, which shows that shrinking points are a hub for the singularity of important matrices. Near a shrinking point, a lens-shaped resonance tongue corresponding to the existence of an admissible, stable n-cycle, {xi }, has two boundaries. These correspond to nonsmooth folds of {xi } with an unstable orbit of the same period. At each boundary, one point on the orbit lies on the switching manifold. The first question to address is the following: which points lie on the switching manifold at the two resonance tongue boundaries? Suppose {xi } has an associated symbol sequence that is rotational, S[l, m, n]. We may picture the points, xi , lying on a topological circle, as in Fig. 6.7. The switching manifold intersects the circle at two points. If this structure is maintained as parameters vary, then it seems reasonable that only points that lie adjacent to an intersection can collide with the switching manifold. When l 6= 1, n − 1, there are four such points: x0 , x−d , x(l−1)d and xld . (For example, if [l, m, n] = [3, 2, 7], as in Fig. 6.7, then d = 4 and the four adjacent points are x0 , x3 , x1 and x5 .) Suppose w.l.o.g. that x0 lies on the switching manifold at one resonance tongue boundary. In the interior of the tongue the symbol sequence of the corresponding unstable periodic solution then differs from S in the 0th element, i.e., is S 0 . If we assume that {xi } collides and annihilates with the same unstable periodic solution on the second boundary, it must be x(l−1)d that lies on the switching manifold there because the only index i 6= 0 for which S id is a cyclic permutation of S 0 , is i = l−1. Consequently, in view of Corollary 6.1, since {xi } is not always well-defined, non-terminating shrinking points will be defined by the singularity of PS and PS ((l−1)d) (Definition 6.2 below). In Sec. 6.7 it will be shown that resonance tongue boundaries at which the remaining two points, x−d and xld , lie on the switching manifold, form a second lens-shaped resonance tongue emanating from the shrinking point.

November 26, 2009

15:34


128

bifurcations


As we will see, the cases l = 1 and l = n − 1 correspond to terminating shrinking points. It suffices to consider only one of these cases, we choose l = n − 1, because they are interchangeable via swapping L and R. For the remainder of this chapter it will be assumed that l 6= 1 which greatly simplifies the analysis. A consequence of this is that it is always reasonable to assume that the unstable periodic solution described above always exists (though it may not be admissible). That is (I − MS 0 ) is nonsingular and therefore the n-cycle solution system, (6.9), of S 0 has the unique solution p = p0 = µ(I − MS 0 )−1 PS 0 b .

(6.28)

The ith iterate of p via the symbol sequence S 0 will be denoted by pi and ti will denote its first component. The orbit, {pi }, will play a pivotal role in the analysis. Definition 6.2. Consider the map (6.2) with N ≥ 2 and suppose that µ 6= 0 and %T b 6= 0. Let S = S[l, m, n] be a rotational symbol sequence with 1 < l < n − 1. Suppose PS and PS ((l−1)d) are singular.

(the singularity condition)

Let Sˇ = S and Sˆ = S and assume (I −MSˇ) and (I −MSˆ) are nonsingular. Suppose the orbit, {pi }, of (6.28), is admissible. Then (6.2) is said to be at a non-terminating shrinking point. 0

ld

Definition 6.2 essentially characterizes non-terminating shrinking points as the codimension-two phenomenon at which the border-collision matrices PS and PS ((l−1)d) are simultaneously singular. The following definition for terminating shrinking points is quite different because the defining characteristic of these points is the codimension-two requirement that one fixed point (here x∗(L) because l = n − 1 by assumption) is admissible and has a pair of associated multipliers on the unit circle with a particular rational angular frequency. Definition 6.3. Consider the map (6.2) with N ≥ 2, suppose (I − AL ) is µ%T b < 0 (i.e. the fixed point x∗(L) is admisnonsingular and s∗(L) = det(I−A L) sible, see (1.25)). Let S = S[l, m, n] be a rotational symbol sequence with l = n − 1 and n ≥ 3. Let Sˇ = S 0 and suppose (I − MSˇ) is nonsingular. Suppose e±

2πim n

are multipliers of AL .

(the singularity condition)

Then we say (6.2) is at a terminating shrinking point.

November 26, 2009

15:34



bifurcations

129

In two dimensions, terminating shrinking points are center bifurcations for rational rotation numbers, m/n, studied in [Sushko and Gardini (2008, 2006)]. These authors show there exists an invariant polygon that has one side on the switching manifold, within which all points other than the fixed point belong to periodic orbits with rotation number, m/n. As shown below, in higher dimensions this behavior occurs on the center manifold of 2πim x∗(L) corresponding to the multipliers e± n , call it Ec . It will shown that Ec is two-dimensional and must intersect the switching manifold. The following lemma concerns the orbit, {pi }, of (6.28). The reader should take care to notice that singularity of the matrix PS ((l−1)d) , by Corollary 6.1, implies that pld (not p(l−1)d ) lies on the switching manifold because PSˇ(ld) = PS 0(ld) = PS ((l−1)d)0 = PS ((l−1)d) ,

(6.29)

where the second equality is Lemma 6.8e and (6.13) is used for the last equality. Lemma 6.9. Suppose (6.2) is at a shrinking point. Then, (a) t = tld = 0; (b) if the shrinking point is non-terminating, then td , t(l−1)d < 0 and t(l+1)d , t−d > 0 as in Fig. 6.8; if the shrinking point is terminating, then tid < 0 for all i 6= 0, −1; (c) {pi } has period n; (d) the iterates of p are the vertices of an invariant, nonplanar n-gon, P, that is comprised of uncountably many S-cycles and the restriction of (6.2) to P is homeomorphic to rigid rotation with rotation number, m/n. Proofs of Lemma 6.9 for non-terminating and terminating shrinking points are given in Appendix A. If the shrinking point is terminating, then the polygon P is planar. In general, when N > 2, P is nonplanar as in Fig. 6.9. In any case P has two vertices on the switching manifold. P is comprised of many S-cycles, in other words the n-cycle solution system of S has more than one distinct solution. Therefore at a shrinking point the matrix (I − MS ) is singular. Furthermore, for each i, by Lemma 6.7, (I − MS (i) ) is singular. However, there exist solutions to the n-cycle solution system of S (i) (such as pi ), so to avoid a contradiction with Lemma 6.4, PS (i) must be singular. Consequently we have the following:

November 26, 2009

130

15:34


bifurcations


pld p(l+1)d

p(l−1)d

p−d

pd

p0

s=

0

Fig. 6.8: A schematic illustrating iterates of p, (6.28), on or near the switching manifold at a non-terminating shrinking point.

p3

P p1

p4 p0

p2

s

Fig. 6.9: The invariant, nonplanar polygon, P, at a non-terminating shrinking point corresponding to the rotational symbol sequence S[2, 2, 5] = LRRLR for the map (6.2) when AL and AR are companion matrices (1.27), 28 T 23 ) and (− 14 , 0, 23 )T , respectively. Here b = e1 with first columns (0, 1, 87 3 T and p0 = (0, −1, 2 ) . The switching manifold, s = 0, is shaded gray. Corollary 6.2. Suppose (6.2) is at a shrinking point. Then, (a) (I − MS ) is singular, (b) PS (i) is singular, for all i. The singularity of a matrix is a codimension-one phenomenon. Thus by Corollary 6.2, it is expected there will be curves in two-dimensional parameter space passing through shrinking points along which (I − MS )

November 26, 2009

15:34



bifurcations

131

and each PS (i) is singular. Some of these curves form resonance tongue boundaries, and it is these that form the focus of the next section.

6.7

Unfolding Shrinking Points

This section presents an unfolding of the dynamics near terminating and non-terminating shrinking points. The first step is to perform a coordinate transformation such that, locally, in two dimensions, two tongue boundaries lie on the positive coordinate axes. Recall (6.2) varies with η ∈ RM −1 . Here assume M ≥ 3 and (6.2) is C k+1 (k ≥ 2). Then AL and AR are C k functions of η. Suppose (6.2) is at a shrinking point when η = 0, for some fixed µ 6= 0. Then, det(PS (η)) and det(PS ((l−1)d) (η)) are C k scalar functions that are zero when η = 0. ∂(det(PS ),det(PS ((l−1)d) )) is nonsingular for some ith If the 2 × 2 Jacobian ∂(ηi ,ηj ) th and j components of η, we may utilize the implicit function theorem to obtain a coordinate transformation of η, such that det(PS ) = 0 when ηi = 0 and det(PS ((l−1)d) ) = 0 when ηj = 0. The remaining (M − 3) components of η are not important for the present analysis so will be ignored for the remainder of this section. As in [Simpson and Meiss (2009a)], the scalar parameters η = ηi and ν = ηj will be used (take care to notice the new definition for η). Let x ˇ(η, ν) denote the unique solution to the n-cycle solution system, (6.9), of Sˇ = S 0 for small values of η and ν. Let p = x ˇ(0, 0) (to coincide with (6.28)). If the shrinking point is non-terminating, let x ˆ(η, ν) denote ˆ the unique solution to the n-cycle solution system of S = S ld for small values of η and ν. Let sˇi and sî denote the first components of x ˇi and x î , respectively. From the above assumptions on η and ν, by Corollary 6.1 we ∂ ∂ have sˇ(0, ν) = 0 and sˇld (η, 0) = 0, (see (6.29)). If ∂η sˇ(0, 0) and ∂ν sˇld (0, 0) are both nonzero, η and ν may be redefined via a nonlinear scaling so that sˇ(η, ν) = η(1 + O(1)) , (6.30) sˇld (η, ν) = ν(1 + O(1)) .

(6.31)

Theorem 6.1. Suppose the map (6.2) is a C k+1 (k ≥ 2) function of parameters η and ν, has a shrinking point when η = ν = 0 and (6.30) and (6.31) are satisfied. Write det(I − MS (η, ν)) = k1 η + k2 ν + O(2) , (6.32) and assume k1 , k2 6= 0. As usual assume N ≥ 2. When (I − MS (η, ν)) is nonsingular, let x0 (η, ν) be given by (6.12) and xi+1 be given by (6.7).

November 26, 2009

132

15:34


bifurcations


ˇ Let Ψ1 = {(η, ν) | η, ν ≥ 0}. Then for small η and ν, the S and S-cycles are admissible in Ψ1 and collide in nonsmooth folds at the boundaries, η = 0 and ν = 0 and s0 (0, ν) = 0 whenever ν 6= 0 and s(l−1)d (η, 0) = 0 whenever η 6= 0. If the shrinking point is non-terminating, there exist C k functions ˆ g1 , g2 : R → R such that for small η and ν, the S and S-cycles are admissible in Ψ2 = {(η, ν) | η ≤ g1 (ν), ν ≤ g2 (η)} and collide in nonsmooth folds at the boundaries, η = g1 (ν) and ν = g2 (η) and sld (g1 (ν), ν) = 0 whenever ν 6= 0 and s−d (η, g2 (η)) = 0 whenever η 6= 0. Furthermore, the lowest-order, nonzero terms of g1 and g2 are g100 (0), g200 (0) < 0. A proof is given in Appendix A. Near non-terminating shrinking points, Theorem 6.1 predicts the bifurcation set sketched in Fig. 6.10. The four resonance tongue boundaries that emanate from the shrinking point correspond to the collision of the points of the S-cycle: x0 , x−d , x(l−1)d , xld , with the switching manifold. As mentioned in Sec. 6.6 these are the four points adjacent to the switching manifold in the interior of the tongue. By applying the implicit function theorem to (6.32) there exists a C k function k1 (6.33) h(η) = − η + O(η 2 ) , k2 such that det(I − MS (η, h(η))) = 0. But by Theorem 6.1, S-cycles exist throughout the first quadrant of parameter space therefore the curve ν = ν det(PS ) = 0

ˇ S S,

det(PS ((l−1)d) ) = 0

η det(PS (−d) ) = 0

ˆ S S,

det(I − MS ) = 0

det(PS (ld) ) = 0

Fig. 6.10: A schematic of the generic bifurcation set in a neighborhood of a non-terminating shrinking point.

November 26, 2009

15:34



bifurcations

133

h(η) must not enter this quadrant. Hence, since h0 (0) = − kk21 , k1 k2 < 0 ,

(6.34)

as in Fig. 6.10. By Corollary 6.2, the border-collision matrix (6.11) of every cyclic permutation of S is singular at a shrinking point. Theorem 6.1 describes curves along which some of these matrices remain singular. All other such curves are now described. If p0 and pld are the only points of the n-cycle, {pi }, that lie on the switching manifold (as is generically the case), then for each i 6= 0, l − 1, l, −1 if the shrinking point is non-terminating, and for each i 6= 0, −2, −1 if the shrinking point is terminating, there exists a C k function qi (η) = −

k1 t(i+1)d η + O(η 2 ) , k2 tid

(6.35)

that satisfies det(PS (id) (η, qi (η))) = 0. In each case t(i+1)d and tid have the same sign, thus by (6.34) we have qi0 (0) < 0. Although the bordercollision matrix, PS (id) , is singular along ν = qi (η), these curves are not seen in resonance tongue diagrams because the related periodic solutions are virtual. So far curves passing through the shrinking point along which PS (id) is singular have been described for each i, except for i = −1 when the shrinking point is terminating. Here S (−d) = RLn−1 , hence PS (−d) = I + AL +· · ·+An−1 = (I−AL )−1 (I−AnL ). The matrix AnL has a multiplier 1 with L an algebraic multiplicity of at least two, therefore det(PS (−d) (η, ν)) = O(2). Thus in this case, for small η and ν, generically PS (−d) is singular only when η = ν = 0. In addition, for terminating shrinking points there generically exists a curve in parameter space passing through the shrinking point along which the matrix, AL , has a pair of complex multipliers on the unit circle. As one moves along the curve, the angular frequency of multipliers changes. Whenever the angular frequency is rational there may be additional terminating shrinking points. Such curves correspond to sR = 1 in diagrams shown in Sec. 7.4 and are also described in [Sushko and Gardini (2008, 2006); Zhusubaliyev and Mosekilde (2008b)]. The border-collision bifurcations occurring on resonance tongue boundaries are described by piecewise-linear maps of the form (6.14). Theorem 6.1 states that these bifurcations are nonsmooth folds, thus we may use Feigin’s results [di Bernardo et al. (1999)] (see Sec. 1.6) to determine the

November 26, 2009

134

15:34



relative stability of periodic solutions near shrinking points. Let ai [S] denote the number of real multipliers of MS that are greater than one in ˇ and a2 [S] + a2 [S] ˆ are odd. Also, the interior of Ψi . Then a1 [S] + a1 [S] det(I − MS (η, ν)) = O(1), (6.32), thus |a1 [S] − a2 [S]| = 1. Consequently, ˇ if S-cycles are stable in the interior of Ψ1 , then S-cycles are unstable and S-cycles are unstable in the interior of Ψ2 . Finally, notice that at shrinking point an orbit intersects a switching manifold at two distinct points. For this reason shrinking points do not occur for the one-dimensional map (1.39) because here the switching manifold is a single point. The one-dimensional, piecewise-linear, circle map studied in [Yang and Hao (1987)] exhibits lens-chain structures because it has two switching manifolds. Furthermore, shrinking points typically do not occur for a map that has nonlinear terms. In this case a lens-chain geometry only appears in the limit of parameter values towards the border-collision bifurcation of the fixed point (i.e. µ → 0 for (1.14)). It remains to be determined exactly how shrinking points break apart as µ is varied from zero.

bifurcations

November 26, 2009

15:34


Chapter 7

Neimark-Sacker Bifurcations in Planar, Piecewise-Smooth, Continuous Maps As a fixed point of a piecewise-smooth, continuous map crosses a switching manifold under parameter variation, its associated multipliers may change discontinuously. This chapter studies border-collision bifurcations that result when the map is two-dimensional and the multipliers are complex and jump from inside to outside the unit circle at the bifurcation. This basic behavior has recently been demonstrated in power converters [Zhusubaliyev et al. (2008, 2006); Dai et al. (2007)]. It will be shown that these bordercollision bifurcations exhibit diverse dynamical behavior, some akin to that of a Neimark-Sacker bifurcation in a smooth map, some like that of other border-collision bifurcations, and some phenomena that is possibly original. Recall, in Sec. 1.2 it was argued that structurally stable dynamical behavior local to border-collision bifurcations is independent of nonlinear terms of the piecewise-smooth, continuous map (1.14). Furthermore, as detailed in Sec. 1.4, when (1.14) is observable, (1.11) may be transformed to (1.34). Since this chapter assumes (1.14) is two-dimensional and has associated complex-valued multipliers, by Corollary 1.1, the map is indeed observable. In this chapter the constant vector b in (1.14), is chosen to be e1 in order to match [Simpson and Meiss (2008a)], instead of eN as given in the canonical form and used elsewhere in this book. By Theorem 1.1, this difference is immaterial, the only effect is to alter the precise x and y values of orbits. This chapter studies the map (x0 , y 0 ) = Fµ (x, y; τL , τR , δL , δR ), where Fµ is piecewise-linear, defined by · ¸  · ¸ 1 x  · 0¸  + AL ,x≤0 µ x 0 y · ¸ · ¸ = , (7.1)  y0 1 x  µ + AR ,x≥0 0 y 135

bifurcations

November 26, 2009

136

15:34


bifurcations


· where AL =

¸ · ¸ τL 1 τR 1 , AR = . −δL 0 −δR 0

(7.2)

As discussed in Sec. 1.2, as with other piecewise-linear systems (7.5) has the scaling symmetry Fλµ (λx, λy; τL , τR , δL , δR ) = λFµ (x, y; τL , τR , δL , δR ), ∀λ > 0.

(7.3)

Consequently if I is an invariant set under Fµ , then λI is an invariant set for Fλµ , (λ > 0). Therefore every bounded invariant set collapses onto the origin as µ → 0, and it is sufficient to consider only µ ∈ {1, 0, −1}. The parameters τi and δi are the trace and determinant of Ai (7.2), respectively, for i = L, R. By Lemma 1.1, (7.1) is a homeomorphism of R2 if and only if δL δR > 0. If δL , δR > 0, the inverse, Fµ−1 , is related to Fµ simply by Fµ−1 (x, y; τL , τR , δL , δR ) = F−µ (y, x;

τR τL 1 1 , , , ). δR δL δR δL

(7.4)

Thus the dynamical properties of F for µ > 0 are the same as those of F −1 for µ < 0 for a different combination of parameter values. The remainder of this chapter is organized as follows. First Sec. 7.1 defines a new map (7.5), which is the same as (7.1) except an alternative parameter set that is better suited for complex multipliers is used in place of {τL , τR , δL , δR }. Rotation numbers are then defined for (7.5). Section 7.2 describes basic Neimark-Sacker-like behavior of (7.5) and illustrates the effect of adding nonlinear terms. Section 7.3 rigorously proves the existence or absence of attracting sets for limiting values of the parameters. In some cases it is shown that the attracting set persists for nearby parameter values. Particularly for the case of complex multipliers, it is of interest to compute resonance tongues. As detailed in Chapter 6, resonance tongues of piecewise-smooth, continuous maps commonly exhibit a lens-chain structure. Section 7.4 provides a detailed discussion of resonance tongues and related dynamics for the map (7.5). Curves of shrinking points (see Sec. 6.6 and Sec. 6.7), solutions with irrational rotation numbers and non-rotational periodic solutions (see Sec. 6.4) are then discussed in Sec. 7.5. Finally Sec. 7.6 looks at the case that the fixed point on the switching manifold is a saddle and presents a brief investigation into coexisting attractors. Throughout this chapter the variable z will be used to denote a point (x, y)T ∈ R2 . Also, “right half-plane” will be abbreviated to RHP; similarly “left half-plane” will be abbreviated to LHP.

November 26, 2009

15:34


Neimark-Sacker-Like Bifurcations

7.1

bifurcations

137

A Two-Dimensional Map

This chapter studies the map (7.1) when AL and AR , (7.2), have multipliers rL e±2πiωL and s1R e±2πiωR respectively, where rL , sR ∈ (0, 1) and without loss of generality ωL , ωR ∈ (0, 21 ). Note that this corresponds to the case 2 that 0 < δL = rL < 1 and 1 < δR = 1/s2R , so that the map (7.1) is an orientation preserving homeomorphism. With these new parameters, the map becomes  · ¸ · ¸· ¸ 1 2rL cos(2πωL ) 1 x   ,x≤0 · 0¸  2 µ 0 + 0# y −rL x " · ¸ · ¸ = . (7.5) 2  x 1 y0 sR cos(2πωR ) 1   , µ + x ≥ 0 1  0 − s2 y 0 R

In this chapter, the map (7.5) will be denoted (x0 , y 0 ) = fµ (x, y; rL , sR , ωL , ωR ). The existence of fixed points and 2-cycles may be determined by Feigin’s results [di Bernardo et al. (1999)] (see Sec. 1.6). Both AL and AR have no real-valued multipliers, hence using the notation defined in Sec. 1.6, σ1+ = σ2+ = σ1− = σ2− = 0. Thus (7.5) has a unique fixed point for all µ ∈ R and the map has no 2-cycles for any values of the parameters. Explicitly, the fixed point is · ¸  µ 1  · ∗ ¸   2 2 , µ≤0 x (µ) rL − 2rL cos(2πωL ) + 1 −rL · ¸ z ∗ (µ) = = . (7.6) µ  y ∗ (µ) s2R   2 , µ≥0 sR − 2sR cos(2πωR ) + 1 −1 The fixed point moves from the left half-plane when µ < 0 where it is a stable focus, to the origin at µ = 0, and then to the right half-plane when µ > 0 where it is an unstable focus. Since (7.5) is a homeomorphism its inverse is given by the symmetry (7.4). Explicitly the inverse is  · ¸ · ¸· ¸ 0 0 −s2R x   + ,y≤0 µ  −1 1 2s cos(2πω ) y R R# · ¸ " · ¸ fµ−1 (x, y) = . (7.7) 0 − r12  0 x  L  , y≥0  µ −1 + 1 2 cos(2πω ) y L r L

Rotation numbers The rotation number (or winding number) of an orbit of a map is a characterization of the average increase in angle per iteration. It is most easily

November 26, 2009

138

15:34


bifurcations


defined for maps on circles or annuli. The rotation number for a map on R2 can be defined relative to a fixed point, z ∗ , if one exists, because removing z ∗ from the plane leaves an annulus [Le Calvez (2001); Franks (1990); Schwartzman (1957)]. An alternative, intrinsic definition is called the “self-rotation number” [Dullin et al. (2000); Peckham (1990)]. The first definition is dependent upon the choice of z ∗ , but since (7.5) has a unique fixed point for any combination of parameter values, it is natural to define the rotation number about this point. Since orbits of (7.5) rotate in a clockwise direction about z ∗ , (7.6), the angle φ : R2 \ {z ∗ } → (−π, π] will be defined as φ(z) = polar angle of (x − x∗ ) − i(y − y ∗ ) = atan2(y ∗ − y, x − x∗ ) , where atan2 is the two argument arctangent. To compute the rotation number one simply averages the changes in φ over iterations of the map. Let ∆φ : R2 \ {z ∗ } → [0, 2π), be ∆φ(z) = φ(f (z)) − φ(z) mod 2π . Then the rotation number of an orbit is n−1 1 X ∆φ(zi ) , n→∞ 2πn i=0

ρ(z) = lim

(7.8)

if this limit exists. The following lemma tells us that the limit always exists and gives upper and lower bounds. Lemma 7.1. Suppose 0 < rL , sR < 1, 0 < ωL , ωR < 21 and µ ∈ R, as usual. Then for any z ∈ R2 \ {z ∗ } (where z ∗ is given by (7.6)) the limit (7.8) exists and 0 < ρ(z)
1 and when it is subcritical, the opposite is true. For small µ, dynamical behavior on the circle is determined by the rotation number ω(µ). If ω(µ) = m n with gcd(m, n) = 1 and n > 4, the motion is called weakly resonant or mode-locked and there generically exist two or more n-cycles on the invariant circle. When n ≤ 4, the dynamics is strongly resonant and an invariant circle need not exist [Kuznetsov (2004); Arnold (1988)]. When ω(µ) is irrational, all orbits on the circle are dense and quasiperiodic. The behavior of the piecewise-smooth map (7.5) can be much more complicated when µ crosses zero. However for some parameter values, its behavior is similar to the classical Neimark-Sacker bifurcation; two example bifurcation diagrams for (7.5) are shown in Fig. 7.1. For panel (a) of the figure, when µ < 0 the stable fixed point is a global attractor, see Fig. 7.2(a). When µ > 0 the fixed point is unstable and is encircled by a stable invariant circle with rotation number ρ ≈ 0.1601 whose basin of attraction appears to be the entire phase space except for the fixed point, Fig. 7.2(b). Consequently, this bifurcation is analogous to a supercritical Neimark-Sacker bifurcation. An important difference is that, unlike in smooth systems, the size of the invariant circle grows linearly with respect to µ. This is a simple consequence of the scaling symmetry (7.3) and is common in other bifurcations in piecewise-smooth systems. By contrast, the bifurcation shown in Fig. 7.1(b) is analogous to a subcritical Neimark-Sacker bifurcation. When µ < 0, there is an unstable

November 26, 2009

140

15:34



(a) sR = 0.95

(b) sR = 0.85

Fig. 7.1: Bifurcation diagrams of (7.5) when ωL = ωR = 0.16, rL = 0.9, for two different values of sR . Solid [dotted] lines denote stable [unstable] solutions. In each panel one fixed point exists for each value of µ and the maximum and minimum x values of an invariant circle that is created at µ = 0 are shown as double lines. Phase portraits corresponding to panel (a) are shown in Fig. 7.2. invariant circle whose radius shrinks linearly to zero as µ → 0− . Points inside the circle are attracted to the stable fixed point, whereas the forward orbits of points outside the circle are unbounded. When µ > 0 the orbit of every initial condition, except for the unstable fixed point, is unbounded. A fundamental question regarding the map (7.5) is: what governs the criticality of the Neimark-Sacker-like bifurcation? As will be shown, the

(a) µ = −1

(b) µ = 1

Fig. 7.2: Phase portraits of (7.5) with the same parameter values as Fig. 7.1, panel (a). In both panels one orbit is shown and the first few iterates are connected to illustrate the direction of motion. The fixed point is indicated by an asterisk.

bifurcations

November 26, 2009

15:34


bifurcations


141

answer is not simple. For instance there may exist no invariant circles for any value of µ, or both supercritical and subcritical behavior may be observed together, see Sec. 7.6. Furthermore, the invariant circle is not, geometrically speaking, an ellipse. It will be seen below that the attracting set may appear fractal. For piecewise-linear, continuous, area-preserving maps, invariant circles may be the piecewise union of arcs of conic sections [Lagarias and Rains (2005b)]. Numerical simulations suggest (7.5) does not exhibit strong resonance. Significantly different dynamical phenomena has not been observed when ωL = ωR = 1/3 or 1/4. The addition of nonlinear terms to (7.5) does not affect structurally stable dynamics for sufficiently small values of µ. For instance, bifurcation diagrams are shown in Fig. 7.3 for the map · 0¸ · 2¸ x x = f (x, y) − . (7.10) µ y0 0 In panel (a), the parameter values of Fig. 7.1, panel (a) are used. For small µ > 0, an attracting invariant circle grows in amplitude approximately linearly with respect to µ. For larger values of µ the invariant circle undergoes mode-locking. In panel (b), parameters are chosen such that the map, (7.5), has a stable 3-cycle for µ > 0. For small µ > 0, the nonlinear map exhibits the

0.4 0.1

0

0

y

x

−0.1

−0.4 −0.2

−0.8

−0.3 0.2 0

0.02

0 0.04

μ

0.06

(a)

0.08

−0.2

x

0

0.1

μ

0.2

0.3

(b)

Fig. 7.3: Bifurcation diagrams of the nonlinear map, (7.10), computed numerically by plotting forward orbits after transients have decayed. In panel (a) the parameter values are the same as for Fig. 7.1(a); in panel (b), ωL = ωR = 0.4, rL = 0.2 and sR = 0.7. In panel (b) the corresponding bifurcation diagram of (7.5) is superimposed - shown as dashed lines.

November 26, 2009

142

15:34



same periodic solution which initially grows at the same linear rate as for the piecewise-linear map. However, as µ is increased the 3-cycle undergoes a period-doubling cascade. The cascade is comprised of usual smooth perioddoubling bifurcations where the attracting set is bounded away from the switching manifold.

7.3

Limiting Parameter Values

This section provides theorems and proofs regarding the existence or absence of an attractor for some limiting values of the parameters. When either rL or ωL is sufficiently small it is proved below that there exists an asymptotically stable invariant set (Theorems 7.1 and 7.2). In both cases the invariant set is first shown to exist in the limit that the parameter is zero, then, as in [Nusse and Yorke (1992)], persistence of the invariant set for nearby parameter values is proved. When ωR = 0 almost all forward orbits are unbounded (Theorem 7.3). Throughout this section f = f1 denotes the map (7.5), when µ = 1. Theorem 7.1. Consider (7.5) with µ = 1 and assume 0 < sR < 1, 0 < ωL , ωR < 1/2 as usual. Then there is an ε > 0 such that whenever 0 ≤ rL < ε, the map has an asymptotically stable invariant set. Proof. First suppose rL = 0. Since µ = 1, the unique fixed point of (1.14) lies in the RHP. The fixed point is an unstable focus, thus any point in the RHP other than the fixed point maps into the LHP in finitely many steps. Moreover, if z = (x, y)T is the first point in the LHP, then it is easy to see that y < 0. The image of this point is f (z) = (y + 1, 0)T , with an x component less than one. If this image is still in the LHP then the second iterate f 2 (z) = (1, 0)T ∈ RHP. Consequently, any point in the LHP maps into the RHP in at most two steps. Thus the forward orbit of every point other than the fixed point intersects the segment I = {(x, 0)T | x ∈ [0, 1]}. Since I is compact, there is an N ∈ N such every point in I maps back into I in at most N steps. Hence Ω=

N [

f i (I) ,

i=0

is a compact, bounded, forward invariant set of f . Note that z ∗ ∈ / Ω. Let Σ be any compact neighborhood of Ω, Ω ⊂ int(Σ), that does not contain

bifurcations

November 26, 2009

15:34



bifurcations

143

the fixed point. Since Σ is compact, every point in Σ maps to I, thus there ˆ ∈ N such that f Nˆ (Σ) ⊂ Ω, i.e., Σ is a trapping set for f Nˆ . is an N When rL is small, a similar construction must hold: since (7.5) depends continuously on rL , there is an ε > 0 such that whenever 0 ≤ rL < ε, Σ is ˆ still a trapping set for f N . Let ∞ \ Λ= f i (Σ) . (7.11) i=0

Then Λ is an attracting set for (7.5); it is necessarily asymptotically stable and invariant. ¤ The attracting set (7.11) may not be an “attractor” as it need not be minimal or chain-transitive [Perko (2001); Robinson (1999)]. Indeed, it will be seen in Sec. 7.6 that f can have multiple attractors. Theorem 7.2. Consider (7.5) with µ = 1 and 0 < rL , sR < 1, 0 < ωR < 1/2 as usual. Then there is an ε > 0 such that whenever 0 ≤ ωL < ε, the map has an asymptotically stable invariant set. Proof.

When ωL = 0, the left half of (7.5) becomes · ¸ · ¸ 1 2rL 1 z 0 = AL z + , AL = . 2 0 −rL 0

2 T ∗ ) This linear map has a unique (virtual) fixed point zL = (1−r1 L )2 (1, −rL in the RHP, see Fig. 7.4(a). AL has a repeated eigenvalue rL , and a single eigenvector (1, −rL )T . The one-dimensional invariant manifold E rL , of the rL > 0. Observe E rL separates virtual fixed point intersects the y-axis at 1−r L orbits of the left half-map (i.e., if z is below [above] E rL , then so is z 0 ). Let 1 − x)}, see Fig. 7.4(a). Now consider Ξ = {(x, y)T | x, y ≥ 0, y ≤ rL ( 1−r L the forward orbit of any z ∈ Ξ under the full map (7.5). Since the map in the RHP corresponds to an unstable focus, z maps to a point zˆ in the LHP in finitely many steps, and since for any x > 0, y 0 = − s12 x < 0, zˆ lies below R the x-axis. Every point in the LHP below E rL maps into the RHP below 2 E rL in finitely many steps. Since for any x < 0, y 0 = −rL x > 0, the first iterate in the RHP will lie above the x-axis, thus in Ξ. Since Ξ is compact, there is an N ∈ N, such that for all z ∈ Ξ, f n (z) ∈ Ξ for some n ≤ N . Hence,

Ω=

N [

f i (Ξ) ,

i=0

is a compact, bounded, forward invariant set for f .

November 26, 2009

15:34


144

bifurcations


Following the argument in Theorem 7.1, this implies that for 0 ≤ ωL < ² there exists an attracting set Λ (7.11) for f , where Σ is a neighborhood of Ω. ¤ y

y

E rL

rL 1−rL

Ξ

III

1 1−rL

II

x

x

z*L

−1 1−sR

I z*

(a)

ϒ

(b)

Fig. 7.4: Partitions of phase space when µ = 1, applied in Theorems 7.2 and 7.3. In panel (a) ωL = 0; in panel (b) ωR = 0. Theorem 7.3. Consider (7.5) with µ = 1 and the limiting case ωR = 0. Assume the remainder of the parameter values satisfy 0 < rL , sR < 1, 0 < ωL < 1/2 as usual. Then the forward orbit of any point other than the fixed point is unbounded. Proof.

When ωR = 0 the right half of (7.5) becomes # " · ¸ 2 1 sR 1 0 . z = AR z + , AR = − s12 0 0 R

This linear map has a unique fixed point z = − (1−s1R )2 (s2R , −1)T in the RHP. AR has a repeated eigenvalue s1R , and a single eigenvector (sR , −1)T whose associated one-dimensional invariant manifold Σ, intersects the y1 < 0. Let Υ be the line parallel to Σ which passes through the axis at − 1−s R origin. Υ partitions phase space into three regions as shown in Fig. 7.4(b). Region III, the set {(x, y)T | x ≥ 0, x > −sR y}, is forward invariant for (7.5) because for any z in region III, z 0 = ( s2R x + y + 1, − s12 x)T , that is, ∗

R

x0 =

1 2 2 1 x+y+1> x− x + 1 ⇒ x0 > x>0. sR sR sR sR

Using x = −s2R y 0 , we see x0 > −sR y 0 , hence z 0 is in region III. Since the map in the LHP corresponds to a virtual stable focus, and since for any

November 26, 2009

15:34



bifurcations

145

2 x < 0, y 0 = −rL x > 0, every point in region II is mapped into region III in finitely many iterations. Thus the forward orbit of any point either starts in the RHP and remains there, or enters region III via the LHP in finitely many steps and remains in region III. In any case the tail of the forward orbit is contained in the RHP and since dynamics in the RHP are governed by an unstable linear map, the forward orbit of every point except z ∗ is unbounded. ¤

The limiting case, sR = 1 has been described previously, [Sushko and Gardini (2008, 2006); Puu et al. (2006); Gallegati et al. (2003)]. It will be discussed further in the next section.

7.4

Resonance Tongues

Numerical computation of resonance tongues Figs. 7.5, 7.6, and 7.7 show numerically computed regions of existence of stable periodic orbits with periods shown in the bar at the bottom of Fig. 7.5. As is commonly observed in piecewise-smooth systems, these tongues have the form of a chain of lens-shaped regions (or sausages) [Zhusubaliyev and Mosekilde (2003); Puu and Sushko (2006)]. The rotation number of each lens-chain is fixed and, as will be discussed below, within a given chain the symbol sequence of the associated stable periodic solution changes from lens to lens. The tongues emanate from sR = 1 and their sizes are ordered by the Farey sequence as indicated along the top of Fig. 7.5. In some places tongues overlap corresponding to the coexistence of multiple stable periodic solutions. The figures are computed on a grid of 1024 frequency values and 128 values of sR . For each set of parameters, the admissibility conditions, see (6.8), and the stability conditions (that the multipliers of the stability matrix (6.10) lie inside the unit circle) were checked for periodic solutions up to period 30 with symbol sequences that are rotational (see Sec. 6.4). (Some non-rotational symbol sequences were also checked near codimension-two, nonsmooth period-doubling bifurcations, see Sec. 7.5.) If no stable n-cycle was found, N iterates were computed along the forward orbit of the point z = (M, 0)T for N up to 104 . If maxni=0 |x(i) | appeared to grow steadily as n → N , this orbit is declared to be unbounded, and the corresponding point is shaded white. Otherwise the point is shaded black and presumably corresponds to bounded motion that has a period larger than 30 or

November 26, 2009

15:34


146

bifurcations


1 1 10 9

1

1 8

1 7

1 6

1 5

2 9

1 4

2 7

3 10

1 3

3 8

2 5

3 7

4 9

0.8

sR 0.6 0.4 0.2

φ = 0.1

0

0.1

0.2

0.3

0.4

0.5

1 0.8

sR 0.6 0.4 0.2

φ = 0.02

0

0.1

0.2

0.3

0.4

0.5

1 0.8

sR 0.6 0.4 0.2

φ = –0.02

0

0.1

0.2

0.3

0.4

0.5

1 0.8

sR 0.6 0.4 0.2

φ = –0.1

0

0.1

0.2

0.3

0.4

0.5

ω

R

3

4

5

6

7

8

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 Fig. 7.5: Resonance tongues of (7.5) when µ = 1, rL = 0.2, ωL = ωR + φ for four different values of φ. Each region corresponds to the existence of a stable periodic orbit with period shown in the bar at the bottom. White regions correspond to unbounded orbits, and black to orbits with period larger than 30.

November 26, 2009

15:34


bifurcations


(a) A

147

1 0.8

sR 0.6 0.4 0.2 0

(b) B

0.1

0.2

0.1

0.2

0.3

0.4

0.5

0.3

0.4

0.5

1 0.8

sR 0.6 0.4 0.2 0

ωR Fig. 7.6: Resonance tongues of (7.5) when µ = 1. In panel (a), rL = 0.3, ωL = 0.09; in panel (b), rL = 0.16, ωL = 0.38. In panel (b), the overlapping of 1/3, 1/4 and 2/7 tongues is emphasized. The color scheme is the same as Fig. 7.5.

is non-periodic. Since the orbits for small ωR appear to range over a large domain, the large value M = 1012 was used. In some cases, multiple attracting periodic solutions exist, and the algorithm used simply chose the first periodic orbit that it found. Notice in Fig. 7.5 when ωR = 0, there are no stable solutions for any value of sR as foreseen by Theorem 7.3. Similarly when ωL = 0 (as seen in the lower two diagrams when ωR = −φ), there is a stable solution for all values of sR in accordance with Theorem 7.2. Notice in Fig. 7.7 the diagram corresponding to the smaller value of rL (panel (b)) has stable orbits over a larger range of parameter space than in panel (a), as might be expected from Theorem 7.1. Fig. B.4 shows resonance tongues using alternative parameters on the axes. Fig. B.5 shows resonance tongues when nonlinear terms are added and for a smooth approximation to (7.5). Dynamics near sR = 1 First the dynamics for the limiting case, sR = 1, is described. This corresponds to the top edge of Figs. 7.5, 7.6, and 7.7. When µ = 1, the fixed point, z ∗ , (7.6), lies in the RHP and is a center. Points sufficiently near z ∗

November 26, 2009

15:34

148


bifurcations


(a) A

sR

1 0.9 0.8 0.7

(b) B

sR

0.6 0 1

0.1

0.2

0.1

0.2

0.3

0.4

0.5

0.3

0.4

0.5

0.8 0.6 0.4 0.2 0

ωR = ωL Fig. 7.7: Resonance tongues of (7.5) for equal polar angles, i.e. ωL = ωR , when µ = 1. In panel (a), rL = 0.6; in panel (b), rL = 0.2. The color scheme is the same as Fig. 7.5.

rotate around it with rotation number ωR , on invariant ellipses contained in the RHP. The largest of this family of nested ellipses has one point on the switching manifold. The boundary of the region in phase space within which this rigid rotation occurs has a geometry dependent upon the rationality of ωR [Sushko and Gardini (2008)]. When ωR is irrational the boundary is the largest ellipse. When ωR = m/n is rational, the boundary is an invariant n-sided polygon, P. In this case there are points in the region bounded by the largest ellipse and P. These points simply belong to m/n-cycles contained in the RHP. Whenever ωR = m/n is rational for n ≥ 3, the point (ωR , sR ) = ( m n , 1) is a terminating shrinking point, see Sec. 6.6. The associated rotational symbol sequence is S[1, m, n], (6.18). With l = 1, the required non-degeneracy condition for Definition 6.3 is that the matrix (I − MSˆ) is nonsingular, where Sˆ = S[2, m, n]. When this condition is satisfied, the polygon P has one side on the switching manifold and is otherwise contained in the RHP. If we let z0 = µ(I − MSˆ)−1 PSˆb (compare with (6.28)), then the iterates, zi , are the vertices of P. The vertices z0 and zd lie on the switching manifold (where d is the multiplicative inverse of m modulo n). For example when m/n = 3/7, d = 5 since 5 × 3 mod 7 = 15 mod 7 = 1, see Fig. 7.8(a), Numerically it has been observed that the boundary, whether a poly-

November 26, 2009

15:34


bifurcations


149

gon or an ellipse, attracts nearby outside points prompting the following conjecture. Conjecture 7.1. Consider (7.5) with µ = 1 and assume 0 < rL < 1, 0 < ωL , ωR < 1/2 as usual. Then there is an ε > 0 such that whenever 1 − ε < sR ≤ 1, the map has an asymptotically stable invariant set. Notice other attractors may exist when sR = 1. For example in Fig. 7.6(a), the 3-cycle exists for all ωR > 31 when sR = 1 and is attracting. For these values there will also be an invariant polygon or ellipse with rotation number ωR . Theorem 6.1 states that generically a resonance tongue emanates from any terminating shrinking point. This is seen clearly in Figs. 7.5, 7.6, and 7.7: many tongues emanate from the line sR = 1. Each lens-shaped region has two boundaries that are defined by the codimension-one conditions x0 = 0 and xd = 0. Within the region there exist both stable and saddle orbits with rotation number m/n. These orbits collide and annihilate on the boundaries in a nonsmooth fold. The stable orbits have the symbol sequence S[2, m, n], whereas the saddle orbits have the symbol sequence S[1, m, n]. An example of a phase portrait showing these two orbits 0.2

0.2

z(1)

0

z(3)

−0.2

z(6)

−0.2

z(4)

y

y

P

−0.4

−0.4

z(5) −0.6

−0.2

0

z(2)

z(0)

0

−0.6

0.2

0.4

0.6

−0.2

0

0.2

x

(a)

x

0.4

0.6

(b)

Fig. 7.8: Phase portraits of (7.5) when µ = 1, ωL = ωR = 3/7, rL = 0.9 and sR = 1 in panel (a) and sR = 0.995 in panel (b). The fixed point z ∗ , is indicated by an asterisk. Panel (a) shows the invariant heptagon P and two of the uncountably many invariant ellipses near the center z ∗ , each consisting of infinitely many 3/7-cycles. In panel (b) the right halfmap is no longer area preserving; P appears to become an invariant circle attracting from both sides. The stable [saddle] 3/7-cycle is indicated by triangles [circles].

November 26, 2009

150

15:34



and the invariant circle formed from the unstable manifolds of the saddle is shown in Fig. 7.8(b). Resonance tongue boundaries As detailed in Sec. 6.3, codimension-one, resonance tongue boundaries correspond to either the collision of one or more points of the stable periodic solution with the switching manifold, or a loss of stability. As an example, Fig. 7.9 illustrates the lens-chain for a 1/5-cycle, and also shows phase portraits of the stable cycle in the two lenses and on their boundaries. In the upper lens, two points of the stable 1/5-cycle lie in the LHP; in the lower lens three points lie in the LHP. The left and right boundaries correspond to nonsmooth folds along which the stable cycle collides and annihilates with a saddle cycle. Along the bottom boundary a multiplier associated with the stable cycle passes through 1.

Fig. 7.9: The 1/5-resonance tongue of (7.5) when µ = 1, rL = 0.2, as seen in Fig. 7.7(b). Schematic phase portraits of the stable 1/5-cycle in relation to the switching manifold are shown. As this lower bound is approached, the amplitude of the stable 1/5-cycle becomes unbounded. Of course, this is a somewhat artificial consequence of the lack of nonlinear terms in (7.5), see Sec. 6.3. A saddle 1/5-cycle exists on both sides of the lower boundary. If Conjecture 7.1 holds, the bounding invariant polygon P for sR = 1 is an attracting invariant set, and so it persists as such a set, typically as an invariant circle for sR < 1. There are many ways in which an invariant

bifurcations

November 26, 2009

15:34



bifurcations

151

circle of a planar, piecewise-linear, continuous map can break-up [Sushko and Gardini (2006); Zhusubaliyev et al. (2008, 2007)]. For instance, the stable and unstable manifolds of the saddle cycle may transversely intersect, replacing the invariant circle with a homoclinic tangle [Sushko and Gardini (2008); Zhusubaliyev et al. (2006, 2007)]. The invariant circle consisting of a stable cycle, a saddle cycle and the unstable invariant manifolds of the saddle may disappear upon collision and annihilation of the two cycles in a border-collision bifurcation. Also a loss of stability of the stable cycle may lead to the destruction of the invariant circle [Sushko and Gardini (2006); Maistrenko et al. (1998)]. These mechanisms are similar to those that occur in smooth maps [Aronson et al. (1982); Agliari et al. (2005)]. Note that standard results concerning normal hyperbolicity [Robinson (1999); Hirsch et al. (1977); Fenichel (1971)] do not immediately apply because the map is not a diffeomorphism. Periodic solutions in resonance tongues that emanate from (ωR , sR ) = , (m n 1), have symbol sequences that are rotational. When the m/n-cycle has l points in the LHP, its symbol sequence is S[l, m, n], (6.18). Stable m/n-cycles associated with the top-most lens in a tongue are comprised of two points in the LHP and (n − 2) points in the RHP. Numerically it has been observed that other lenses correspond to stable m/n-cycles with one more point in the LHP than the connected lens above. The saddle n-cycle has one fewer point in the LHP and one more point in the RHP than its stable counterpart. Fig. 7.7 shows resonance tongues when ωL = ωR for two different fixed values of rL . Lens-chains emanate from sR = 1 and may extend to sR = rL . If n is odd, the bottom-most lens corresponds to stable n-cycles with n+1 2 points in the LHP and the boundary of this lens intersects sR = rL at one point. Alternatively if n is even, the bottom-most lens corresponds to stable n-cycles with n2 points in the LHP and there are possibly two intersection points of the boundary of this lens with sR = rL . The boundary curve connecting these two points bends above sR = rL as in Fig. 7.9 and corresponds to the associated stability matrix, (6.10), having a multiplier 1. No stable solutions have been discovered when sR < rL prompting the following conjecture. Conjecture 7.2. Suppose µ = 1, 0 < ωL = ωR < 1/2 and 0 < sR < rL < 1. Then (7.5) has no stable solutions. Fig. 7.10 shows two typical phase portraits corresponding to points in parameter space just beyond resonance tongue boundaries that correspond

November 26, 2009

15:34


152

bifurcations


to stability loss of a periodic solution via an associated multiplier passing through the value -1. The nonsmooth period-doubling bifurcations that occur at these boundaries were described from a general viewpoint in Sec. 6.3. For the map (7.5), in the case that the period-doubled cycle is unstable and exists for λP D < −1 (where λP D is the critical multiplier) it has been observed that it is typically embedded in a complicated attractor. In some cases, this attractor coincides with the period-doubled solution when it is created and grows in size as λP D + 1 decreases, see Fig. 7.10(a). Alternatively the attractor can be large and contain the undoubled solution when it is created, see Fig. 7.10(b). In both cases the Lyapunov exponent for the attractor appears to be positive (γLyap ≈ 0.0747 in panel (a), γLyap ≈ 0.0129 in panel (a)) suggesting the attractor is chaotic. As the parameters are varied further the multiple-piece attractor may undergo merging [Maistrenko et al. (1998)], see also [Avrutin et al. (2008); Avrutin and Schanz (2008)]. Just as the fixed point can undergo a Neimark-Sacker bifurcation, so can a periodic solution. When this bifurcation does not coincide with a border-collision, the stability matrix MS will have a pair of complex eigenvalues on the unit circle. For a two-dimensional map such as (7.5), this l implies det(MS ) = 1. Consequently rL = sn−l R , where l is the number of L’s in S. Fig. 7.11 provides an example with S = LLR. Here, when

0

0

−0.2

−1

y

y −0.4

−2

−0.6

−3 −2

−1

0

1

−0.2

0

0.2

0.4

x

x

(a)

(b)

0.6

Fig. 7.10: Phase portraits of (7.5) when λP D ≈ −1.01, µ = 1. In panel (a), n = 3, in panel (b), n = 10. The fixed point z ∗ is indicated by an asterisk. A saddle n-cycle is indicated by circles. In panel (a), a saddle 2n-cycle is indicated by crosses. In both panels a complicated attractor is indicated by dots. The parameter values are (rL , sR , ωL , ωR ) = (0.18202, 0.6, 0.09, 0.38) in panel (a) and (rL , sR , ωL , ωR ) = (0.0193, 0.964, 0.38, 0.41) in panel (b).

November 26, 2009

15:34


bifurcations


153

1 3

0.265

s

0.26

R

10 30 8 24

0.255

7 21

9 27

0.25

0.34

0.36

ω

0.38

0.4

0.42

R

Fig. 7.11: The large region is a resonance tongue for 3-cycles of (7.5) when rL = 0.5, ωL = 0.25 and µ = 1. When sR = 0.25 the 3-cycles lose stability 1 via associated complex multipliers crossing the unit circle at e2πi( 2 −ωR ) . Admissibility regions emanate from points on this boundary for which ( 21 − ωR ) is rational. Four such regions are shown. In each case the corresponding periodic solutions are unstable. 19 1 cos−1 ( 32 ) ≈ 0.3512, MS has mulsR = 0.25 and ωR ∈ (ˆ ω , 21 ) where ω ˆ = 2π 2πi( 21 −ωR ) and the S-cycle is admissible. Whenever ( 21 − ωR ) = p/q tipliers e is an irreducible fraction there will exist uncountably many qn-cycles with rotation numbers qm/qn at the bifurcation. Generically one of these cycles has two points on the switching manifold. In a similar manner as for terminating shrinking points described in Sec. 6.6, regions of admissibility of the qn-cycles emanate from this codimension-two point in parameter space, Fig. 7.11. However no example has been found with (7.5) for which the qn-cycle is stable.

7.5

Complex Phenomena Relating to Resonance Tongues

Shrinking point curves By Lemma 6.9, at a shrinking point there exists an invariant polygon with two vertices on the switching manifold. Now denote these two vertices by w1 = (0, y1 )T and w2 = (0, y2 )T and assume without loss of generality, y1 < y2 . Since these points are on a periodic orbit then f κ (w1 ) = w2 for some κ. For example, in Fig. 7.12, κ = 5. The polygon persists as an attracting invariant set as parameters are continuously varied, though it

November 26, 2009

154

15:34


bifurcations


will no longer necessarily contain only periodic orbits. When the polygon persists as an invariant circle the points of intersection of the invariant circle with the switching manifold, w1 and w2 , also vary continuously. Moreover it is a codimension-one phenomenon for w1 to map into w2 in κ iterations. Thus there exists a curve in two-dimensional parameter space along which f κ (w1 ) = w2 . Such a curve will be referred to as a shrinking point curve. These curves also exist for one-dimensional, piecewise-linear circle maps, and in [Yang and Hao (1987)], the authors were able to obtain analytical expressions. Shrinking point curves can be computed numerically by first finding an approximate invariant circle by the algorithm described in [Edoh and Lorenz (2003)], and then estimating the points w1 and w2 by interpolation. Via an iterative scheme, the parameters are chosen to minimize |f κ (w1 ) − w2 | for some fixed κ; an example is shown in Fig. 7.13. For instance when κ = 5, there is a curve that extends from the top of the 1/4-resonance tongue to the bottom of the 3/10-resonance tongue, see Fig. 7.13. This curve intersects the 2/7-resonance tongue at which point

ω2

1

0

f 2(ω1)

f (ω1)

−1

y −2

−3

ω1 −2

−1

0

1

2

x

Fig. 7.12: A phase portrait of (7.5) for parameter values (rL = 0.6, sR ≈ 0.7583, ωL = ωR ≈ 0.2841) corresponding to a non-terminating shrinking point on the 2/7 resonance tongue. The invariant circle is a heptagon that consists entirely of 2/7-cycles. As when sR = 1, the vertices map to one another as do the sides. The fixed point z ∗ is indicated by an asterisk. The dotted lines connect the vertices with their images.

November 26, 2009

15:34


bifurcations


1

1 4

3 11

8 5 29 18

155

1 3

2 7

1 0.9

5

sR 0.8 −6

0.7 −2 0.6 0.26

0.28

0.3

0.32

ωR = ωL Fig. 7.13: A magnified view of Fig. 7.7(a) with additional curves. The white curves are shrinking point curves for κ = −6, −2, 1, and 5. The gray curve corresponds to stable solutions for which the rotation number is 1 2+γ ≈ 0.2764 where γ is the golden ratio.

the associated 2/7-polygon appears as in Fig. 7.12. As seen in this figure, w1 maps into w2 upon five iterations of (1.14). At this point w2 maps into w1 in two iterations, hence the shrinking point curve for which κ = −2 also crosses this point. Similarly the curves for κ = 1 and κ = −6 intersect at the upper non-terminating shrinking point of the 2/7-resonance tongue. At shrinking points, shrinking point curves appear non-differentiable. This suggests that any shrinking point curve is non-differentiable at a dense set of points on the curve.

Irrational rotation numbers In addition to invariant circles with rational rotation numbers, irrational circles may be approximated by following a sequence of rational lens-chains whose rotation numbers limit on a given irrational number. For example, in Fig. 7.13, the gray one-dimensional curve corresponds to the existence 1 , where of an invariant circle whose rotation number is computed to be 2+γ √

is the golden ratio, within an error of 10−10 . Note that this γ = 5+1 2 curve is sandwiched between resonance tongues whose rotation numbers

November 26, 2009

15:34

156


bifurcations


correspond to the Farey sequence 1 1 1 2 3 5 8 , , , , , → ≈ 0.2764 . 3 4 7 11 18 29 2+γ Resonance tongues associated with the first six rotation numbers in this sequence are shown in Fig. 7.13. Curves defined in this way may be nowhere differentiable [Sushko and Gardini (2008)]. Lyapunov exponents To distinguish between regular and chaotic orbits, Lyapunov exponents were numerically computed for initial conditions on a 512 × 512 grid in parameter space, see Fig. 7.14. To create panel (b), for each choice of parameter values, a randomly chosen initial condition was iterated for 104 steps after removing transients. When there are multiple attractors, the value computed for the Lyapunov exponent is dependent upon which basin of attraction the initial random point is located. For example, the black and white area centered at (ωR , sR ) = (0.294, 0.43) corresponds to the coexistence of a stable 1/4-cycle and a chaotic attractor born through the loss of stability of the 2/9-cycle via a nonsmooth period-doubling bifurcation, 0.7

0.7

−2

0.6

0.6

sR

sR 0.5

0.5

0.4

0.4

0.3

0.3

0.27

0.28

(a)

ωR

0.29

0.27

0.28

ωR

0.29

(b)

Fig. 7.14: Panel (a) shows a magnified view of Fig. 7.6(a), (rL = 0.3, ωL = 0.09 and µ = 1). The white curve is the shrinking point curve with κ = −2; the dashed black curves correspond to first homoclinic tangencies. Phase portraits for parameter values indicated by crosses are shown in Fig. 7.15. Panel (b) shows numerically calculated Lyapunov exponents over the same parameter range. Black [white] areas correspond to negative [positive] Lyapunov exponents. Gray areas correspond to numerically computed Lyapunov exponents with a magnitude less than 0.0005.

November 26, 2009

15:34



bifurcations

157

see Sec. 6.3. If there exists an attracting invariant circle with an irrational rotation number, the map restricted to the circle is semi-conjugate to rigid rotation [Cornfeld et al. (1982)]. Thus in this case, orbits on the circle are quasiperiodic and have zero Lyapunov exponent. For this reason the upper-left half of Fig. 7.14(b) contains many data points for which the numerically computed Lyapunov exponent has a value within 0.0005 of zero. These grey curves also seem to fall between the lens-chains corresponding to rational rotation numbers, which is consistent with their rotation number being irrational. The line that runs diagonally through Fig. 7.14 is the κ = −2 shrinking point curve. To the left of this curve, there appear to be no chaotic solutions, or at least they are very much less common. Fig. 7.15 shows stable and unstable invariant manifolds of the saddle 2/9-cycle on either side of the shrinking point curve. In panel (a) the associated eigenvalues of both the stable and saddle 2/9-cycles are positive and the unstable manifolds form an attracting invariant circle. In panel (b) the associated eigenvalues of the stable 2/9-cycle are negative and the unstable manifolds spiral into the stable 2/9-cycle. Similar behavior is described in [Aronson et al. (1982)] (in particular Fig. 8.2 of this reference). A similar situation is observed near the shrinking point curve for all lens-chains shown in Fig. 7.14(a), thus Fig. 7.15 is believed to illustrate a typical scenario. Variation of the parameters of panel (b) towards a nonsmooth fold leads to a collision of the stable and unstable manifolds of the saddle cycle. Beyond curves of first tangency (shown in Fig. 7.14) the invariant circle no longer exists. The stable and unstable manifolds intersect transversely forming a homoclinic tangle. Non-rotational periodic solutions The rotation number of an n-cycle of the map (7.5) is a fraction m/n, where m is the number of times the orbit revolves around the fixed point in n steps. It is possible that m and n contain a common factor, i.e. the rotation number is a reducible fraction. In this case the periodic solution will usually have a symbol sequence that is non-rotational (an exception is the 2/6-cycle shown in Fig. 7.17(a) for which S = LLRRRR). As shown below resonance tongues associated with non-rotational periodic solutions may not exhibit the familiar lens-chain structure. An example is shown in Fig. 7.16. Here there are three regions corre-

November 26, 2009

158

15:34


bifurcations


(a)

(b)

Fig. 7.15: Stable and unstable invariant manifolds of a saddle 2/9-cycle of (7.5) when rL = 0.3, ωL = 0.09 and µ = 1. In panel (a), ωR = 0.274 and sR = 0.55. In panel (b), ωR = 0.285 and sR = 0.44. Triangles [circles] denote stable [saddle] 2/9-cycles. In each panel stable invariant manifolds of the saddle cycle limit on the unstable fixed point z ∗ in the RHP. sponding to stable solutions with three different symbol sequences. The region (abe) corresponds to parameters for which there exists a stable 3/9cycle with symbol sequence LRLLRRRRL. The right-hand boundary of this region, (a-e), corresponds to a loss of stability via a nonsmooth perioddoubling bifurcation. To the right of this boundary the 3/9-cycle exists but

i g

0.96

6 18

b

sR

c

h

3 9

e

f

d

0.94

3 9 0.92

a 0.9 0.37

0.38

0.39

ωR

Fig. 7.16: Resonance tongues of (7.5) when µ = 1, rL = 0.475, ωL = 0.09. The bottom and upper right regions correspond to a stable 3/9-cycle. The upper left region corresponds to a stable 6/18-cycle.

November 26, 2009

15:34



bifurcations

159

is not attracting. Throughout this region there also exists a saddle 3/9cycle (with symbol sequence LRLLRLRRL) that collides and annihilates with the stable cycle in a usual nonsmooth fold on the boundary (a-b). The boundary (b-e) also corresponds to a nonsmooth fold; however, here the 3/9-cycle persists above the boundary. Above this boundary the 3/9cycle has symbol sequence RRLLRRRRL and is stable to the right of the boundary (d-i), which corresponds to a nonsmooth period-doubling bifurcation. Along (b-d) a 6/18-cycle is created that exists above the boundary and is stable to the right of (c-g), which also corresponds to a nonsmooth period-doubling bifurcation. This period-doubled cycle has a symbol sequence that is the concatenation of the symbol sequences of the two stable 3/9-cycles. Finally, the boundaries (g-h) and (f-i) correspond to bordercollision bifurcations beyond which saddles of the same rotation number exist. Of all the border-collision boundaries so far discussed, the boundary (d-e) is the only one for which stable n-cycles exist on both sides of the bifurcation. Also of all the nonsmooth period-doubling bifurcations so far discussed, the boundary (d-h) is the only one along which the period-doubled solution is stable. Scenarios similar to Fig. 7.16 have been found for different rotation numbers. In summary, non-rotational periodic solutions appear to exhibit a wider variety of codimension-one bifurcations than rotational periodic solutions. In particular the familiar lens-chain structure may not arise. Codimension-two, nonsmooth period-doubling bifurcations As discussed in Sec. 6.3, at a generic, nonsmooth period-doubling bifurcation, a single point, qδmax , of the 2n-cycle with symbol sequence (S 2 )0 , lies on the switching manifold. Let us now consider the codimension-two situ(i) (j) ation that two points of this cycle, say qδmax and qδmax , lie on the switching manifold when MS has a multiplier λP D = −1. In this case there will be two curves that cross at the codimension-two (i) point; these correspond to the the vanishing of the x-components of qδmax (j)

and qδmax individually. These two curves divide the neighborhood of the codimension-two point into four quadrants. In one quadrant there will be no admissible 2n-cycle, and in two quadrants exactly one of the two new orbits will be admissible; one with symbol sequence (S 2 )i and the other with symbol sequence (S 2 )j . In the final quadrant, a new 2n-cycle will be admissible, corresponding to the symbol sequence (S 2 )ij .

November 26, 2009

15:34


160

bifurcations


Fig. 7.17 shows two examples where the doubly-flipped 2n-cycles are stable. In these cases the primary orbits, 1/3 and 2/5 respectively, are seen to lose stability with λP D = −1, and there is a narrow tongue corresponding to stable orbits with rotation numbers 2/6 and 4/10 respectively, that emanates from a codimension-two point on the period-doubling curve. Interestingly, there also exist additional resonance tongues in the neighborhood of this codimension-two point. These appear in sequences with rotation numbers 2k/6k for k up to 7 in panel (a) and rotation numbers 4k/10k for k up to 3 in panel (b). Resonance tongues corresponding to larger values of k were not found. In panel (a) the doubled orbits have symbol sequences (LLR)2k−1 RRR; note that only the first three tongues in the sequence appear to emanate from the codimension-two point. In panel (b) the doubled orbits have symbol sequences (LRLRR)2k−1 RRRRR, and only the first two tongues emanate from the codimension-two point. 1 3

2 5

0.96

0.84

sR

0.95

14 42

sR

0.8

12 30

0.94

6 18 4 12

8 20

0.93 0.76 0.35

4 10

2 6 0.36

0.37

0.38

0.39

ωR

(a)

0.408

0.412

0.416

0.42

ωR

(b)

Fig. 7.17: Magnified views of panels (a) and (b) of Fig. 7.6 near codimension-two, nonsmooth, period-doubling bifurcations of (7.5). For panel (a), the original orbit has rotation number 1/3 and symbol sequence LLR, and for panel (b) it has rotation number 2/5 and symbol sequence LRLRR. The shaded regions correspond to the existence of a stable orbit with the rotation numbers shown.

7.6

More Complex Phenomena

Saddle fixed points for µ = 0 The white regions in Fig. 7.7 correspond to parameter values where no attractor exists when µ = 1. This section begins with a description of the

November 26, 2009

15:34


bifurcations


161

corresponding border-collision bifurcation that occurs at µ = 0. The most significant feature is that no invariant circle is created thus the bifurcation bears little relation to a Neimark-Sacker bifurcation in a smooth system. As an example, Fig. 7.18 shows phase portraits of (7.5) at parameter values corresponding to a point in a white region of Fig. 7.7 for µ = −1, 0, 1. When µ = −1, the fixed point z ∗ (7.6) of (7.5) lies in the left half-plane and is stable. However its basin of attraction is not the entire plane: there is a saddle 3-cycle with symbol sequence LLR. The one-dimensional, piecewiselinear stable manifolds of this orbit form the boundary of the basin of attraction for the fixed point. Orbits of points in the interior of the complement of this region are unbounded. When µ = 1, the opposite situation occurs: the fixed point lies in the right half-plane and is a repellor. The unstable manifolds of a saddle 3-cycle with symbol sequence RRL form the boundary for the basin of repulsion of the fixed point. The LLR-cycle that exists when µ < 0 is destroyed at µ = 0; however, its unstable manifolds persist as an invariant set of piecewise-linear curves contained in the basin of repulsion; see panel (c) of Fig. 7.18. These manifolds extend to infinity and connect to the fixed point. Similarly the stable manifolds of the RRL-cycle become an invariant set of piecewiselinear curves in the basin of attraction of the fixed point when µ = 1. When µ = 0, the two 3-cycles collide with the fixed point at the origin. The stable manifolds of the RRL-cycle and the unstable manifolds of the LLR-cycle become stable and unstable manifolds of the origin, which is now a saddle with six hyperbolic sectors. The above dynamical behavior is believed to be generic. When ωL = ωR

(a)

(b)

(c)

Fig. 7.18: Stable and unstable manifolds of a saddle 3-cycle (indicated by circles) for (7.5) when (rL , sR , ωL , ωR ) = (0.4, 0.5, 0.38, 0.38) for µ = −1, 0, 1. The fixed point, z ∗ , is indicated with an asterisk and is stable in panel (a), a saddle in panel (b), and unstable in panel (c).

November 26, 2009

15:34


162

bifurcations


and the origin is of saddle-type for µ = 0, it is expected that n stable invariant rays and n unstable invariant rays emanate from the origin as observed above for n = 3. In general when ωL 6= ωR more complications may arise. A more thorough understanding of saddle fixed points on a switching manifold of (7.5) may follow by considering attractors at infinity [Gardini (2008)]. Multiple attractors The overlapping of resonance tongues corresponds to the coexistence of multiple stable periodic solutions. An overlap is shown, for example in Fig. 7.6(b) near ωR = 0.27 and sR = 0.5. Multiple attractors in piecewisesmooth maps have been described previously, see for instance [Zhusubaliyev et al. (2006); Sushko and Gardini (2008); Nusse et al. (1994); Maistrenko et al. (1998)]. As µ → 0 attractors contract to the origin, thus if small noise is added to the system there is an inherent unpredictability in the time evolution of solutions near the bifurcation point [Dutta et al. (1999); Kapitaniak and Maistrenko (1998)]. Two examples of coexisting attractors are shown in Fig. 7.19. For the parameters of panel (a), there exists a stable 3-cycle and a stable 4-cycle. For this case there is also a saddle 3-cycle and a saddle 4-cycle, and the stable manifold of the latter saddle forms the boundary between the basins of attraction of the two stable orbits.

10 4 −1.6

0

0

y

y −4

y

−10

−2

−8 −20 −2.4

−12 −12

−8

−4

(a)

x

0

4

−20

−10

(b)

x

0

10

−6

−5

x

−4

−3

(c)

Fig. 7.19: Attractors and their basins of attraction of (7.5) when µ = 1 and (rL , sR , ωL , ωR ) = (0.45, 0.55, 0.2, 0.4) in panel (a) and (0.16, 0.52, 0.38, 0.265) in panel (b). Stable [saddle] periodic orbits are indicated by triangles [circles]. and shaded red for period 3, blue for period 4 and yellow for period 7. Panel (c) is a magnification of panel (b); here stable [unstable] invariant manifolds are colored blue [red].

November 26, 2009

15:34


bifurcations


163

The coexistence of three attractors is illustrated in Fig. 7.19(b); these correspond to the mutual intersection of the 1/3, 1/4 and 2/7 resonance tongues as seen in Fig. 7.6(b). The one-dimensional stable manifold of the saddle 3-cycle forms the boundary of the basin of attraction of the stable 3-cycle. However the boundary between the remaining two basins is more complicated. The stable manifolds of the saddle 4-cycle and the saddle 7-cycle transversely intersect the unstable manifolds of all three saddles forming a collection of homoclinic and heteroclinic orbits. The stable manifolds of the saddle 4-cycle and the saddle 7-cycle appear to accumulate and form a fractal boundary between the two basins. Note that six coexisting attractors have been found for the map (7.5) (specifically when (µ, rL , sR , ωL , ωR ) = (1, 0.68, 0.8, 0.38, 0.27) there exist attractors with symbol sequences LRLL(RLL)k for k = 7, . . . , 12); it is hypothesized that arbitrarily many distinct stable solutions can coexist. Further complications This chapter has mostly studied the case µ > 0 for the map (7.5). However, using the symmetry property (7.4), each stable [unstable] solution for µ > 0 corresponds to a unstable [stable] solution of the same period and rotation number for µ < 0 if the R and L parameters are exchanged. For some choices of parameter values, non-trivial periodic orbits can be observed for both signs of µ. For example in panel (a) of Fig. 7.20, we see an unstable 4-cycle for µ < 0 and a stable 3-cycle for µ > 0. Alternatively a stable n-cycle can coexist with the stable fixed point. For example in panel (b)

(a)

(b)

Fig. 7.20: Bifurcation diagrams of (7.5) when (rL , sR , ωL , ωR ) = (0.25, 0.18, 0.25, 0.38) in panel (a) and (0.2, 0.7, 0.49, 0.12) in panel (b). Solid [dashed] lines denote stable [unstable] solutions.

November 26, 2009

164

15:34



of Fig. 7.20 a stable 5-cycle coexists with the stable fixed point for µ < 0, and a stable 6-cycle is created for µ > 0. Multiple attractors may coexist. Similarly stable and unstable solutions with different periods may coexist, and various combinations of these phenomena may occur. In short, the bifurcation at µ = 0 may be extremely complex.

bifurcations

November 26, 2009

15:34


bifurcations

Appendix A

Selected Proofs

Proof. [Lemma 1.3] For clarity here we write AL = AL (0). Firstly −1 suppose (1.10) [(1.14)] is ¯ ¯ ¯ # observable. Let y = O e1 and let S = " ¯ ¯ ¯ ¯ ¯ −1 ¯ AN y ¯ . . . ¯ AL y ¯ y . Notice, ∀i 6= 1, the ith column of AL S is, L ¯ ¯ ¯ −i −i+1 AL (AN y) = AN y equals the (i − 1)th column of S, thus L L

AL S = SC ,

(A.1)

for some companion matrix C. To show S is nonsingular we show that its columns are linearly independent. We search for scalars αi which solve −1 α1 y + α2 AL y + · · · + αN AN y=0. L

(A.2)

Multiplying (A.2) on the left by eT 1 and using Oy = e1 we obtain αN = 0. T N −1 T 2 gives Successive left multiplications of (A.2) by eT 1 AL , e1 AL , . . . , e1 AL αN −1 = αN −2 = · · · = α1 = 0 verifying independence. Thus AL is similar to C and C = CL . Let T = S −1 . Then T AL T −1 = CL as required. Notice the ith component of eT 1 S is N −i N −i T T T [eT y) = (eT )y = [Oy]i = [eT 1 S]i = e1 (AL 1 AL 1 ]i , thus e1 S = e1 . Multiplying this last equation on the right by T produces (1.30). Conversely suppose (1.30) and (1.31) are satisfied for some nonsingular T . Then  T N −1 −1   T −1   T N −1  e1 AL T e1 T (T AL T −1 )N −1 e1 CL       .. .. ..       . . . OT −1 =   =   =  . It  eT AL T −1   eT T −1 (T AL T −1 )   eT CL  1

−1 eT 1T

1

−1 eT 1T

165

1

eT 1

November 26, 2009

15:34


166

bifurcations


 θN −1 θN −2 · · · θ1 1   .  θN −2 .. 1     . is easily established this last matrix has the form  .. ...   .. .     θ1 1 1 and is therefore nonsingular. Hence O is nonsingular. ¤ 

Proof. [Theorem 1.1] For clarity we prove the result for just the continuous-time case. The discrete-time case may be proved similarly. Let T be the similarity transformation matrix for AL (0) as described in Lemma 1.3. Let d ∈ RN with eT N T d 6= 0 .

(A.3)

Let α ∈ R, ψ ∈ RN with ψ1 = 0 and let φ = (α, ψ2 , . . . , ψN )T . Define a C k function G : RN × R → RN by G(φ, µ) = f (L) (ψ; µ) − αd . ˆ ˆ Then G(0, 0) = 0, ∂G ∂µ (0, 0) = b(0) and Dφ G(0, 0) = A, where A is the N × N matrix identical to AL (0) except in the first column, which is −d. ˆ −1 is a companion matrix We now show Aˆ is nonsingular. Notice Cˆ = T AT and from our particular formulation of companion matrices, (1.27), it folˆ = det(C) ˆ = (−1)N +1 eT Ce ˆ 1 . By judiciously using the relation lows det(A) N T T −1 T e1 T = e1 T = e1 , we obtain T −1 T = CL (0)(I − T e1 eT Cˆ = T (AL (0) − AL (0)e1 eT 1 ) − T de1 , 1 − de1 )T

and therefore T T ˆ = det(CL (0))(1 − eT det(A) 1 T e1 ) − eN T d = −eN T d 6= 0 .

Using (A.4), by the implicit function theorem, for small µ G(φ(µ), µ) ≡ 0 , for a C k function φ. Notice then T

% (0)b(0) 0 T ˆ−1 6= 0 , α0 (0) = eT b(0) = − ode 1 φ (0) = −e1 A ˆ det(A) by the earlier assumption, (1.24). It remains to compute Tˆ. Let A˜L (µ) = Dx f (L) (ψ(µ); µ) .

(A.4)

November 26, 2009

15:34


Selected Proofs

bifurcations

167

Notice A˜L (µ) is C k−1 and A˜L (0) = AL (0) therefore we may apply Lemma 1.3 to A˜L (µ) for small µ. There exists an N × N matrix, Tˆ(µ), C k−1 ˜ ˆ ˜ ˆ−1 (µ) dependent on µ, with first row eT 1 and such that CL (µ) = T (µ)AL (µ)T is a companion matrix. Then by applying (1.32) and (1.33) we obtain fˆ(L) (ˆ x; µ ˆ) = Tˆ(µ)f (L) (x; µ) =µ ˆq + C˜L (ˆ µ)ˆ x + O(|ˆ x|2 ) + o(k) , where q = Tˆ(µ)d(µ), by (A.3) must satisfy eT N q 6= 0 . Our choice of q = eN satisfies this condition.

¤

Proof. [Theorem 2.1] Step 1: Define PL and PR . Denote the left and right half-flows of (1.10) with (1.34) by ϕL t (x, y; µ) and ϕR t (x, y; µ), respectively, for (x, y; µ) in some neighborhood of the origin. For sufficiently small δj > 0 and δµj > 0, we define the first return map PR : [0, δR ] × [−δµR , 0] → R− , by PR (y0 ; µ) = y1 where y1 is the first intersection of ϕR t (0, y0 ; µ) with the negative y-axis or origin for t ≥ 0, and PL : [−δL , 0] × [−δµL , 0] → R+ , by PL (y1 ; µ) = y2 where y2 is the first intersection of ϕL t (0, y1 ; µ) with the positive y-axis or origin for t > 0. This is illustrated in Fig. 2.1(a). Step 2: Show PR and PL are well-defined when µ = 0. When µ = 0 the origin is a hyperbolic equilibrium of both left and right half-systems; consequently, PR (0; 0) = PL (0; 0) = 0. Since when µ = 0 the matrices Cj (of (1.34)) have complex-valued eigenvalues, the trajectories of the linearized systems spiral about the origin repeatedly intersecting the y-axis. The spiral behavior is clockwise because in both linear systems x(0, ˙ y; 0) = y. The same can be said of trajectories of the nonlinear half-systems sufficiently close to the origin because, by Hartman’s theorem [Hartman (1964)], there exist neighborhoods about the origin within which the half-systems are C 1 conjugate to their linearizations. Thus when µ = 0, PR and PL are well-defined. Step 3: Show PR is well-defined for small µ < 0. When µ < 0, the origin is no longer an equilibrium of (1.10). The required properties of PR can be obtained by considering the local behavior

November 26, 2009

168

15:34



of the trajectory that passes through the origin. This can be deduced by computing approximations to the right half-flow on the y-axis. Since x(0, ˙ y; µ) = y + o(y) , there is a neighborhood of the origin such that the positive y-axis flows into the right half-plane and the negative y-axis flows into the left half-plane. Moreover, since y(0, ˙ y; µ) = µ + o(y) , for small y and small µ < 0, we have y˙ < 0. Thus the trajectory that passes through the origin, does so tangent to the y-axis and without entering the right half-plane. Since the flow is continuous, there exists a non-empty interval [0, δR ] on the positive y-axis that maps into the negative y-axis. Thus the map, PR , is well-defined for some δµR > 0. Furthermore PR (0; µ) = 0 (since the definition of PR allows for an intersection at t = 0). Finally PR is C k since the right half-flow is C k . Step 4: Show PL is well-defined for small µ < 0. When µ < 0, the initial velocity of the trajectory ϕL t (0, 0; µ) is directly downwards. The equilibrium of the left half-flow lies in the left half-plane when µ is small and negative. For small µ, the equilibrium lies close to the origin so that we may use the linearization of the flow at the equilibrium to approximate ϕL t (0, 0; µ). Recall that the eigenvalues of CL (0) are νL ± iωL , where νL , ωL > 0, thus the equilibrium of the left half-system is a repelling focus at µ = 0, and by continuity remains a repelling focus when µ is small enough. Consequently the flow ϕL t (0, 0; µ) initially spirals clockwise around the equilibrium solution within the left half-plane. Since the equilibrium ◦ is repelling, before ϕL t (0, 0; µ) has completed 360 about the equilibrium it will intersect the y-axis at some point P(0; µ) = yˆ(µ) > 0, see Fig. 2.1. Since the flow is continuous, PL must map a non-empty interval [−δL , 0] to points on the positive y-axis above yˆ(µ). Thus the map, PL , is well-defined for some δµL > 0. Also PL is C k since the left half-flow is C k . Step 5: Define P and compute its derivatives at (0+ ; 0− ). The results above imply that there are δ, δµ > 0 such that the Poincaré map, P : [0, δ] × [−δµ , 0] → R+ defined by (2.11) is C k . This map is sketched in Fig. A.1. Note that since PR (0; µ) = 0, its left-sided derivative with respect to µ as µ → 0− is Dµ PR (0; 0+ ) = 0. Moreover, since PL (0; µ) = yˆ(µ) = O(µ) is positive for µ < 0, we have α ≡ Dµ PL (0; 0− ) = lim− µ→0

yˆ(µ) 0 so that V˜ (y+ (µ), µ) = V (y+ (µ), µ) = 0 implying that y+ (µ) is a periodic point. In other words, the graph of P(y; µ) necessarily intersects the diagonal as sketched in Fig. A.1, and when −δµ < µ < 0, (1.10) has a periodic orbit that intersects the positive y-axis at y+ (µ). The periodic orbit intersects the negative y-axis, at, say, y− (µ) = PR (y+ (µ); µ). The function y− (µ) is also C k and vanishes at µ = 0. Moreover, Dµ y− (0− ) = Dy PR (0+ ; 0)Dµ y+ (0) + Dµ PR (0; 0− ) α = νL π −νR π > 0 . ωL e − e ωR The resulting bifurcation diagram is sketched in Fig. 2.5. The radius of the periodic orbits, by any sensible definition, grows linearly with respect to |µ|, to first order. Step 7: Show the periodic orbit is stable. The stability of periodic orbits can be deduced by calculating the value of Dy P(y+ (µ); µ). When Λ < 0, (A.5) implies that 0 < Dy P(0+ ; 0) < 1. Since this function is C k−1 and k ≥ 1, we have 0 < Dy P(y+ (µ); µ) < 1, for all sufficiently small µ < 0. Thus the periodic orbit is stable, as we should expect since the equilibrium is repelling. Step 8: Show there are no periodic orbits for Λ > 0. 0 If Λ > 0, (A.6) implies that y+ (0) > 0, so that the locus of zeros, y+ (µ),

bifurcations

November 26, 2009

15:34


Selected Proofs

bifurcations

171

fails to enter the quadrant y0 > 0, µ < 0, near (0, 0). Since, by the implicit function theorem, y+ (µ) is the unique solution that emerges from the origin, it follows that V˜ (y0 , µ) 6= 0, for all sufficiently small y0 > 0, µ < 0. Hence in this case, there are no periodic orbits. ¤ Proof. [Theorem 3.1] We first show v(0, 0) is not orthogonal to e1 . Suppose for a contradiction, v1 (0, 0) = 0. Let Bij denote the (N − 1) × (N − 1) matrix formed by removing the ith row and j th column from AL (0, 0). Let v˜ = (v2 (0, 0) . . . vN (0, 0))T ∈ RN −1 . Then v˜ 6= 0 and Bi1 v˜ = 0 for each i. Therefore each det(Bi1 ) = 0, i.e., each element in the first column of the cofactor matrix of AL (0, 0) is zero. By definition the adjugate matrix is the transpose of the cofactor matrix, thus %T (0, 0) = 0 which is a contradiction by assumption (ii). Therefore we may indeed choose the length of v(0, 0) such that eT 1 (0, 0)v(0, 0) = 1. By putting A = AL (0, 0) into (C.1), multiplying on the left by eT 1 and using (1.22) we obtain %T (0, 0)AL (0, 0) = 0 . T That is, the vector % (0, 0) is the left eigenvector of AL (0, 0) for the eigenvalue λ(0, 0) = 0. Therefore p0 6= 0. Let v (1) , . . . , v (N ) be N generalized eigenvectors of A £ ¤ L (0, 0) that form a basis of RN with v (1) = v(0, 0). Let V = v (1) · · · v (N ) . We introduce the linear change of coordinates x ˆ = V −1 x . (A.7) Let  ˙   −1 L  V f (V x ˆ; µ, η) x ˆ  , F =  µ˙  =  (A.8) 0 0 η˙ denote the (N + 2)-dimensional, C k ,extended left half-flow in the basis of generalized eigenvectors. The Jacobian ¯ ¯   ¯ ¯ ¯ ¯  V −1 AL (0, 0)V ¯ V −1 b(0, 0) ¯ 0  ¯ ¯   ¯ ¯  , (A.9) DF (0; 0, 0) =   ¯ ¯  ¯ ¯   0 0 0 ¯ ¯ ¯ ¯ has a three-dimensional nullspace, E c . There exists ϕ ∈ RN such that the three (N + 2)-dimensional vectors   ϕ {n1 , n2 , n3 } = {e1 ,  1  , eN +2 } , 0

November 26, 2009

172

15:34


bifurcations


span E c . Note, the vector, n2 , is a generalized eigenvector, because, if not, then V −1 AL (0, 0)V ϕ + V −1 b = 0 which implies %T (0, 0)AL (0, 0)V ϕ = −%T (0, 0)b(0, 0) which is a contradiction because %T (0, 0)AL (0, 0) = 0 and %T (0, 0)b(0, 0) 6= 0. Furthermore, DF (0; 0, 0)n2 = pb00 e1 . Any point on E c may be written in terms of x ˆ1 , µ and η as the following linear combination   x ˆ  µ  = (ˆ x1 − µeT 1 ϕ)n1 + µn2 + ηn3 , η thus, in particular, x ˆ=x ˆ1 e1 + µζ, where ζ ∈ RN is equal to ϕ except that its first element is zero. The local center manifold, W c , is tangent to E c , thus on W c , x ˆ = H(ˆ x1 ; µ, η) = x ˆ1 e1 + µζ + O(2) . Notice %T (0, 0)V = p0 eT 1 , where we have used (3.1), thus ˆ= x ˆ 1 = eT 1x

1 1 T % (0, 0)V x ˆ = %T (0, 0)x . p0 p0

Restricted to W c the dynamics (A.8) become the C k−1 system µ 1 x ˆ˙ 1 = %T (0, 0)b(µ, η) + %T (0, 0)AL (µ, η)V H(ˆ x1 ; µ, η) p0 p0 1 T % (0, 0)g L (V H(ˆ x1 ; µ, η); µ, η) , + p0

(A.10)

where g L (x; µ, η) denotes all terms of f L that are nonlinear in x. By expanding each term in (A.10) to second order we obtain x ˆ˙ 1 (ˆ x1 ; µ, η) = c1 µ + c2 x ˆ21 + c3 x ˆ1 η + c4 x ˆ1 µ + c5 µ2 + c6 µη + O(3) , (A.11) where, in particular b0 , p0 a0 , c2 = 2p0 ∂AL 1 ∂λ c3 = %T (0, 0) (0, 0)v(0, 0) = (0, 0) = 1 . p0 ∂η ∂η c1 =

Let x ˆ∗1 be an equilibrium of (A.11). Since c1 6= 0 by hypothesis, by the implicit function theorem there exists a unique C k−1 function, µeq (ˆ x∗1 , η) ∗ ∗ such that x ˆ˙ 1 (ˆ x1 ; µeq (ˆ x1 , η), η) = 0 and c2 ∗2 c3 ∗ ˆ − x ˆ η + O(3) . µeq (ˆ x∗1 , η) = − x c1 1 c1 1

November 26, 2009

15:34


bifurcations

Selected Proofs

173

Near (µ, η) = (0, 0), the linearization about the equilibrium x ˆ∗1 , has an associated eigenvalue of 0 exactly when 0=

∂x ˆ˙ 1 ∗ (ˆ x ; µeq (ˆ x∗1 , η), η) = 2c2 x ˆ∗1 + c3 η + O(2) . ∂x ˆ1 1

(A.12)

Since a0 6= 0 by hypothesis, the implicit function theorem again implies ˆ : R → R such that, (A.12) is satisfied there exists a unique C k−2 function, h ∗ ˆ when x ˆ1 = h(η) and c3 ˆ η + O(η 2 ) . (A.13) h(η) =− 2c2 The function ˆ h(η) = µeq (h(η), η) =

c23 2 η + O(η 3 ) , 4c1 c2

(A.14)

is C k−2 and agrees with (3.2). We now show saddle-node bifurcations occur for the left half-flow on the curve µ = h(η) when η is small by verifying the three conditions of the saddle-node bifurcation theorem, see for instance [Guckenheimer and Holmes (1986)]: (i) by construction, Dx f (L) (x∗ ; h(η), η) has a zero eigenvalue of algebraic multiplicity 1, and there are no other eigenvalues with zero real part when η is sufficiently small, L ∗ (ii) w(µ, η) ∂f ∂µ (x ; h(η), η) = b0 + O(η) 6= 0 where w(µ, η) is the left eigenvector of AL (µ, η) for λ(µ, η), (iii) w(µ, η)(Dx2 f L (x∗ ; h(η), η)(v(µ, η), v(µ, η))) = a0 + O(η) 6= 0. Finally, notice on W c when µ = h(η) we have x 1 = eT x1 ; µ, η) = eT ˆ 1 + eT ˆ1 + O(2) , 1 V H(ˆ 1 V e1 x 1 V ζh(η) + O(2) = x and by (A.13) x∗1 = −

c3 p0 η + O(η 2 ) = − η + O(η 2 ) . 2c2 a0

The equilibrium at the saddle-node bifurcation is admissible when x∗1 < 0, i.e. when sgn(η) = sgn(a0 p0 ). ¤ Proof. [Theorem 3.2] For ease of notation we expand the vector field in the left half-plane to second order in x and y f (L) (x, y; µ, η) = ηx + y + a1 x2 + a2 xy + a3 y 2 + O(|x, y|3 ) , g (L) (x, y; µ, η) = µ − δ (L) x + b1 x2 + b2 xy + b3 y 2 + O(|x, y|3 ) , where coefficients vary with µ and η.

(A.15)

November 26, 2009

174

15:34


bifurcations


Step 1: Compute equilibria, eigenvalues and h1 . By the¸ implicit function theorem, there exists a unique C k function, ¸ · ∗(L) · (L) x f (x∗(L) (µ, η), y ∗(L) (µ, η); µ, η) 2 2 : R → R , such that = 0, g (L) (x∗(L) (µ, η), y ∗(L) (µ, η); µ, η) y ∗(L) for small µ, η. Via substitution of a series expansion of x∗(L) and y ∗(L) into (A.15) it is readily determined that Ã ! (L) (L) b1 δµ (0, 0) δη (0, 0) 1 2 ∗(L) + µ − µη + O(3) , x (µ, η) = 2 µ + ω ω6 ω4 ω4 y ∗(L) (µ, η) = −

1 a1 2 µ − 2 µη + O(3) , ω4 ω

(A.16)

where µ and η subscripts denote derivatives. Near (x, y; µ, η) = (0, 0; 0, 0), (x∗(L) , y ∗(L) )T is the only equilibrium of the left half-flow and by (A.16) it is an equilibrium of the full flow (i.e. admissible), exactly when µ ≤ 0. If δR 6= 0, the corresponding equilibrium in the right half-plane may be determined similarly. Let J (L) denote the Jacobian of (3.7) when x < 0. For small µ and η the matrix · ¸ j1 j2 (L) ∗(L) ∗(L) J (x (µ, η), y (µ, η); µ, η) = , (A.17) j3 j4 has the complex conjugate eigenvalue pair λ± = ν ± iξ , where ν and ξ are C k−1 functions of µ and η. To first order we have ν(µ, η) =

1 2a1 + b2 µ + η + O(2) . 2 2ω 2

(A.18)

By the implicit function theorem, there exists a unique C k−1 function h1 : R → R, such that ν(µ, h1 (µ)) = 0 for small µ. Furthermore h1 (µ) = −

2a1 + b2 µ + O(µ2 ) , ω2

thereby confirming (3.13) of the theorem. Let η1 = η − h1 (µ)

(A.19)

represent the deviation from the Hopf bifurcation curve, then 1 ν(µ, η1 ) = η1 ( + O(1)) . 2

(A.20)

November 26, 2009

15:34


bifurcations

Selected Proofs

175

Step 2: Compute a0 and introduce polar coordinates. Let vλ± denote the complex-valued eigenvector associated with λ± for (A.17). In a standard manner, we construct a matrix P using the real and imaginary parts of vλ± # " 1 0 p , P = 1 1 −(j1 − j4 )2 − 4j2 j3 2j2 (−j1 + j4 ) − 2j2 which is well-defined (because j2 6= 0 for sufficiently small µ, η) and nonsingular. Let · ¸ µ· ¸ · ∗(L) ¸¶ u x x (µ, η) = P −1 − ∗(L) . v y y (µ, η) Then the left half-system in (u, v) coordinates becomes · ¸ · ¸ · ¸ u˙ fˇ(u, v; µ, η) u = = D(L) + O(2) , v˙ gˇ(u, v; µ, η) v where

· D(L) = P −1 J (L) P =

ν −ξ ξ ν

¸ .

Letting z = u + iv ,

(A.21)

z˙ = λ+ z + O(2) .

(A.22)

then

Following standard proofs of the Hopf bifurcation theorem [Guckenheimer and Holmes (1986); Kuznetsov (2004); Glendinning (1999)], there exists a two-variable polynomial ζ, comprised of only quadratic and cubic terms such that the near identity transformation w = z + ζ(z, z¯) ,

(A.23)

removes all quadratic terms and all but one cubic term from the left halfsystem (A.22) w˙ = λ+ w + Aw2 w ¯ + O(4) , where A ∈ C and Re(A(µ, η)) =

(A.24)

·

1 ¡ˇ ˇ 1 ˇ (fuuu + gˇuuv + fˇuvv + gˇvvv ) + fuv (fuu + fˇvv ) 16 16ξ ¸¯ ¢ ¯ ˇ ˇ − gˇuv (ˇ guu + gˇvv ) − fuu gˇuu + fvv gˇvv ¯¯ . (A.25) (u,v)=(0,0)

November 26, 2009

176

15:34


bifurcations


Notice Re(A(µ, η)) is a C k−3 function of µ and η. Let a0 = Re(A(0, 0)) . · ¸ 1 0 Using (A.25) and since P (0, 0) = , it follows that a0 appears as 0 −ω given in the statement of the theorem, (3.10). To prove that generic Hopf bifurcations occur along µ = h1 (η) it remains to verify the non-degeneracy conditions of the Hopf bifurcation theorem [Guckenheimer and Holmes (1986); Kuznetsov (2004); Glendinning (1999)]. (i) By construction, J (L) (x∗(L) (µ, h1 (µ)), y ∗(L) (µ, h1 (µ)); µ, h1 (µ)) has purely imaginary eigenvalues, ±iξ = ±i(ω + O(µ)) 6= 0. 1 (ii) ∂ν ∂η (µ, h1 (µ)) = 2 + O(µ) 6= 0. (iii) By assumption, Re(A(µ, h1 (µ))) = a0 + O(µ) 6= 0. Therefore if a0 < 0, the curve η = h1 (µ) corresponds to supercritical Hopf bifurcations and stable periodic orbits exist for small η > h1 (µ). Conversely, if a0 > 0, the curve η = h1 (µ) corresponds to subcritical Hopf bifurcations and unstable periodic orbits exist for small η < h1 (µ). Consequently we have proved (1) of the theorem. We now introduce polar coordinates. Let w = reiθ .

(A.26)

In polar coordinates the left half-system is r˙ = νr + Re(A)r3 + O(r4 ) , θ˙ = ξ + Im(A)r2 + O(r3 ) .

(A.27)

Denote the components of the C k flow by R(r0 , θ0 , t; µ, η1 ) and Θ(r0 , θ0 , t; µ, η1 ) respectively. Expressions for R and Θ may be derived by expanding each as a series in r0 and computing coefficients by solving initial value problems. After much algebraic manipulation we obtain e3νt − eνt 3 r0 + O(r04 ) , 2ν e2νt − 1 2 r0 + O(r03 ) . Θ(r0 , θ0 , t; µ, η1 ) = θ0 + ξt + Im(A) 2ν Step 3: Define the Poincaré section, Π. By using (A.15) it is straightforward to show µ ∗(L) ¶ y = −η . lim µ→0 x∗(L) R(r0 , θ0 , t; µ, η1 ) = eνt r0 + Re(A)

(A.28) (A.29)

November 26, 2009

15:34


Selected Proofs

bifurcations

177

Thus the quotient S=

y ∗(L) , x∗(L)

is a well-defined C k function for small µ, η. For our analysis we only need the Taylor series of S to first order, which from (A.16) is found to be S(µ, η) = −

a1 µ − η + O(2) . ω2

For µ < 0, y = Sx is the line intersecting (x∗(L) , y ∗(L) )T and the origin. Let n o Π = (x, y) | y = Sx, x ≥ x∗(L) , (A.30) as in Fig. 3.8. In the polar coordinates centered at the equilibrium, Π is described by a C k function θΠ (r; µ, η1 ) = θˇ + ρ1 r + O(r2 ) ,

(A.31)

where θˇ and ρ1 are coefficients dependent on µ and η1 . The coefficient θˇ describes the angle of Π at the equilibrium in (u, v) coordinates; ρ1 arises from the nonlinear coordinate change, (A.23). Since explicit forms for these coefficients will not be required, we do not derive them. Step 4: Derive Plhf and compute h2 . We now wish to determine the left half Poincaré map, Plhf . To do this we compute the trajectory of a point, (r0 , θΠ (r0 ; µ, η1 )) on Π, and find its next intersection, (r1 , θΠ (r1 ; µ, η1 )). The transition time is T4 (r0 ; µ, η1 ) =

2π + O(1) . ω

(A.32)

Substituting (A.20) and (A.32) into (A.28) produces r1 (r0 ; µ, η1 ) = R(r0 , θΠ (r0 ; µ, η1 ), T4 (r0 ; µ, η1 ); µ, η1 ) ³ ´ π 2πa0 3 r + O(4) . (A.33) = 1 + η1 ( + O(|µ, η1 |1 )) r0 + ω ω 0 Let s denote the distance from (x∗(L) , y ∗(L) ) in (u, v), (A.21), coordinates. That is 1

s = |z| = (u2 + v 2 ) 2 . By (A.23) and (A.26) s(r) = r + σ2 r2 + O(r3 ) ,

(A.34)

November 26, 2009

15:34

178


bifurcations


for some coefficient σ2 , determined by ζ, (A.23). By combining (A.33) and (A.34) we are able to obtain s1 as a function of s0 , where s0 is a point on Π and s1 is the next point on Π ³ ´ 2πa0 3 π πσ2 η1 s20 + s + O(4) . s1 (s0 ; µ, η1 ) = 1 + η1 ( + O(|µ, η1 |1 )) s0 + ω ω ω 0 (A.35) Let (ε, Sε)T be a point on Π in (x, y) coordinates. Let εˇ = ε − x∗(L) .

(A.36)

Since εˇ is a scalar multiple of s and when µ = η1 = 0 we have εˇ = s, it follows that to third order the map between εˇ0 and εˇ1 is the same as (A.35), i.e. ³ ´ 2πa0 3 π πσ2 η1 εˇ20 + εˇ + O(4) . εˇ1 (ˇ ε0 ; µ, η1 ) = 1 + η1 ( + O(|µ, η1 |1 )) εˇ0 + ω ω ω 0 (A.37) The system (3.7) has a periodic orbit that grazes the y-axis when εˇ0 = εˇ1 = −x∗(L) 6= 0. By substituting this into (A.37) and dividing through by −x∗(L) we obtain π πσ2 2πa0 ∗(L)2 η1 x∗(L) (µ, η1 )+ x (µ, η1 )+O(3) . 1 = 1+η1 ( +O(|µ, η1 |1 ))− ω ω ω (A.38) Using (A.16) and the implicit function theorem we find (A.38) is satisfied ˆ 2 (µ) for a C k function when η1 = h ˆ 2 (µ) = − 2a0 µ2 + O(µ3 ) . h ω4 Let ˆ2 , h2 = h1 + h ˆ 2 (µ) . η2 = η1 − h

(A.39)

We have therefore derived (3.14) and proved (2) of the theorem. We now write Plhf in terms of ε, µ and η2 . Combining (A.36), (A.37) and (A.39) produces ³ π π Plhf (ε0 ; µ, η2 ) = µη2 (− 3 + O(|µ, η2 |1 )) + 1 + η2 + q1 µ2 + q2 µη2 ω ω ´ + q3 η22 + O(|µ, η2 |3 ) ε0 + O(ε20 ) ,

(A.40)

where 4πa0 , (A.41) ω5 and explicit forms for q2 and q3 will not be required subsequently. q1 =

November 26, 2009

15:34


bifurcations

Selected Proofs

179

Step 5: Derive the discontinuity map, Pdm . In order to avoid singularities, here we assume µ < 0 and introduce the spatial scaling · ¸ · ¸ 1 x x ˆ . (A.42) =− yˆ µ y In the left half-plane · · ¸ · (L) ¸ ¸ 1 f (L) (µˆ x, µˆ x ˆ˙ y ; µ, η) fˆ (ˆ x, yˆ; µ, η) = = − . x, µˆ y ; µ, η) yˆ˙ gˆ(L) (ˆ x, yˆ; µ, η) µ g (L) (µˆ

(A.43)

Let X (L) (ˆ y0 , t; µ, η) = A1 t + A2 t2 + A3 t3 + O(t4 ) , Y

(L)

2

3

(A.44) 4

(ˆ y0 , t; µ, η) = yˆ0 + B1 t + B2 t + B3 t + O(t ) ,

(A.45)

denote the components of the C k left half-flow for an initial condition (0, yˆ0 ), on the switching manifold. The parameter dependent coefficients are obtained by solving (A.43) using (A.15) A1 = yˆ0 − a3 µˆ y02 + O(ˆ y03 ) , 1 1 y0 + O(ˆ y02 ) , A2 = − + ( η + a3 µ)ˆ 2 2 1 1 A3 = − a3 µ − η + O(ˆ y0 ) , 3 6 (A.46) B1 = −1 − b3 µˆ y02 + O(ˆ y03 ) , 1 B2 = (− δ (L) + b3 µ)ˆ y0 + O(ˆ y02 ) , 2 1 1 B3 = − b3 µ + δ (L) + O(ˆ y0 ) . 3 6 We now derive P1 , P2 and P3 in scaled coordinates, (A.42), beginning with P3 . The point p4 = P3 (p3 ) (see Fig. 3.8) lies on Π, therefore to compute the corresponding transition time, T3 , we solve Y (L) = SX (L) for t. The function G1 (ˆ y0 , t; µ, η) = Y (L) (ˆ y0 , t; µ, η) − SX (L) (ˆ y0 , t; µ, η) 1 = yˆ0 − t − S yˆ0 t + St2 + O(3) , 2 is C k and by the implicit function theorem there exists a unique C k function T3 : R3 → R such that G1 (ˆ y0 , T3 (ˆ y0 ; µ, η); µ, η) = 0. Furthermore 1 y03 ) . T3 (ˆ y0 ; µ, η) = yˆ0 − S yˆ02 + O(ˆ 2

(A.47)

November 26, 2009

15:34

180


bifurcations


Combining (A.44) and (A.47) yields P3 (ˆ y0 ; µ, η) =

1 2 1 yˆ + (η − a3 µ)ˆ y03 + O(ˆ y04 ) . 2 0 3

(A.48)

Notice (see Fig. 3.8) that P1−1 is the same as P3 except the y-component of the initial condition has opposite sign. That is, yˆ0 = P1 (ˆ ε0 ; µ, η), whenever εˆ0 = P3 (−ˆ y0 ; µ, η). By inverting (A.48) we obtain P1 (ˆ ε0 ; µ, η) =

√ 1 3 2 2ˆ ε02 − (η − a3 µ)ˆ ε0 + O(ˆ ε02 ) . 3

(A.49)

In a similar manner as for P3 we are able to use a series expansion of the right half-flow to determine P2 . We obtain 2 P2 (ˆ y0 ; µ, η) = −ˆ y0 − (τ (R) − a3 µ)ˆ y02 + O(ˆ y03 ) . 3

(A.50)

The discontinuity map is Pdm = P3 ◦P2 ◦P1 . Composition of (A.48)-(A.50) produces √ 3 4 2 (R) (τ − η)ˆ εˆ4 = Pdm (ˆ ε1 ; µ, η) = εˆ1 + ε12 + O(ˆ ε21 ) . (A.51) 3 Step 6: Obtain the full Poincaré map, P and compute h3 . The full Poincaré map is P = Plhf ◦ Pdm . In scaled coordinates (A.40) becomes ³ π π εˆ6 = η2 ( 3 + O(|µ, η2 |1 )) + 1 + η2 + q1 µ2 + q2 µη2 ω ω ´ + q3 η22 + O(|µ, η2 |3 ) εˆ4 + O(ˆ ε24 ) .

(A.52)

Composing (A.51) and (A.52) produces 3

ε21 ) , εˆ6 = P(ˆ ε1 ; µ, η2 ) = Ω0 + Ω1 εˆ1 + Ω2 εˆ12 + O(ˆ where π η2 + O(2) , ω3 π Ω1 (µ, η2 ) = 1 + η2 + q1 µ2 + q2 µη2 + q3 η22 + O(3) , ω √ 4 2 τR + O(1) . Ω2 (µ, η2 ) = 3 √ To remove fractional powers we introduce χ = εˆ. The function Ω0 (µ, η2 ) =

G2 (χ; µ, η2 ) = P(χ2 ; µ, η2 ) − χ2 ,

(A.53)

November 26, 2009

15:34


Selected Proofs

bifurcations

181

is C k−1 , and by the implicit function theorem, there exists a unique C k−1 function, F, such that G2 (χ; µ, F(χ; µ)) = 0. Via a series expansion it is straightforward to obtain Ã √ ! ¶ µ 3 4 2ω τ ω 3 q1 2 R µ + O(µ3 ) χ2 + − + O(µ) χ3 + O(χ4 ) . F(χ; µ) = − π 3π (A.54) The fixed point (A.54), has an associated multiplier of one when the C k−2 function ∂P 2 G3 (χ; µ) = (χ ; µ, F(χ; µ)) − 1 ∂ε √ = (q1 µ2 + O(µ3 )) + (2 2τR + O(µ))χ + O(χ2 ) , is zero. By the implicit function theorem, there exists a unique C k−2 funcˆ 3 , such that G3 (h ˆ 3 (µ); µ) = 0. Furthermore, using (A.41), tion, h √ 2πa0 2 ˆ µ + O(µ3 ) . h3 (µ) = − 5 ω τR 1

ˆ 3 (µ) ≥ 0 which is true Notice this fixed point is valid when εˆ12 = χ = h when a0 and τR have opposite signs. Finally let ˆ 3 (µ); µ) h3 (µ) = h2 (µ) + F(h 8π 2 a3 = h2 (µ) − 12 02 µ6 + o(µ6 ) . 3ω τR Then h3 is the C k−2 function (3.15) and we have verified (3) and (4) of the theorem. ¤ Proof. [Theorem 3.3] Since the real and imaginary parts of the eigenvectors z± , u(1) and u(2) , are linearly independent, there exists j 6= 1 such that " # (1) (2) u1 u1 U= , (1) (2) uj uj is nonsingular. For the remainder of this proof we will set j = 2, w.l.o.g. It is easily verified that i i h h (A.55) AL u(1) u(2) = u(1) u(2) D , where

· D=

ν ω −ω ν

¸ .

November 26, 2009

182

15:34


bifurcations


Define two new vectors by h i h i v (1) v (2) = u(1) u(2) U −1 , let

(A.56)

h i V = v (1) v (2) e3 · · · eN ,

and introduce the new coordinate system x ˆ = V −1 x .

(A.57)

(The inclusion of the matrix, U −1 , in (A.56) allows for simplification below, T −1 in particular, eT = eT i V = ei V i for i = 1, 2.) As in the given proof of Theorem 3.1, the (N + 2)-dimensional, C k , extended left half-flow in the new coordinates is given by (A.8). Here the Jacobian, DF (0; 0, 0), (A.9), has a four-dimensional, linear, center manifold, E c , spanned by   −(AL (0, 0)V )−1 b  , eN +2 } . {n1 , n2 , n3 , n4 } = {e1 , e2 ,  1 0 Notice W c is not tangent to the switching manifold by condition (iv) of the theorem. On the local center manifold x ˆ = H(ˆ x1 , x ˆ2 ; µ, η) = x ˆ 1 e1 + x ˆ2 e2 + ζµ + O(2) , where ζ ∈ RN is equal to −(AL (0, 0)V )−1 b except that its first two elements are zero. The dynamics on W c are described by · ¸ · T¸µ x ˆ˙ 1 e = 1T V −1 µb + V −1 AL V H(ˆ x1 , x ˆ2 ; µ, η) ˙x e2 ˆ2 ¶ + V −1 g (L) (V H(ˆ x1 , x ˆ2 ; µ, η); µ, η) , where g (L) represents all terms of f (L) that are nonlinear in x. By using (A.55) and (A.56) we obtain · ¸ · ¸ x ˆ x ˆ˙ 1 ˆ ˆ = µb(µ, η) + AL (µ, η) 1 + O(2) , (A.58) ˙x x ˆ2 ˆ2 where, at µ = η = 0, · T¸ e AˆL = 1T V −1 AL V [e1 e2 ] = U DU −1 , e2

(A.59)

November 26, 2009

15:34


bifurcations

Selected Proofs

183

and

· T¸ · T¸ · T¸ h i ˆb = e1 V −1 b + e1 V −1 AL V ζ = e1 V −1 AL v (1) v (2) 0 · · · 0 A−1 b L eT eT eT 2 2 2 h i = AˆL 0 · · · 0 A−1 b . L

Equation (A.58) is the left half-flow of (1.10) restricted to W c . It indeed is of the form (1.11) as stated in the theorem. Finally, due to condition (ii), it is easily verified that at µ = η = 0 %ˆTˆb =

det(AˆL ) T % b 6= 0 , det(AL )

(A.60)

ˆ ˆ where %ˆT = eT 1 adj(AL ). By (A.59), AL (0, 0) has eigenvalues ν(0, 0) ± iω(0, 0), thus (A.58) is observable, by Lemma 1.2. Consequently, since we also have (A.60), (A.58) may be transformed to the observer canonical form and by condition (iii), (3.9) and condition (i) of Theorem 3.2 may be satisfied. ¤ Proof. [Theorem 3.4] Suppose KL < KR (the case KL > KR follows by a reversal of the direction of time). Let r 1 (i) ω = δ (i) − τ (i)2 . 4 Let PL and PR be the same maps that were defined in Sec. 2.2 and P = PL ◦ PR , (2.9)-(2.11), see Fig. 2.1. P is a Poincaré map from the positive y-axis to itself. As detailed in the proof of Theorem 2.1, PL and PR are welldefined for small µ ≤ 0, and by considering C k extensions, we may assume PL and PR are C k functions in a neighborhood of (y; µ, η) = (0; 0, 0). Since PR (0; µ, η) ≡ 0, we may write PR (y0 ; µ, η) = α2 y0 + α4 µy0 + α5 y02 + O(|y0 , µ|3 ) , where the coefficients, αi , vary with η. Similarly, since PL (0; 0, η) ≡ 0 and ∂PL ∂µ (0; 0, η) ≡ −γL we may write PL (y1 ; µ, η) = −γL µ + β2 y1 + β3 µ2 + β4 µy1 + β5 y12 + O(|y1 , µ|3 ) , where each βi varies with η. Then P(y; µ, η) = −γL µ + α2 β2 y + β3 µ2 + (α4 β2 + α2 β4 )µy + (α5 β2 + α22 β5 )y 2 + O(|y, µ|3 ) .

(A.61)

To compute fixed points of P (these correspond to periodic orbits of (1.10)), we first need to obtain expressions for some of the coefficients αi and βi .

November 26, 2009

15:34

184


bifurcations


Below we determine α2 and α5 by deriving explicit equations for the right half-flow when µ = 0. By symmetry, expressions for β2 and β5 will be identical except with “R”’s replaced with “L”’s. Expressions for the remaining coefficients (α4 , β3 , β4 ) are not required for this proof. For ease of notation we expand the vector field in the right half-plane to second order in x and y f (R) (x, y; µ, η) = τ (R) x + y + a1 x2 + a2 xy + a3 y 2 + O(|x, y|3 ) , g (R) (x, y; µ, η) = −δ (R) x + b1 x2 + b2 xy + b3 y 2 + O(|x, y|3 ) . Let

·

(A.62)

¸ · ¸ X(y0 , t; η) A1 y0 + A2 y02 (R) = ϕt (0, y0 ; 0, η) = + O(y03 ) , Y (y0 , t; η) B1 y0 + B2 y02

denote the C k right half-flow for an initial condition (0, y0 ) with y0 > 0 when µ = 0. The coefficients Ai and Bi vary with t and η. Using the (R) (R) relations ∂X (X, Y ; 0, η) and ∂Y (X, Y ; 0, η) we obtain ∂t = f ∂t = g (A˙ 1 − τ A1 − B1 )y0 + (A˙ 2 − τ A2 − B2 − a1 A21 − a2 A1 B1 − a3 B12 )y02 = O(y03 ) , (B˙ 1 + δA1 )y0 + (B˙ 2 + δA2 − b1 A21 − b2 A1 B1 − b3 B12 )y02 = O(y03 ) , where τ = τ (R) (0, η) and δ = δ (R) (0, η). A1 and B1 may be determined by solving the two-dimensional, homogeneous, initial value problem A˙ 1 = τ A1 + B1 , B˙ 1 = −δA1 ,

A1 (0) = 0 , B1 (0) = 1 .

We obtain A1 (t) =

1 tτ e 2 sin(ωt) , ω tτ

B1 (t) = e 2 (cos(ωt) −

(A.63) τ sin(ωt)) , 2ω

where ω = ω (R) (0, η). To determine A2 and B2 we are required to solve the two-dimensional, non-homogeneous, initial value problem A˙ 2 = τ A2 + B2 + a1 A21 + a2 A1 B1 + a3 B12 , B˙ 2 = −δA2 + b1 A21 + b2 A1 B1 + b3 B12 ,

A2 (0) = 0 , B2 (0) = 0 .

Write a1 A21 + a2 A1 B1 + a3 B12 = etτ (p1 + p2 cos(2ωt) + p3 sin(2ωt)) , b1 A21 + b2 A1 B1 + b3 B12 = etτ (q1 + q2 cos(2ωt) + q3 sin(2ωt)) ,

November 26, 2009

15:34


bifurcations

Selected Proofs

185

where    1 τ δ 0 p1 0 0 2ω 2 − 4ω 2 2ω 2 p  − 1 τ δ 1 − 0 0 0  2   2ω2 4ω2 2ω 2    τ 1 0 0 0  p3   0 − 2ω − 2ω  = τ δ 1  q1   0 − 0 0 2 2 2ω 4ω 2ω 2    τ 1  q2   0 0 0 − 2ω2 4ω2 1 − 2ωδ 2 τ 1 − 2ω 0 q3 0 0 0 − 2ω Then A2 (t) = e

tτ 2



 a1 a   2     a3    .   b1      b2  b3

(A.64)

µ ¶ τ 1 sin(ωt)) − (d1 + d2 ) sin(ωt) −(c1 + c2 )(cos(ωt) + 2ω ω

+ etτ (c1 + c2 cos(2ωt) + c3 sin(2ωt)) , µ ¶ tτ δ τ 2 (c1 + c2 ) sin(ωt) − (d1 + d2 )(cos(ωt) − sin(ωt)) B2 (t) = e ω 2ω + etτ (d1 + d2 cos(2ωt) + d3 sin(2ωt)) , where the coefficients c1 , c2 , c3 , d1 , d2 , d3 , may be determined by solving the nonsingular, linear system      p1 0 0 0 −1 0 0 c1  p   0 0 2ω 0 −1 0   c   2   2        p3   0 −2ω 0 0 0 −1   c3  (A.65)  =   .  q1   δ 0 0 τ 0 0   d1        q2   0 δ 0 0 τ 2ω   d2  q3 0 0 δ 0 −2ω τ d3 In particular we obtain (using (A.64)) µ 1 − 6δa1 + 4δτ a2 − δ(3δ + 2τ 2 )a3 d1 + d2 = 2 9δ − 2δτ 2 ¶ 2 2 − 2τ b1 + (−3δ + 2τ )b2 + τ (5δ − 2τ )b3 .

(A.66)

By solving X(y0 , TR ; η) = 0 it is easily determined that the transition time for the Poincaré map PR , when µ = 0, is a C k function π TR (y0 ; η) = + O(y0 ) . ω Then PR (y0 ; η) = Y (y0 , TR (y0 ; η); η) = B1 (TR )y0 + B2 (TR )y02 + O(y03 ) πτ

πτ

πτ

= −e 2ω y0 + (d1 + d2 )e 2ω (1 + e 2ω )y02 + O(y03 ) ,

November 26, 2009

15:34


186

bifurcations

Bifurcations in Piecewise-Smooth, Continuous Systems πτ

since, in particular, B1 (TR ) = −e 2ω + O(y02 ). Therefore we have obtained πτ

α2 = −e 2ω ,

πτ ¡ πτ ¢ α5 = (d1 + d2 )e 2ω 1 + e 2ω .

Thus πτR

α2 (0) = −e 2ωR ,

πτR ³ πτR ´ α5 (0) = KR e 2ωR 1 + e 2ωR ,

and similarly πτL

β2 (0) = −e 2ωL ,

πτL ³ πτL ´ β5 (0) = KL e 2ωL 1 + e 2ωL .

Thus the full Poincaré map, P, is P(y0 ; µ, η) = ζ1 µ+ζ2 y0 +ζ3 µ2 +ζ4 µy0 +ζ5 y02 +ζ6 µη+ζ7 ηy0 +O(3) , (A.67) where in particular ζ1 = −γL (0) , ζ2 = α2 (0)β2 (0) = eπΛ(0,0) = 1 ,

³ πτR ´ ζ5 = α5 (0)β2 (0) + α22 (0)β5 (0) = (KL − KR ) 1 + e 2ωR ³ πτ ´ − L = (KL − KR ) 1 + e 2ωL , ζ7 =

d dη α2 β2 |η=0

= πΛη (0, 0) = π .

Fixed points of (A.67) may be found by solving P(y0 ; µ, η) = y0 . Since ζ1 6= 0 we may use the implicit function theorem to solve for µ. We obtain µFP (y0 , η) = −

ζ5 2 ζ7 y − y0 η + O(3) . ζ1 0 ζ1

Saddle-node bifurcations occur when ∂P(y0 ; µFP (y0 , η), η) ∂y0 = 1 + 2ζ5 y0 + ζ7 η + O(2) ,

1=

hence y0SN (η) = −

ζ7 η + O(η 2 ) , 2ζ5

(A.68)

November 26, 2009

15:34


Selected Proofs

bifurcations

187

since ζ5 6= 0. Thus saddle-node bifurcations occur along the C k−1 curve µ = h(η) = µFP (y0SN (η), η) ζ72 2 η + O(η 3 ) , = 4ζ1 ζ5 which verifies (3.30). Here ζ5 < 0, thus by (A.68), y0SN (η) is positive (corresponding to an admissible saddle-node bifurcation) exactly when η is positive, in agreement with the final statement of the theorem. ¤ Proof. [Theorem 5.2] The theorem is proved in five steps. First, the function h1 is calculated by finding where x∗(L) has an associated multiplier 2 of −1. Second, h2 is calculated from an expression for f (L) . Third, an explicit computation of the piecewise-smooth, second iterate map allows the border-collision bifurcation of the two-cycle that occurs along η = h2 (µ) to be classified. Finally, in steps four and five we prove parts (4) and (5) respectively. Since f (L) (5.9) is C k and k ≥ 3, we can write aL (µ, η) = −1 + α1 µ + η + α3 µ2 + α4 µη + α5 η 2 + o(2) , b(µ, η) = 1 + β1 µ + β2 η + O(2) , p(µ, η) = γ0 + γ1 µ + γ2 η + o(1) ,

(A.69)

q(µ, η) = δ0 + o(0) , where we have used hypotheses of the theorem to simplify the coefficients. Step 1: Compute the function h1 which corresponds to the existence of a fixed point of the left half-map with multiplier −1. By the implicit function theorem the left half-map has the fixed point x∗(L) (µ, η) =

1 µ + k1 µ2 + k2 µη + k3 η 2 + O(3) , 2

(A.70)

which is a C k function of µ and η and locally satisfies f (L) (x∗(L) (µ, η); µ, η) − x∗(L) (µ, η) ≡ 0. By a second order expansion, it is determined that the scalar coefficients, ki , have the values α1 γ0 β1 + + , 2 4 8 1 β2 + , k2 = 2 4 k3 = 0 . k1 =

(A.71)

November 26, 2009

188

15:34


bifurcations


The multiplier associated with x∗(L) (µ, η) is found by substituting (A.70) into Dx f (L) (x; µ, η) (see (5.9)). We obtain Dx f (L) (x∗(L) (µ, η); µ, η) = −1 + (α1 + γ0 )µ + η + (α4 + 2k2 γ0 + γ2 )µη ¶ µ 3δ0 µ2 + α3 + 2k1 γ0 + γ1 + 4 + α5 η 2 + o(2) .

(A.72)

The implicit function theorem implies that h1 (µ) = −(α1 + γ0 )µ + l1 µ2 + o(µ2 ) ,

(A.73)

is a C k−1 function that locally satisfies Dx f (L) (x∗(L) (µ, h1 (µ)); µ, h1 (µ)) + 1 ≡ 0, where l1 is found by substituting (A.73) into (A.72), ¶ µ 3δ0 +(α4 +2k2 γ0 +γ2 )(α1 +γ0 )−α5 (α1 +γ0 )2 . l1 = − α3 + 2k1 γ0 + γ1 + 4 (A.74) When c0 6= 0, the existence of period-doubling bifurcations along η = h1 (µ) for small µ is verified by checking the three conditions of the standard theorem, see for instance [Guckenheimer and Holmes (1986)]: i) (singularity) by construction, Dx f (L) (x∗(L) (µ, h1 (µ)); µ, h1 (µ)) ≡ −1, ³ (L) 2 (L) ´¯ 2 (L) ¯ f f ii) (transversality) ∂f∂η ∂ ∂x + 2 ∂∂x∂η = 2 + O(µ) 6= 0, ¯ 2 η=h ¶1¯(µ) µ ³ ´ 2 ¯ 2 (L) 3 (L) f 1 ∂ f ¯ + 31 ∂ ∂x iii) (non-degeneracy) = 2c0 + 3 2 ∂x2 ¯ O(µ) 6= 0.

η=h1 (µ)

Consequently we have proved (1) of the theorem. Step 2: Compute the function h2 which corresponds to the existence of a period-two orbit of the left half-map at x = 0. 2 To determine h2 , we compute the C k function f (L) (0; µ, η) = 2 f (L) (µb(µ, η); µ, η) which may be written as f (L) (0; µ, η) = µg(µ, η) where ³ ´ g(µ, η) = b(µ, η) 1 + aL (µ, η) + µb(µ, η)p(µ, η) + µ2 b2 (µ, η)q(µ, η) + o(2) , (A.75) is C k−1 . Substitution of (A.69) into (A.75) produces g(µ, η) = (α1 + γ0 )µ + η + (α1 β1 + α3 + 2β1 γ0 + γ1 + δ0 )µ2 + (β1 + α1 β2 + α4 + 2β2 γ0 + γ2 )µη + (β2 + α5 )η 2 + o(2) .

(A.76)

November 26, 2009

15:34


Selected Proofs

bifurcations

189

The implicit function theorem implies that h2 (µ) = −(α1 + γ0 )µ + l2 µ2 + o(µ2 ) ,

(A.77)

is a C k−1 function that locally satisfies g(µ, h2 (µ)) ≡ 0. By substituting (A.77) into (A.76) we deduce l2 = −(α1 β1 + α3 + 2β1 γ0 + γ1 + δ0 ) − (β2 + α5 )(α1 + γ0 )2 + (β1 + α1 β2 + α4 + 2β2 γ0 + γ2 )(α1 + γ0 ) ,

(A.78)

Subtracting (A.74) from (A.78) produces (after algebraic simplification) γ02 + δ0 , 4 which proves (5.14) in the statement of the theorem. Step 3: Determine all two-cycles to verify the phase portraits in Fig. 5.2. For small, fixed µ < 0, the two-cycle generated in a period-doubling bifurcation at η = h1 (µ) undergoes a border-collision bifurcation when it collides with the switching manifold at η = h2 (µ). The stability and relative admissibility of two-cycles emanating from this border-collision bifurcation is found by determining a map of the form (1.39) that describes the bifurcation. Such a map may be obtained by computing the second iterate of (5.8) and replacing η with the new parameter l2 − l1 = −

ηˆ = η − h2 (µ) , which controls the border-collision. Near ηˆ = 0, when µ < 0 period-two orbits are guaranteed to have one negative point, so we compute f (L) ◦ f (L) and f (L) ◦ f (R) which leads to ( (µ + O(µ2 ))ˆ η + (1 − c0 µ2 + o(µ2 ))x + O(|x, ηˆ|2 ), x ≤ 0 f 2 (x; µ, ηˆ) = (R) x≥0 (µ + O(µ2 ))ˆ η + (−a0 + O(µ))x + O(|x, ηˆ|2 ), (A.79) A fixed point, x∗(LL) , of the left half-map of (A.79) corresponds to a twocycle of (5.8) with both points negative-valued, when admissible. By (A.79), if c0 < 0 [c0 > 0], then x∗(LL) is unstable and admissible when ηˆ < 0 [stable and admissible when ηˆ > 0]. Similarly, a fixed point, x∗(RL) of the right half-map of (A.79) corresponds to a two-cycle of (5.8) comprised of two (R) points with different signs, when admissible. If |a0 | < 1, then x∗(RL) is (R) (R) stable, otherwise it is unstable. Furthermore if a0 < −1 [a0 > −1], (R) ∗(RL) then x is admissible when ηˆ > 0 [ˆ η < 0]. Lastly, since a0 6= −1, the ∗(RL) fixed point, x , is unique for small µ and η. Therefore the two-cycle

November 26, 2009

190

15:34


bifurcations


created at µ = 0 collides with the switching manifold at η = h2 (µ). These statements verify all two-cycles shown in Fig. 5.2. Step 4: Show that f , (5.8), has no n-cycles with n ≥ 3, verifying part (4). (R) Except when a0 = 0 our proof is founded on the knowledge that a onedimensional map cannot have an n-cycle with n ≥ 3 contained in an interval (R) on which the map is monotone. For the special case a0 = 0 we used several additional logical arguments including the contraction mapping theorem. (R) Case I: a0 < 0. In this case there exists δ > 0 such that ∀µ, η ∈ [−δ, δ], f is decreasing on [−δ, δ]. Consequently f has no n-cycles with n ≥ 3 on [−δ, δ]. (R) Case II: a0 = 0. First we construct an interval containing the origin on which f is forward invariant. Since the two components of f are differentiable, there exists ˆ δ], ˆ δˆ > 0 such that ∀µ, η, x ∈ [−δ, ¯ (R) ¯ ¯ (L) ¯ ¯ ∂f ¯ ¯ ∂f ¯ 1 ¯ ¯,¯ ¯ ¯ ∂x ¯ ¯ ∂x + 1¯ , |b(µ, η) − 1| ≤ 3 . ˆ let I = [−4δ, 8δ] and assume µ, η ∈ [−δ, δ]. Then f (I) ⊂ I Let δ = 18 δ, because for any x ∈ I, we may assume x > 0 when calculating a lower bound for f (x): f (x) ≥ µb − 31 x ≥ − 34 δ − 38 δ = −4δ, and we may assume x < 0 when calculating an upper bound: f (x) ≤ µb − 34 x ≤ 34 δ + 34 4δ < 8δ. If µ ≥ 0 then the image of any x < 0 under f is positive and since the right half-map is contracting and the slope of the left half-map is near −1, f 2 is a contraction on I, indeed |Dx f 2 (x)| ≤ 34 31 < 1. By the contraction mapping theorem, iterates of f 2 approach a unique fixed point, which must be x∗(R) , therefore f cannot have an n-cycle with n ≥ 3 on N (5.12). 2 So we now assume µ < 0. Recall that when η = h2 (µ), f (L) (0) = 0, −1 −1 i.e. f (0) = f (L) (0), and when η > h2 (µ), f (0) > f (L) (0). Therefore if −1 η ≥ h2 (µ), see Fig. A.2(a), the interval [f (L) (0), 0] is forward invariant. Since f is monotone on the interval J = [f (0), 0] ,

(A.80)

it contains no n-cycles with n ≥ 3 here. On the other hand if η < h2 (µ) −1 as in Fig. A.2(b), the forward orbit of any point in [f (L) (0), 0] is either −1 contained in this interval (where f is monotone) or enters [f (0), f (L) (0)] and approaches the stable two-cycle (this may be shown formally by the contraction mapping theorem). In any case, an n-cycle of f with n ≥ 3 cannot include a point in J = [f (0), 0].

November 26, 2009

15:34


bifurcations

Selected Proofs

191

Suppose for a contradiction f has an n-cycle with n ≥ 3, call it {x0 . . . xn−1 } ⊂ [−δ, δ] \ J. We now show that the restriction of f 2 to this n-cycle is a contraction giving a contradiction according to the contraction mapping theorem. Specifically we will argue that for any i and j, 4 |xj − xi | . (A.81) 9 There are several cases to consider. For example, suppose that xj > 0, xi < 0 and f 2 (xj ) < f 2 (xi ). Then f (xj ) > f (0) − 31 xj thus f 2 (xj ) > f (0)+ 31 f (0)− 91 xj . Also f (xi ) < f (0)− 34 xi thus f 2 (xi ) < f (0)+ 31 f (0)− 94 xi . Subtracting these inequalities leads to (A.81). The remaining cases can be shown similarly. |f 2 (xj ) − f 2 (xi )|
h2 (µ)

K

(b) η < h2 (µ)

Fig. A.2: Schematic diagrams illustrating the map f , (5.8), when µ < 0 and η > h2 (µ) in panel (a) and η < h2 (µ) in panel (b). When η = h2 (µ), −1 f (L) (0) = f (0). (R)

Case III: a0 > 0. Case IIIa: First suppose that µ ≥ 0. There exists δ1 > 0 such that whenever µ ∈ [0, δ1 ] and η ∈ [−δ1 , δ1 ], f is decreasing on [−δ1 , 0] and increasing on [0, δ1 ]. Since µ ≥ 0, ∀x ∈ [−δ1 , δ1 ], f (x) ≥ 0. Thus any periodic solution of f in [−δ1 , δ1 ] must lie entirely in [0, δ1 ]. But f is increasing on this interval thus has no n-cycles with n ≥ 3 here. Case IIIb: Now suppose µ < 0 and η ≥ h2 (µ). There exists δ2 > 0 such that whenever µ ∈ [−δ2 , 0) and η ∈ [h2 (µ), δ2 ], f is decreasing on [−δ2 , 0] and increasing on [0, δ2 ], see Fig. A.2(a). Suppose for a contradiction, f has an n-cycle with n ≥ 3 on [−δ2 , δ2 ]. Such an n-cycle must enter both [−δ2 , 0) and (0, δ2 ], and so it includes a point x ∈ (0, δ2 ] with f (x) ∈ [−δ2 , 0). But

November 26, 2009

15:34


192

bifurcations


f (x) lies in J, (A.80), and since η ≥ h2 (µ), f 2 (0) ≤ 0, hence f (J) ⊂ J. Thus the forward orbit of x cannot return to (0, δ2 ] which contradicts the assumption that x belongs to an n-cycle. (R) Case IIIc: Finally suppose µ < 0, η < h2 (µ) and 0 < a0 < 1. Then there exists δ3 > 0 such that whenever µ ∈ [−δ3 , 0), η ∈ [−δ3 , h2 (µ)) and x ∈ [−δ3 , δ3 ], Ã ! (R) 1 − a0 1 0 − 1+ ≤ f (L) (x) ≤ − , (R) 2 2(1 + a ) 0

(R)

a0 2

(R)

0

≤ f (R) (x) ≤

1 + a0 2

,

(R)

where the particular non-symmetric a0 -dependent bounds on the slopes have been chosen to simplify the subsequent analysis. Suppose for a contradiction f has an n-cycle with n ≥ 3 in [−δ3 , δ3 ]. As before, such an n-cycle must include a point x ∈ (0, δ3 ] with f (x) ∈ [−δ3 , 0). Again f (x) ∈ J, but here η < h2 (µ), thus the forward orbit of x may return to the right of the origin but must enter the interval K = [0, f 2 (0)], (R)

1+a

0 f 2 (0). Then by evaluatsee Fig. A.2(b). Notice f 3 (0) ≤ f (0) + 2 (L) ing the first-orderµ expansion of about f (0) at f 3 (0), we arrive at ¶f (R) (R) 1+a0 1−a0 f 2 (0) > 0, therefore f 2 (K) ⊂ K. f 4 (0) ≥ f 2 (0) − 1 + 21 (R) 2 1+a0 ¶ µ (R) (R) 0 1+a0 1 1−a0 2 < 1. Thus f 2 : K → K Then ∀y ∈ K, |f (y)| ≤ 1 + 2 (R) 2

1+a0

is a contraction mapping and therefore iterates of f that enter K cannot belong to an n-cycle with n ≥ 3. Finally let δ = min(δ1 , δ2 , δ3 ), then the result, (5.8), is proved. Step 5: Prove the existence of chaos when µ < 0, η < h2 (µ) and (R) a0 > 1. We first construct a trapping set, T , for f 2 . Let ρ(µ, η) = f 2 (0; µ, η). Since µ < 0, by (A.79), ρ(µ, η) = O(2). Since η < h2 (µ), ρ > 0. Therefore (R)

f (2ρ) = f (0) + (2a0

+ O(1))ρ + O(ρ2 ) < 0 .

Consequently, (R)

f 2 (2ρ) = (1 − 2a0 f Let

(L)−1

(R)

(f (2ρ)) = (−2a0

+ O(1))ρ + O(ρ2 ) ,

+ O(1))ρ + O(ρ2 ) .

h i −1 T = f (L) (f (2ρ)), 2ρ ,

(A.82) (A.83)

November 26, 2009

15:34


bifurcations

Selected Proofs

193

xn+2 2ρ ρ

xn 0

f 2 (2ρ)

−1

f (L)

(f (2ρ))

Fig. A.3: The second iterate of (5.8), f 2 , near x = 0 when µ < 0, η < h2 (µ) (R) and a0 > 1. The slope of this map is approximately unity left of the (R) see origin and approximately −a0 right of hthe origin. As a consequence, i −1

the text, the map exhibits chaos in T = f (L)

(f (2ρ)), 2ρ .

It follows, see Fig. A.3, that ∀x ∈ T , f 2 (2ρ) ≤ f 2 (x) ≤ ρ. But ρ, f 2 (2ρ) ∈ int(T ), thus f 2 (T ) ⊂ int(T ), i.e. T is a trapping set for f 2 . Furthermore, T∞ 2i 2 i=0 f (T ), is an attracting set for f . (R) Let M ∈ Z with M ≥ 2a0 + 2. We now show that ∀x ∈ T , ∃j ∈ Z with 0 ≤ j < M such that f 2j (x) > 0. Suppose otherwise. Then whenever 0 ≤ j < M , f 2j (x) ≤ 0 and thus f 2j (x) = (j + O(1))ρ + (1 + O(1))x + O(x2 ) . Since f 2 is increasing on T− , it suffices to consider x = f (L) combining (A.83) and (A.84) we find (R)

f 2(M −1) (x) ≥ (2a0

(R)

+ 1 + O(1))ρ + (1 + O(1))(−2a0

(A.84) −1

(f (2ρ)). By

+ O(1))ρ + O(ρ2 )

= (1 + O(1))ρ + O(ρ2 ) > 0 , which is a contradiction. Now consider the map f 2M : T → T . Note that f 2 has one critical point on T , namely 0. Thus y ∈ T is a critical point of f 2M if f 2j (y) = 0 for some 0 ≤ j < M . Consequently f 2M has at most 2M − 1 critical points, yi , and f 2M is differentiable on T except at each yi . For all x ∈ T , x 6= yi , 0

f 2M (x) =

M −1 Y j=0

0

f 2 (f 2j (x)) .

November 26, 2009

15:34

194


bifurcations


Let m ≥ 1 be the number of iterates, f 2j (x), that are positive. Since left (R) of zero the slope of f 2 is near 1 and right of zero the slope is near −a0 , we have (R) ¯ ¯ 1 + a0 ¯ 2M 0 ¯ (R)m >1, + O(1) > (x)¯ = a0 ¯f 2 for any x 6= yi , for sufficiently small µ, η. Consequently f 2M : T → T is piecewise expanding [Robinson (2004)]. By the theorem of Li and Yorke [Li and Yorke (1978)], f 2M is chaotic on T . Thus f is chaotic on T ∪ f (T ). ¤ Proof. [Theorem 5.3] The theorem is proved in three steps. In the first two steps a center manifold, W c , for the left half-map, f (L) , is constructed and the lowest order terms of the restriction of f (L) to W c are calculated. In the third step the 2-cycle that has points in each half-plane is computed explicitly. Step 1: Compute W c . Let  0   (L)  x f (x; µ, η)  , F =  µ0  =  (A.85) µ 0 η η denote the (N + 2)-dimensional, C k , extended map. Then ¯ ¯   ¯ ¯ ¯ ¯  AL (0, 0) ¯ b(0, 0) ¯ 0  ¯ ¯   ¯ ¯  , DF (0; 0, 0) =   ¯ ¯  0 ¯ 1 ¯ 0  ¯ ¯ ¯ 0 ¯ 1 0 has a three-dimensional center space      ϕ  v(0, 0)  E c = span  0  ,  1  , eN +2 ,   0 0 where ϕ = (I − AL (0, 0))−1 b(0, 0) .

(A.86)

Notice eT 1ϕ =

%T (0, 0)b(0, 0) 6= 0 . det(I − AL (0, 0))

(A.87)

November 26, 2009

15:34


Selected Proofs

bifurcations

195

c Since eT 1 v(0, 0) = 1 6= 0, the center manifold, W , may be expressed locally T c in terms of s = e1 x, µ and η. On E       v(0, 0) ϕ x  µ  = (s − eT    + µ 1  + ηeN +2 , 0 1 ϕµ) η 0 0

thus by the center manifold theorem, there exists a C k−1 function, H, such that on W c x = H(s; µ, η) = v(0, 0)s + ζµ + O(2)

(A.88)

ζ = ϕ − v(0, 0)eT 1ϕ .

(A.89)

where

Step 2: Determine an expression for f (L) on W c and verify conditions (i)-(iii) of Theorem 5.2. On W c (L) s0 = eT (H(s; µ, η); µ, η) 1f T T (L) = eT (H(s; µ, η); µ, η) , (A.90) 1 b(µ, η)µ + e1 AL (µ, η)H(s; µ, η) + e1 g

where g (L) denotes all terms of f (L) that are nonlinear in x. With the given “hatted” variables (A.90) satisfies condition (ii) of Theorem 5.2 because ∂s0 ¯¯ T = eT ¯ 1 b(0, 0) + e1 AL (0, 0)ζ ∂µ (0;0,0) T T T = eT 1 b(0, 0) + e1 AL (0, 0)ϕ − e1 AL (0, 0)v(0, 0)e1 ϕ (by (A.89)) T T = eT 1 ϕ + e1 v(0, 0)e1 ϕ (by (A.86))

= 2eT 1ϕ , which with µ ˆ = 2eT 1 ϕµ, in view of (A.87), produces ∂s0 ¯¯ =1. ¯ ∂µ ˆ (0;0,0) A similar verification of (i) and (iii) of Theorem 5.2 is now given. By scaling, ∂H we may assume that for small η, eT 1 v(0, η) ≡ 1. Let l(η) = ∂s (0; 0, η). By matching two different expressions for f (L) (s; 0, η) to first order in s, one may obtain A(0, η)l(η) = l(η)eT 1 A(0, η)l(η) . Since l(0) = v(0, 0), it follows l(η) ≡ v(0, η). Therefore H(s; 0, η) = v(0, η)s + O(s2 ) .

(A.91)

November 26, 2009

15:34

196


bifurcations


Consequently 2 s0 |µ=0 = eT 1 A(0, η)v(0, η)s + O(s )

= λ(0, η)s + O(s2 ) . Thus

∂s0 ¯¯ = −1 , ¯ ∂s (0;0,0) ∂ 2 s0 ¯¯ =1, ¯ ∂η∂s (0;0,0)

as required. Step 3: Compute the 2-cycle that has points in each half-plane to verify the final statement of the theorem. We have f (L) (f (R) (x; µ, η); µ, η) = (I + AL (0, η))b(0, η)µ + AL (0, η)AR (0, η)x + O(|µ, x|2 ) . By the implicit function theorem and condition (v) of the theorem, the 2-cycle with points in each half-plane exists and is unique for small µ and η. When admissible, the point of this cycle in the right half-plane is given by a C k function ¯ ¯ x∗(RL) (µ, η) = (I − AL AR )−1 (I + AL )b¯ µ + O(µ2 ) . µ=0

Then

¯ ∂s∗(RL) ¯¯ ¯ −1 = eT (I − A A ) (I + A )b . ¯ ¯ L R L 1 ∂µ µ=0 µ=0 Following the same steps as in Sec. 6.2 to obtain (6.17) (here S = RL) we arrive at ¯ det(I + AL ) T ¯¯ ∂s∗(RL) ¯¯ % b¯ = ¯ ¯ ∂µ det(I − AL AR ) µ=0 µ=0 ¯ ∂ ¯ ∂η det(I + AL ) T ¯ % b¯ η + O(η 2 ) . = ¯ det(I − AL AR ) (0,0)

k−2

By Theorem 5.2, there exists a C curve, η = h2 (ˆ µ), along which, s∗(RL) = 0. Furthermore, when µ ˆ ≤ 0, the 2-cycle is admissible along this curve. If η˜ = η − h2 (ˆ µ), then ¯ ∂ det(I + AL ) ¯¯ det(I − AL ) ∂η ∗(RL) s (ˆ µ, η˜) = µ ˆη˜ + O(3) , (A.92) ¯ ¯ 2 det(I − AL AR ) (0,0)

which confirms the final statement of the theorem.

¤

November 26, 2009

15:34


Selected Proofs

bifurcations

197

Proof. [Lemma 6.9] Since the definitions of non-terminating and terminating shrinking points vary drastically, it is necessary to treat the two classes of shrinking points separately. For non-terminating shrinking points. (a) First, PSˇ = PS is singular by assumption, thus by Corollary 6.1, t = 0. Second, by (6.29), PSˇ(ld) is singular thus by Corollary 6.1, tld = 0. (b) Suppose for a contradiction, td = 0. Since also tld = 0 from (a), by a double application of Lemma 6.5, p solves the n-cycle solution system of Sˇd ld . From the definition, (6.18), it is seen that Sˇd ld = Sˇ(−d) . Therefore, pd solves the n-cycle solution system of ˇ hence p = pd . The point p is admissible by assumption, thereS, fore p = pkd for any integer k. Putting k = m we obtain p = p1 , hence p is a fixed point of (1.19) and lies on the switching manifold. However (1.19) cannot have a fixed point on the switching manifold because by assumption µ 6= 0 and %T b 6= 0, so we have a contradiction. Thus td 6= 0. The remaining three points may be proved nonzero in a similar fashion. The given signs follow immediately from admissibility. (c) Suppose for a contradiction, {pi } is of period n ˜ < n. Clearly n ˜ divides n. Then piñ+k = pk for any integers i and k. But from part (b), pd = piñ+d lies left of the switching manifold. Thus Sˇiñ+d = L for i = 0, . . . , nn˜ −1, since the orbit is admissible. But gcd(d, n ˜ ) = 1, hence in view of (6.18), we must have l ≥ 2+( nn˜ −1)˜ n = n− n ˜ +2 ≥ n n−d lies right of the 2 + 2. Similarly, also from part (b), p−d = pi˜ switching manifold and hence Sˇiñ−d = R for i = 0, . . . , nn˜ − 1. Here it follows l < n ˜ ≤ n2 which provides a contradiction. (d) From part (a), t = 0, thus by Lemma 6.5, p solves the n-cycle solution system of Sˇ0 = S. Similarly, since tld = 0, p solves the n-cycle solution system of Sˇld = S (−d) by (6.18) and therefore pd solves the n-cycle solution system of S. Let w(τ ) = τ p + (1 − τ )pd . Since {pi } is assumed to be admissible, {wi (τ )} is an admissible S-cycle for all τ ∈ [0, 1). From part (c), the n points {pi } are distinct. We now show that the union of all the {wi (τ )}, call it P, has no self-intersections. Suppose for a contradiction that wi1 (τ1 ) = wi2 (τ2 ) for some i1 6= i2 and 0 < τ1 , τ2 < 1. Let x = w0 (τ1 ), then {xi } is an admissible S-cycle and an admissible S (i2 −i1 ) -cycle. Since τ1 6= 0, 1, by part

November 26, 2009

198

15:34



(b), s0 < 0 and s−d > 0. Therefore Si2 −i1 = L and Si2 −i1 −d = R. By Lemma 6.8b, i2 − i1 = 0, which is a contradiction. Hence P has no self-intersections and is therefore an invariant, nonplanar n-gon. To relate (1.19) to a map on the unit circle we describe a bijection between S1 and P. The angular coordinate, θ ∈ [0, 2π), uniquely nθ describes a point on S1 . Let j(θ) = b nθ 2π c and τ (θ) = 2π − j(θ). 1 Let z : S → P be defined by z(θ) = wj(θ)d (τ (θ)). It is easily verified the function z is a bijection. The induced map on S1 is g(θ) = (z −1 ◦ f ◦ z)(θ) = θ + 2πm n , i.e. rigid rotation with rotation number m/n. For terminating shrinking points. Let v = y + iz be an eigenvector corresponding to the multiplier λ = ¸ · 2πm 2πm ) ) cos( sin( 2πim n n . Then Dj = e± n for the matrix AL . Let D = ) cos( 2πm ) − sin( 2πm n n · 2πjm ¸ cos( 2πjm n ) sin( n ) and AjL [y z] = [y z]Dj . Notice also Dn = I. 2πjm ) ) − sin( 2πjm cos( n n The first component of v must be nonzero because otherwise AR [y z] = [y z]D and hence MSˇ[y z] = [y z]Dn = [y z], violating the assumption that (I − MSˇ) is nonsingular. Thus Ec intersects the switching manifold. Furthermore, Ec is two-dimensional, because otherwise there exists another 2πim eigenvector for λ = e± n , call it vˆ, linearly independent to v, and the ˆ −ˆ v eT linear combination, veT 1 v, is an eigenvector with zero first component 1v contradicting the previous argument. Let x = x0 = αy + βz + x∗(L) for some as yet undetermined scalars α and β. Let xi denote the ith iterate of x via the symbol sequence Sˆ = Ln . Then xi = [y z]Di [α β]T + x∗(L) and hence {xi } is an n-cycle. We T ∗(L) wish to choose α and β such that s0 = eT = 0 1 [y z][α β] + s T −d T ∗(L) = 0. Combining these two equaand s−d = e1 [y z]D [α β] + s T T tions yields the linear system, X[α β] = −s∗(L) [1 ¸ 1] where X = · T T e1 y e1 z has determinant, 2π 2π 2π 2π T T T ) ) −e y sin( eT y cos( + e z sin( 1 n n ) + e1 z cos( n ) ¡ 1T 2 n T 21¢ det(X) = − (e1 y) + (e1 z) sin( 2π Thus we let [α β]T = n ) 6= 0. ∗(L) −1 T −s X [1 1] . It follows that ! Ã 2π(i+ 1 ) cos( n 2 ) ∗(L) . (A.93) sid = s 1− cos( nπ ) Thus the n-cycle, {xi }, is admissible and solves the n-cycle solution ˇ Therefore x = p. Thus {pi } has period n which verifies part system of S.

bifurcations

November 26, 2009

15:34


Selected Proofs

bifurcations

199

(c) of the lemma. Also ti = si , for each i, thus by (A.93) we have parts (a) and (b). To verify part (d), note that as in the non-terminating case, p and pd are admissible solutions to the n-cycle solution system of S. Thus w(τ ) = τ p + (1 − τ )pd is an admissible solution to the n-cycle solution system of S for all τ ∈ [0, 1). The union of all such cycles is an invariant, P, which lies on Ec , so is planar. The points, pi , lie on an ellipse and are ordered so that P has no self-intersections and is an n-gon. As before, a bijection between S1 and P may be constructed to show that the restriction of (6.2) to P is homeomorphic to rigid rotation with rotation number m/n. ¤ Proof.

[Theorem 6.1] Write det(I − MSˇ(η, ν)) = k3 + O(1) ,

(A.94)

det(I − MSˆ(η, ν)) = k4 + O(1) ,

(A.95)

where k3 , k4 6= 0 by assumption. We have x(η, ν) = µ(I − MS (η, ν))−1 PS (η, ν)b ,

(A.96)

whenever ν 6= h(η), (6.33). For small ν = 6 0, if η = 0 then x is defined and coincides with x ˇ because det(PS ) = 0. Therefore xid (0, ν) = x ˇid (0, ν), for all i. In particular, sid (0, ν) = tid + O(ν) ,

(A.97)

so that by (6.30) and (6.31) s(0, ν) = 0 , sld (0, ν) = ν + O(ν 2 ) .

(A.98)

Similarly for small η 6= 0, if ν = 0 then x is defined and det(PS ((l−1)d) ) = 0, thus x solves the n-cycle solution system of S (l−1)d = Sˇ(d) . Therefore xid (η, 0) = x ˇ(i+1)d (η, 0), for all i. In particular, sid (η, 0) = t(i+1)d + O(η) ,

(A.99)

so that s−d (η, 0) = η + O(η 2 ) , s(l−1)d (η, 0) = 0 . The lowest order terms in the Taylor series of sˆld (η, ν) are now computed. An application of Lemma 6.6 to the symbol sequence S (ld) , using also Lemma 6.7, produces det(I − MS (η, ν))sld (η, ν) = det(I − MSˆ(η, ν))ˆ sld (η, ν) .

November 26, 2009

200

15:34


bifurcations


Using (6.32), (A.95), (A.98) and (A.99) we obtain k2 2 ν + O(ν 3 ) , sˆld (0, ν) = k4 k1 t(l+1)d η + O(η 2 ) . sˆld (η, 0) = k4

(A.100)

By the implicit function theorem, there exists a unique C k function g1 : R → R such that for small ν, sˆld (g1 (ν), ν) = 0 and k2 ν 2 + O(ν 3 ) . (A.101) g1 (ν) = − k1 t(l+1)d In a similar fashion, by applying Lemma 6.6 to the symbol sequence S (−d) ˆ we obtain and noting S (−d)0 = S, k2 t−d ν + O(ν 2 ) , (A.102) sˆ(0, ν) = k4 k1 2 η + O(η 3 ) , sˆ(η, 0) = k4 so that the implicit function theorem gives the function k1 2 η + O(η 3 ) . (A.103) g2 (η) = − k2 t−d The inequality, k1 k2 > 0, is now demonstrated. Let Σi ⊂ R2 denote the intersection of the interior of the ith quadrant with a sufficiently small neighborhood of the origin (i = 1, . . . , 4). Suppose for a contradiction, k1 k2 < 0. Then, by (6.32), (I − MS ) is nonsingular throughout Σ2 and hence s is continuous throughout Σ2 . Notice s = 0 only when η = 0, thus the sign of s is constant in Σ2 . When ν = 0, by admissibility and using (A.99) we have s(η, 0) = td + O(1) < 0, thus s is negative throughout Σ2 . In particular, s is negative when ν = kk12η for small η < 0. By applying Lemma 6.6 to S, we obtain det(I − MS (η, ν))s(η, ν) = det(I − MSˇ(η, ν))ˇ s(η, ν) . Substituting ν =

k1 η k2

(A.104)

and using (6.30), (6.32) and (A.94) gives k1 η ) = (k3 + O(η))(η + O(η 2 )) , k2 k1 η ) = k3 + O(η) , 2k1 s(η, k2 ⇒ k1 k3 < 0 .

(2k1 η + O(η 2 ))s(η, ⇒

(A.105)

Via a similar argument with s(l−1)d , we find k2 k3 < 0. This inequality provides a contradiction with (A.105), thus k1 k2 > 0. Hence s and s(l−1)d

November 26, 2009

15:34


Selected Proofs

bifurcations

201

are in fact continuous and negative throughout Σ1 and Σ3 , thus k1 k3 < 0. Via similar arguments we find k1 k4 > 0. Consequently we have sgn(k1 ) = sgn(k2 ) = −sgn(k3 ) = sgn(k4 ) .

(A.106)

Furthermore, from (A.101) and (A.103) we have g100 (0), g200 (0) < 0 ,

(A.107)

since t(l+1)d , t−d > 0. ˇ Near (η, ν) = (0, 0), since {pi } is admissible, S-cycles are admissible if and only if sˇ, sˇld ≥ 0, thus only in Ψ1 by (6.30) and (6.31). Similarly k t ∂ sˆ ˆ S-cycles are admissible only if sˆ, sˆld ≤ 0. By (A.102), ∂ν (0, 0) = 2k4−d is positive by (A.106) and admissibility. Thus sˆ(η, ν) ≤ 0 when ν ≤ h2 (η). ˆ Similarly, by (A.100), sˆld (η, ν) ≤ 0 when η ≤ h1 (ν). Therefore S-cycles are admissible in Ψ2 . The result for S-cycles follows by looking at the signs of each si on the boundaries of Ψ1 and Ψ2 . ¤ Proof. [Lemma 7.1] The lemma is proved in five steps. In Step 1 it is shown that 0 < ∆φ(z; µ) < π. Consequently 0 ≤ ρ(z; µ) ≤ 21 and it remains to show that these inequalities may be replaced by strict inequalities. Let µ· ¸ ¶ cos(θ) a0 (θ) = ∆φ ;0 . (A.108) sin(θ) < π such that for > 0 and amax In Step 2 it is shown that there exists amin 0 0 max min any θ, a0 ≤ a0 (θ) ≤ a0 . Step 3 looks at the case that z is very near z ∗ . Step ≤ ∆φ(z; µ) ≤ amax and shows that here amin 0 0 µ· 4 looks at¸ the¶case that R cos(θ) |z| is very large and shows that for fixed µ, ∆φ ; µ → a0 (θ) R sin(θ) as R → ∞. Step 5 shows that the remaining intermediate values of z lie in a compact set within which ∆φ is continuous. Consequently ∆φ has an > 0, and an absolute maximum, bmax < π, and absolute minimum, bmin 0 0 the result follows. Step 1: Show 0 < ∆φ(z; µ) < π. Let (u, v)T = z − z ∗ , 0

0 T

(A.109) ∗

(u , v ) = f (z) − z . Via simple geometry it may be shown that sin(∆φ(z; µ)) = √

u0 v − uv 0 √ . u2 + v 2 u02 + v 02

(A.110)

November 26, 2009

202

15:34


bifurcations


In this step it remains to show that u0 v − uv 0 is positive, for then sin(∆φ(z; µ)) will be positive and therefore 0 < ∆φ(z; µ) < π. For ease of notation let αi = 2 cos(2πωi ), for i = L, R, let ζL = 1 − 2 αL rL + rL and ζR = 1 − αR sR + s2R . By assumption, −2 < αi < 2 and ζi > 0 for each i = L, R. Suppose x ≤ 0 and µ ≤ 0. Then u0 v − uv 0 = (µ + αL rL x + y −

µ ζL )(y

+

2 µrL ζL )

− (x −

µ 2 ζL )(−rL x

+

2 µrL ζL )

.

Upon expansion, 2 2 3 2 4 2 2 2 ζL (u0 v − uv 0 ) = rL x − αL rL x + rL x + y 2 − αL rL y 2 + rL y + αL rL xy 3 2 2 2 2 3 x − 2µrL x + 2µrL y rL xy + αL rL xy + µαL rL − αL 2 − µαL rL y + µ2 rL ¡α ¢2 2 x − y) + rL (−x + y + µ) = 2L (rL 2 2 )(rL x + y)2 . + (1 − 41 αL

(A.111)

The right-hand side of (A.111) is positive, hence in this case u0 v − uv 0 > 0. Now suppose x ≤ 0 and µ > 0. Here u0 v −uv 0 = (µ+αL rL x+y −

µs2R µs2R µ µ 2 ζR )(y + ζR )−(x− ζR )(−rL x+ ζR )

. (A.112)

Upon expansion, 2 2 2 2 2 2 ζR (u0 v − uv 0 ) = rL x − αR rL sR x2 + rL sR x + y 2 − αR sR y 2 + s2R y 2

+ αL rL xy − αL αR rL sR xy + αL rL s2R xy + µαL rL x − µx 2 2 − µrL sR x + 2µy − µαR sR y + µ2 ¢2 ¡ 1 = ( 2 αL − sR (1 + 21 αL − 21 αR ))rL x + (1 − 21 αR sR )y + µ 2 2 2 2 )(1 − sR )2 rL x + (1 − 41 αR )s2R (rL x − y)2 + (1 − 41 αL 2 2 x + 2(1 + 21 αL )(1 − 21 αR )sR (1 − sR )rL

+ 2(1 + 21 αL )(1 − 21 αR )sR (1 + sR )rL xy − (1 − rL sR )2 µx − (αR − αL )rL sR µx .

(A.113)

If αL ≤ αR and y ≤ 0, then the right-hand side of (A.113) is positive (it is nonzero because x, y and µ cannot all be zero), thus u0 v − uv 0 > 0. For other signs of (αL − αR ) and y, u0 v − uv 0 may be shown positive via alternate expressions like (A.113). Lastly if x > 0, the result follows by use of (7.4). Step 2: Show amin ≤ a0 (θ) ≤ amax . 0 0 By the previous step, 0 < a0 (θ) < π, for any θ. Since a0 is continuous and defined on a compact set, it has a minimum value amin > 0 and a maximum 0 max value a0 < π.

November 26, 2009

15:34


bifurcations

Selected Proofs

203

Step 3: Consider z near z ∗ . Let

( rµ =

1,

|x∗ | 2 ,

µ=0 , µ 6= 0

(A.114)

Suppose |z −z ∗ | < rµ and z 6= z ∗ . Write z = (r cos(θ), r sin(θ))T . It is easily shown that ∆φ(z; 0) = a0 (θ). If µ 6= 0, then z lies in the same half-plane as z ∗ . It follows that ∆φ(z; µ) is equal to either a0 (θ) or a0 ((θ + π) mod 2π). Thus for any value of µ, amin ≤ ∆φ(z; µ) ≤ amax . 0 0 Step 4: Consider large z. Via simple geometry, with the coordinates (A.109) and (A.110), ¶ µ uu0 + vv 0 −1 √ √ ≡ a∗ (u, v, u0 , v 0 ) ∆φ(z; µ) = cos u2 + v 2 u02 + v 02 If cos(θ) ≤ 0, then µ· ¸ ¶ R cos(θ) ∆φ ; µ = a∗ (R cos (θ) − x∗ , R sin (θ) − y ∗ , µ + αL rL R cos (θ) R sin(θ) 2 R cos (θ) − y ∗ ) + R sin (θ) − x∗ , −rL

= a∗ (cos (θ) − + sin (θ) −

y∗ µ x∗ R , sin (θ) − R , R + y∗ 2 x∗ R , −rL cos (θ) − R )

αL rL cos (θ)

→ a∗ (cos (θ), sin (θ), αL rL cos (θ) + sin(θ), 2 −rL cos (θ))

as R → ∞ = a0 (θ) If cos(θ) > 0, the result follows similarly. and complete the result. ≤ ∆φ(z; µ) ≤ bmax Step 5: Show bmin 0 0 From the previous step, ∆φ((R cos(θ), R sin(θ))T ; µ) → a0 (θ) pointwise in θ. Since the values, θ, are taken from a compact set, S1 , and a0 is continuous, the convergence is also uniform (see for instance [White (1968)]). Thus there exists M0 ∈ R such that for all z = (R cos(θ), R sin(θ))T with R ≥ M0 , amin 0 2

amax +π

≤ ∆φ(z; µ) ≤ 0 2 . From Step 3, for any z 6= z ∗ with |z − z ∗ | ≤ rµ (A.114), we have amin ≤ ∆φ(z; µ) ≤ amax . The remaining points, z, may be 0 0 bounded by a compact set, Ω, that does not include z ∗ . Hence ∆φ(z; µ) is continuous in Ω, thus ∆φ has minimum and maximum values on Ω. Thus 0 < bmin ≤ ∆φ(z; µ) ≤ bmax < π for some bmin and bmax and therefore 0 0 0 0 0 < ρ(z; µ) < π. ¤

November 26, 2009

15:34



bifurcations

November 26, 2009

15:34


bifurcations

Appendix B

Additional Figures

6

3 2

3 1

y

y

0

0

−1 −3

−2 −3

−6

−4

−2

0

2

4

−2

−1

0

x

x

(a)

(b)

1

2

Fig. B.1: Phase portraits of (2.1) when µ = 0 with (τL , τR , δL , δR ) = (0.4, −2, 1, −0.5) in panel (a) and (τL , τR , δL , δR ) = (2, −2, 0.6, 0.8) in panel (b). Phase portraits with the same parameter values except µ 6= 0 are shown in Figs. 2.9 and 2.10.

205

November 26, 2009

15:34


206


6

X

bifurcations

0.18

e

5.5

0.16

1 0.14

5 0

10

20

30

40

0.12 0

50

C

10

20

30

40

50

10

20

30

40

50

10

20

30

40

50

0.4

0.6 0.4

e

2 0.2

0.2 0 0

10

20

30

40

0 0

50

time preferred metabolic pathway fermentation ethanol oxidation glucose oxidation

0.4

e3

0.2

0 0

time

Fig. B.2: Time series of (4.1)-(4.8) showing the variables that were not included in Fig. 4.9. Here D = 0.1 and kL a = 150.

November 26, 2009

15:34


bifurcations

Additional Figures

1.5

O

207

0.06

1

r1

0.04

0.5 0 0

3

6

0.02 0

9

0.03

G

3

6

9

3

6

9

3

6

9

3

6

9

3

6

9

6

9

0.1

0.02

r2

0.05

0.01 0 0

3

6

0 0

9

0.06

E

0.1

0.04

r3

0.05

0.02 0 0

3

6

0 0

9

5

X

0.16

e

4.95

4.9 0

1 0.15

3

6

0.14 0

9

0.3

0.08

C

e2

0.04

0 0

3

6

0.1 0

9

time preferred metabolic pathway fermentation ethanol oxidation glucose oxidation

0.2

0.3

e3

0.2

0.1 0

3

time

Fig. B.3: Time series of (4.1)-(4.8) when D = 0.12 and kL a = 150. Note that fermentation is not a preferred pathway at any time during the oscillations.

November 26, 2009

15:34

208


bifurcations


1

(a)

0.8

r

L

0.6 0.4 0.2 0 0

0.1

0.2

0.3

0.4

0.5

0.3

0.4

0.5

ω

R

0.5

(b)

0.4

ω

0.3

L

0.2 0.1 0 0

0.1

0.2

ω

R

Fig. B.4: (continued on the next page) Resonance tongues of (7.5) when µ = 1. In each panel two parameters are varied and two parameters are fixed at the following values: (rL , sR , ωL , ωR ) = (0.3, 0.8, 0.09, 0.12). There are six possible pairs of parameters to choose on the axes; this figure shows five, the sixth is shown in Fig. 7.6(a).

November 26, 2009

15:34


bifurcations

Additional Figures

209

1

0.8

(c)

0.6

r

L 0.4

0.2

0 0

0.1

0.2

0.3

0.4

0.5

0.3

0.4

0.5

0.6

0.8

1

ωL 1

0.8

(d) s

0.6

R 0.4

0.2

0 0

0.1

0.2

ωL 1

0.8

(e) sR 0.6 0.4

0.2

0 0

0.2

0.4

r

L

Fig. B.4 (continued )

November 26, 2009

15:34


210

bifurcations


1

(a)

0.9

sR

0.8

0.7

0.6 0.26

0.27

0.28

0.29

0.28

0.29

0.28

0.29

ωR 1

(b)

0.9

sR

0.8

0.7

0.6 0.26

0.27

ωR 1

(c)

0.9

sR

0.8

0.7

0.6 0.26

0.27

ωR Fig. B.5: Panel (a) is a magnified view of Fig. 7.7(a). Panel (b) shows resonance tongues computed over the same parameter range when the nonT linear term [0, − xy 10 ] is added to the left half-map of (7.5). By adding nonlinearity shrinking points appear to break apart on one side. Panel (c) shows resonance tongues for a smooth approximation to (7.5) constructed by replacing |x1 | in the alternate form (1.15) with x1 tanh(Kx1 ), where K = 2. Here resonance tongues are extremely skinny near sR = 1.

November 26, 2009

15:34


Appendix C

Adjugate Matrices

The purpose of this appendix is to provide the reader with the necessary background knowledge of adjugate matrices to follow the linear algebra manipulations in this book. Adjugate matrices play a crucial role in the bifurcation theory of piecewise-smooth, continuous systems, see for instance Sec. 1.3. However in most standard linear algebra textbooks they are given only as a passing mention in order to provide a formula for the inverse of a matrix. Some discussion of adjugate matrices is given in [Berberian (1992); Kolman (1996)]. Note that the adjugate is sometimes instead called the “adjunct” or the “classical adjoint”. Definition C.1. Let A be an N × N matrix. Let mij be the determinant of the (N − 1) × (N − 1) matrix formed by removing the ith row and j th column from A. Each mij is called a minor of A. The cofactor matrix of A is the N × N matrix C, whose elements are cij = (−1)i+j mij . Each cij is called a cofactor of A. The adjugate of A, denoted adj(A), is the transpose of C. From the definition it is easy to see that adj(I) = I and adj(AT ) = adj(A)T . Also, if the rank of A is less than N − 1, then every minor, mij , is zero and consequently the adjugate of A is the zero matrix. As every undergraduate mathematics student should know, if aij dePN notes the (i, j)-element of A, then the sum, i=1 aij cij , is independent of PN j and equal to j=1 aij cij for any i, and that this constant is the determinant of A. Now consider the matrix Aˆ formed by replacing the j th column of a matrix A with the k th column of A, where j 6= k. Then Aˆ has two ˆ = 0. But det(A) ˆ = PN aik cij . Therefore identical columns, thus det(A) i=1 PN PN i=1 aik cij = 0 for any j 6= k. Similarly j=1 akj cij = 0 for any i 6= k. 211

bifurcations

November 26, 2009

212

15:34


bifurcations


The above arguments amount to the following fundamental identity: adj(A)A = A adj(A) = det(A)I .

(C.1)

adj(A) . Also (C.1) implies Consequently if A is nonsingular then A−1 = det(A) det(adj(A)) = det(A)N −1 , hence adj(A) is nonsingular if and only if A is nonsingular. The following identity is used in Chapter 6:

adj(AB) = adj(B)adj(A) .

(C.2) −1

If A and B are both nonsingular, then (C.2) follows from (AB) = −1 −1 B A . Since nonsingular matrices are dense in the set of all matrices and the adjugate of a matrix is a continuous function of the elements of that matrix, (C.2) holds in general. The last result discussed here is arguably the most useful in regards to piecewise-smooth bifurcation theory. For example it is essential in the derivation of Feigin’s results [di Bernardo et al. (1999)]. It is also elementary. For any ξ ∈ RN , the matrix B = A + ξeT 1 differs from A in only the first column. Therefore the first columns of the cofactor matrices of A and B are identical. Equivalently the first rows of adj(A) and adj(B) are the same, i.e. T T eT 1 adj(A + ξe1 ) = e1 adj(A) .

(C.3)

November 26, 2009

15:34


Appendix D

Parameter Values for the Saccharomyces cerevisiae model

Table D.1: Parameter values of the model of Jones & Kompala [Jones and Kompala (1999)] used for all numerical investigations in this book. G0 Y1 Y2 Y3 φ1 φ2 φ3 φ4 O∗ α α∗ β

10 gL−1 0.16 gg−1 0.75 gg−1 0.60 gg−1 0.403 2000 mgg−1 1000 mgg−1 0.95 7.5 mgL−1 0.3 gg−1 h−1 0.1 gg−1 h−1 0.7 h−1

K1 K2 K3 KO2 KO3 γ1 γ2 γ3 µ1,max µ2,max µ3,max

213

0.05 gL−1 0.01 gL−1 0.001 gL−1 0.01 mgL−1 2.2 mgL−1 10 10 0.8 gg−1 0.44 h−1 0.19 h−1 0.36 h−1

bifurcations

November 26, 2009

15:34



bifurcations

November 26, 2009

15:34


Bibliography

Abadie, M. (2000). Dynamical simulation of rigid bodies: Modelling of frictional contact. in B. Brogliato (ed.), Impacts in Mechanical Systems: Analysis and Modelling. (Springer-Verlag, New York). [7] Agliari, A., Bischi, G., Dieci, R. and Gardini, L. (2005). Global bifurcations of closed invariant curves in two-dimensional maps: A computer assisted study. Int. J. Bifurcation Chaos 15, 4, pp. 1285–1328. [151] Aizerman, M. and Gantmakher, F. (1958). On the stability of periodic motions. J. Appl. Math. Mech. 22, 6, pp. 750–758. [25] Alur, R., Belta, C., Ivanˇcić, F., Kumar, V., Mintz, M., Pappas, G., Rubin, H. and Schug, J. (2001). Hybrid modeling and simulation of biomolecular networks. in M. Di Benedetto and A. Sangiovanni-Vincentelli (eds.), Hybrid Systems: Computation and Control., Lecture Notes in Computer Science., Vol. 2034 (Springer-Verlag, New York), pp. 19–32. [7] Andrecut, M. and Ali, M. (2001). Robust chaos in smooth unimodal maps. Phys. Rev. E 64, 2, p. 025203. [23] Angulo, F., di Bernardo, M., Hogan, S., Kowalczyk, P. and Olivar, G. (2005). Two-parameter non-smooth bifurcations in power converters. IEEE Int. Symp. Circ. Syst. , pp. 1485–1488 Kobe, Japan, 23-26 May. [99] Angulo, F., Olivar, G. and di Bernardo, M. (2008). Two-parameter discontinuity-induced bifurcation curves in a ZAD-strategy-controlled DC-DC buck converter. IEEE Trans. Circuits Systems I Fund. Theory Appl. 55, 8, pp. 2392–2401. [99] Aoi, S. and Tsuchiya, K. (2006). Bifurcation and chaos of a simple walking model driven by a rhythmic signal. Int. J. Non-Linear Mech. 41, pp. 438–446. [5] Arnold, V. (1988). Geometrical Methods in the Theory of Ordinary Differ215

bifurcations

November 26, 2009

216

15:34



ential Equations. (Springer-Verlag, New York). [14, 139] Aronson, D., Chory, M., Hall, G. and McGehee, R. (1982). Bifurcations from an invariant circle for two-parameter families of maps of the plane: A computer-assisted study. Comm. Math. Phys. 83, pp. 303–354. [151, 157] Avrutin, V., Eckstein, B. and Schanz, M. (2008). The bandcount increment scenario. I. Basic structures. Proc. R. Soc. A 464, pp. 1867–1883. [152] Avrutin, V. and Schanz, M. (2005a). On special types of two- and threeparametric bifurcations in piecewise-smooth dynamical systems. WSEAS Trans. Math. 4, 3, pp. 224–230. [95] Avrutin, V. and Schanz, M. (2005b). Period-doubling scenario without flip bifurcations in a one-dimensional map. Int. J. Bifurcation Chaos 15, 4, pp. 1267–1284. [122] Avrutin, V. and Schanz, M. (2008). On the fully developed bandcount adding scenario. Nonlinearity 21, pp. 1077–1103. [111, 152] Avrutin, V., Schanz, M. and Banerjee, S. (2006). Multi-parametric bifurcations in a piecewise-linear discontinuous map. Nonlinearity 19, pp. 1875–1906. [95] Avrutin, V., Schanz, M. and Banerjee, S. (2007). Codimension-three bifurcations: Explanation of the complex one-, two-, and three-dimensional bifurcation structures in nonsmooth maps. Phys. Rev. E. 75, p. 066205. [vi, 27, 31, 95] Awrejcewicz, J., Kudra, G. and Lamarque, C. (2004). Investigation of triple pendulum with impacts using fundamental solution matrices. Int. J. Bifurcation Chaos 14, 12, pp. 4191–4213. [5] Awrejcewicz, J. and Lamarque, C. (2003). Bifurcation and Chaos in Nonsmooth Mechanical Systems. (World Scientific, Singapore). [4, 7] Aziz-Alaoui, M., Robert, C. and Grebogi, C. (2001). Dynamics of a HénonLozi-type map. Chaos Solitons Fractals 12, pp. 2323–2341. [31] Bailey, J. and Ollis, D. (1986). Biochemical Engineering Fundamentals. (McGraw-Hill, New York). [75] Banerjee, S. and Grebogi, C. (1999). Border collision bifurcations in twodimensional piecewise smooth maps. Phys. Rev. E 59, 4, pp. 4052–4061. [23] Banerjee, S., Karthik, M., Yuan, G. and Yorke, J. (2000a). Bifurcations in one-dimensional piecewise smooth maps - Theory and applications in switching circuits. IEEE Trans. Circuits Systems I Fund. Theory Appl. 47, 3, pp. 389–394. [22] Banerjee, S., Ranjan, P. and Grebogi, C. (2000b). Bifurcations in two-

bifurcations

November 26, 2009

15:34


Bibliography

bifurcations

217

dimensional piecewise smooth maps - Theory and applications in switching circuits. IEEE Trans. Circuits Systems I Fund. Theory Appl. 47, 5, pp. 633–643. [23] Banerjee, S. and Verghese, G. (eds.) (2001). Nonlinear Phenomena in Power Electronics. (IEEE Press, New York). [1, 4, 222] Banerjee, S., Yorke, J. and Grebogi, C. (1998). Robust chaos. Phys. Rev. Lett. 80, 14, pp. 3049–3052. [23] Barnett, S. (1975). Introduction to Mathematical Control Theory. (Clarendon Press, Oxford). [16] Barton, D., Krauskopf, B. and Wilson, R. (2006). Periodic solutions and their bifurcations in a non-smooth second-order delay differential equation. Dyn. Syst. 21, 3, pp. 289–311. [2] Batako, A., Lalor, M. and Piiroinen, P. (2007). Numerical bifurcation analysis of a friction-driven vibro-impact system. J. Sound Vib. 308, pp. 392–404. [7, 86] Belghith, S. (2000). Symbolic dynamics in nondifferentiable system originating in R-L-diode driven circuit. Disc. Cont. Dyn. Sys. 6, 2, pp. 275– 292. [23, 111] Bemporad, A., Ferrari-Trecate, G. and Morari, M. (2000). Observability and controllability of piecewise affine and hybrid systems. IEEE Trans. Automat. Contr. 45, 10, pp. 1864–1876. [14] Bemporad, A. and Morari, M. (1999). Control of systems integrating logic, dynamics, and constraints. Automatica 35, pp. 407–427. [2] Benadero, L., El Aroundi, A., Olivar, G., Toribio, E. and Gómez, E. (2003). Two-dimensional bifurcation diagrams. Background pattern of fundamental DC-DC converters with PWM control. Int. J. Bifurcation Chaos 13, 2, pp. 427–451. [4] Berberian, S. (1992). Linear Algebra. (Oxford University Press, New York). [211] Bergami, M., Bizzarri, F., Carlevaro, A. and Storace, M. (2006). Structurally stable PWL approximation of nonlinear dynamical systems admitting limit cycles: An example. IEICE Trans. Fund. E89-A, 10, pp. 2759–2766. [vi] Blazejczyk-Okolewska, B., Czolczynski, K., Kapitaniak, T. and Wojewoda, J. (1999). Chaotic Mechanics in Systems with Impacts and Friction (World Scientic, Singapore). [1, 4] Bonatto, C. and Gallas, J. (2008). Periodicity hub and nested spirals in the phase diagram of a simple resistive circuit. Phys. Rev. Lett. 101, 5, p. 054101. [23]

November 26, 2009

218

15:34



Boyland, P. (1986). Bifurcations of circle maps: Arnol’d tongues, bistability and rotation intervals. Comm. Math. Phys. 106, 3, pp. 353–381. [118] Branicky, M. (1998). Multiple Lyapunov functions and other analysis tools for switched and hybrid systems. IEEE Trans. Automat. Contr. 43, 4, pp. 475–482. [11] Breban, R., Vardavas, R. and Blower, S. (2007). Mean-field analysis of an inductive reasoning game: Application to influenza. Phys. Rev. E 76, p. 031127. [8] Brogliato, B. (1999). Nonsmooth Mechanics: Models, Dynamics and Control. (Springer-Verlag, New York). [1, 4] Budd, C. and Piiroinen, P. (2006). Corner bifurcations in non-smoothly forced impact oscillators. Phys. D 220, pp. 127–145. [29] Buzzi, C., da Silva, P. and Teixeira, M. (2006). A singular approach to discontinuous vector fields on the plane. J. Differential Equations 231, pp. 633–655. [3] Caballé, J., Jarque, X. and Michetti, E. (2006). Chaotic dynamics in credit constrained emerging economies. J. Econ. Dyn. Control 30, pp. 1261– 1275. [7] Carmona, V., Freire, E., Ponce, E., Ros, J. and Torres, F. (2005a). Limit cycle bifurcation in 3d continuous piecewise linear systems with two zones. Application to Chua’s circuit. Int. J. Bifurcation Chaos 15, 10, pp. 3153– 3164. [4] Carmona, V., Freire, E., Ponce, E. and Torres, F. (2002). On simplifying and classifying piecewise-linear systems. IEEE Trans. Circuits Systems I Fund. Theory Appl. 49, 5, pp. 609–620. [4, 10, 14, 15] Carmona, V., Freire, E., Ponce, E. and Torres, F. (2005b). Bifurcation of invariant cones in piecewise linear homogeneous systems. Int. J. Bifurcation Chaos 15, 8, pp. 2469–2484. [2, 11, 46] Carmona, V., Freire, E., Ponce, E. and Torres, F. (2006). The continuous matching of two stable linear systems can be unstable, Disc. Cont. Dyn. Sys. 16, 3, pp. 689–703. [11] Casey, R., de Jong, H. and Gouzé, J. (2006). Piecewise-linear models of genetic regulatory networks: Equilibria and their stability. J. Math. Biol. 52, pp. 27–56. [7, 11] Casini, P., Giannini, O. and Vestroni, F. (2006). Experimental evidence of non-standard bifurcations in non-smooth oscillator dynamics. Nonlinear Dyn. 46, 3, pp. 259–272. [27] Chang, H. and Juang, J. (2004). Piecewise two-dimensional maps and applications to cellular neural networks. Int. J. Bifurcation Chaos 14, 7,

bifurcations

November 26, 2009

15:34


Bibliography

bifurcations

219

pp. 2223–2228. [111] Charalambides, C. (2002). Enumerative Combinatorics. (Chapman & Hall/CRC, Boca Raton, FL). [125] Chin, W., Ott, E., Nusse, H. and Grebogi, C. (1994). Grazing bifurcations in impact oscillators, Phys. Rev. E 50, 6, pp. 4427–4450. [29] Chua, L. (1994). Chua’s circuit 10 years later. Internat. J. Circuit Theory Appl. 22, 4, pp. 279–305. [4] Chua, L. and Deng, A. (1988). Canonical piecewise-linear representation. IEEE Trans. Circuits Systems 35, 1, pp. 101–111. [10, 31] Chua, L. and Lin, G. (1990). Canonical realization of Chua’s circuit family. IEEE Trans. Circuits Systems 37, 7, pp. 885–902. [4] Chua, L. and Lin, G. (1991). Intermittency in a piecewise-linear circuit. IEEE Trans. Circuits Systems 38, 5, pp. 510–520. [4] Colombo, A. and Dercole, F. (unpublished). Discontinuity induced bifurcations of non-hyperbolic cycles in nonsmooth systems. Submitted to: SIAM J. Appl. Dyn. Sys. [96] Cone, K. and Zadoks, R. (1995). A numerical study of an impact oscillator with the addition of dry friction. J. Sound Vib. 188, 5, pp. 659–683. [7] Coombes, S. and Osbaldestin, A. (2000). Period-adding bifurcations and chaos in a periodically stimulated excitable neural relaxation oscillator. Phys. Rev. E 62, 3, pp. 4057–4066. [31] Cornfeld, I., Fomin, S. and Sinai, Y. (1982). Ergodic Theory. (SpringerVerlag, New York). [138, 139, 157] Csernák, G. and Stépán, G. (2006). On the periodic response of a harmonically excited dry friction oscillator. J. Sound Vibrat. 295, pp. 649–658. [7] Cunha, F., Pagano, D. and Moreno, U. (2003). Sliding bifurcations of equilibria in planar variable structure systems. IEEE Trans. Circuits Systems I Fund. Theory Appl. 50, 8, pp. 1129–1134. [27] Dai, D., Li, S., Ma, X. and Tse, C. (2007). Slow-scale instability of singlestage power-factor-correction power supplies. IEEE Trans. Circuits Systems I Fund. Theory Appl. 54, 8, pp. 1724–1735. [135] Dankowicz, H. and Nordmark, A. (2000). On the origin and bifurcations of stick-slip oscillations. Phys. D 136, pp. 280–302. [7, 26, 66] Dankowicz, H. and Piiroinen, P. (2002). Exploiting discontinuities for stabilization of recurrent motions. Dynamical Systems 17, 4, pp. 317–342. [5] Danø, S., Hynne, F., De Monte, S., d’Ovidio, F., Sørensen, P. and Westerhoff, H. (2001). Synchronization of glycolytic oscillations in a yeast cell

November 26, 2009

220

15:34



population. Faraday Discuss. 120, pp. 261–276. [76] Deimling, K. (1992). Multivalued Differential Equations. (W. de Gruyter, New York). [2] Dercole, F. (2005). Border collision bifurcations in the evolution of mutualistic interactions. Int. J. Bifurcation Chaos 15, 7, pp. 2179–2190. [8] Dercole, F. and Maggi, S. (2005). Detection and continuation of a border collision bifurcation in a forest fire model. Appl. Math. Comput. 186, pp. 623–635. [8] di Bernardo, M., Budd, C. and Champneys, A. (1998a). Grazing, skipping and sliding: Analysis of the non-smooth dynamics of the DC/DC buck converter. Nonlinearity 11, pp. 859–890. [29] di Bernardo, M., Budd, C. and Champneys, A. (2001a). Corner collision implies border-collision bifurcation. Phys. D 154, pp. 171–194. [29, 99] di Bernardo, M., Budd, C. and Champneys, A. (2001b). Normal form maps for grazing bifurcations in n-dimensional piecewise-smooth dynamical systems. Phys. D 160, pp. 222–254. [vii, 8, 26, 29, 66] di Bernardo, M., Budd, C., Champneys, A. and Kowalczyk, P. (2008a). Piecewise-smooth Dynamical Systems. Theory and Applications. (Springer-Verlag, New York). [v, 1, 3, 12, 14, 21, 22, 25, 27, 29] di Bernardo, M., Feigin, M., Hogan, S. and Homer, M. (1999). Local analysis of C-bifurcations in n-dimensional piecewise-smooth dynamical systems. Chaos Solitons Fractals 10, 11, pp. 1881–1908. [21, 22, 23, 105, 108, 117, 133, 137, 212] di Bernardo, M., Fossas, E., Olivar, G. and Vasca, F. (1997). Secondary bifurcations and high periodic orbits in voltage controlled buck converter. Int. J. Bifurcation Chaos 7, pp. 2755–2771. [29] di Bernardo, M., Garofalo, F., Glielmo, L. and Vasca, F. (1998b). Switchings, bifurcations and chaos in DC/DC converters. IEEE Trans. Circuits Systems I Fund. Theory Appl. 45, 2, pp. 133–141. [v] di Bernardo, M., Garofalo, F., Iannelli, L. and Vasca, F. (2002a). Bifurcations in piecewise-smooth feedback systems, Internat. J. Control 75, 16-17, pp. 1243–1259. [4] di Bernardo, M., Johansson, K. and Vasca, F. (2001c). Self-oscillations and sliding in relay feedback systems: Symmetry and bifurcations. Int J. Bifurcation Chaos 11, 4, pp. 1121–1140. [27] di Bernardo, M., Kowalczyk, P. and Nordmark, A. (2002b). Bifurcations of dynamical systems with sliding: Derivation of normal-form mappings. Phys. D 170, pp. 175–205. [28, 99] di Bernardo, M., Kowalczyk, P. and Nordmark, A. (2003). Sliding bifurca-

bifurcations

November 26, 2009

15:34


Bibliography

bifurcations

221

tions: A novel mechanism for the sudden onset of chaos in dry friction oscillators. Int. J. Bifurcation Chaos 13, 10, pp. 2935–2948. [7, 27, 28] di Bernardo, M., Nordmark, A. and Olivar, G. (2008b). Discontinuityinduced bifurcations of equilibria in piecewise-smooth and impacting dynamical systems. Phys. D 237, pp. 119–136. [3] Do, Y. (2007). A mechanism for dangerous border collision bifurcations. Chaos Solitons Fractals 32, pp. 352–362. [11] Do, Y. and Baek, H. (2006). Dangerous border-collision bifurcations of a piecewise-smooth map. Comm. Pure Appl. Anal. 5, 3, pp. 493–503. [11] Do, Y., Kim, S. and Kim, P. (2008). Stability of fixed points placed on the border in the piecewise linear systems. Chaos Solitons Fractals 38, 2, pp. 391–399. [11] Doedel, E., Champneys, A., Fairgrieve, T., Kuznetsov, Y., Oldeman, B., Paffenroth, R., Sandstede, B., Wang, X. and Zhang, C. (2007). AUTO07P: Continuation and Bifurcation Software for Ordinary Differential Equations., http://indy.cs.concordia.ca/auto. [83] Dullin, H., Meiss, J. and Sterling, D. (2005). Symbolic codes for rotational orbits. SIAM J. Appl. Dyn. Syst. 4, 3, pp. 515–562. [111] Dullin, H., Sterling, D. and Meiss, J. (2000). Self-rotation number using the turning angle. Phys. D 145, pp. 25–46. [138] Dummit, D. and Foote, R. (2004). Abstract Algebra. (Wiley, Hoboken, NJ). [14, 15] Dutta, M., Nusse, H., Ott, E., Yorke, J. and Yuan, G. (1999). Multiple attractor bifurcations: A source of unpredictability in piecewise smooth systems. Phys. Rev. Lett. 83, 21, pp. 4281–4284. [23, 162] Dutta, P., Routroy, B., Banerjee, S. and Alam, S. (2008). On the existence of low-period orbits in n-dimensional piecewise linear discontinuous maps. Nonlinear Dynamics 53, pp. 369–380. [21] Edoh, K. and Lorenz, J. (2003). Numerical approximation of rough invariant curves of planar maps, SIAM J. Sci. Comput. 25, 1, pp. 213–223. [154] Edwards, R. (2000). Analysis of continuous-time switching networks. Phys. D 146, pp. 165–199. [8] Elnashaie, S., Harraz, H. and Abashar, M. (2001). Homoclinical chaos and the period-adding route to complex non-chaotic attractors in fluidized bed catalytic reactors. Chaos Solitons Fractals 12, pp. 1761–1792. [30] Fairman, F. (1998). Linear Control Theory. The State Space Approach. (Wiley, New York). [15, 17]

November 26, 2009

222

15:34



Fang, C. and Abed, E. (2001). Saddle-node and Neimark bifurcations in PWM converters. In [Banerjee and Verghese (2001)]. [4] Feigin, M. (1970). Doubling of the oscillation period with C-bifurcations in piecewise continuous systems. J. Appl. Math. Mech. 34, 5, pp. 822–830. [20] Feigin, M. (1974). On the generation of sets of subharmonic modes in a piecewise continuous system. J. Appl. Math. Mech. 38, 5, pp. 759–767. [13] Feigin, M. (1978). On the structure of C-bifurcation boundaries of piecewise-continuous systems. J. Appl. Math. Mech. 42, 5, pp. 885–895. [13] Feigin, M. (1995). The increasingly complex structure of the bifurcation tree of a piecewise-smooth system. J. Appl. Math. Mech. 59, 6, pp. 853–863. [13] Fenichel, N. (1971). Persistence and smoothness of invariant manifolds for flows. Indiana Univ. Math. J. 21, 3. [151] Ferrari-Trecate, G., Cuzzola, F. and Morari, M. (2003). Lagrange stability and performance analysis of discrete-time piecewise affine systems with logic states. Int. J. Control 76, 16, pp. 1585–1598. [2] Fiechter, H., A. von Meyenburg (1968). Regulatory properties of growing cell populations of Saccharomyces cerevisiae in a continuous culture system. in A. Kocková-Kratochr´ılová (ed.), Yeasts. Proceedings of the 2nd Symposium on Yeasts held in Bratislava, 16-21 July 1966. (Slovenskej Akadémie Vied, Bratislava), pp. 387–398. [75] Filippov, A. (1964). Differential equations with discontinuous right-hand side. in American Mathematical Society Translations., Vol. 42 (AMS, Ann Arbor), pp. 199–231. [1, 27] Filippov, A. (1988). Differential Equations with Discontinuous Righthand Sides. (Kluwer Academic Publishers., Norwell). [1] Fogg, N. (2002). Substitutions in Dynamics, Arithmetics and Combinatorics. (Springer-Verlag, New York). [122] Fossas, E. and Olivar, G. (1996). Study of chaos in the buck converter. IEEE Trans. Circuits Systems I Fund. Theory Appl. 43, 1, pp. 13–25. [v] Franks, J. (1990). Periodic points and rotation numbers for area preserving ´ diffeomorphisms of the plane. Inst. Hautes Etudes Sci. Publ. Math. 71, pp. 105–120. [138] Fredriksson, M. and Nordmark, A. (1997). Bifurcations caused by grazing incidence in many degrees of freedom impact oscillators. Proc. R. Soc. A 453, pp. 1261–1276. [29]

bifurcations

November 26, 2009

15:34


Bibliography

bifurcations

223

Freire, E., Ponce, E., Rodrigo, F. and Torres, F. (1998). Bifurcation sets of continuous piecewise linear systems with two zones. Int. J. Bifurcation Chaos 8, 11, pp. 2073–2097. [20, 33, 35, 36, 39] Freire, E., Ponce, E., Rodrigo, F. and Torres, F. (2004). A piecewise linear electronic circuit with a multiplicity of bifurcations. Int. J. Bifurcation Chaos 14, 11, pp. 3871–3881. [46] Freire, E., Ponce, E. and Ros, J. (2007). A biparametric bifurcation in 3D continuous piecewise linear systems with two zones. Application to Chua’s circuit. Int. J. Bifurcation Chaos. 17, 2, pp. 445–457. [4] Freire, E., Ponce, E. and Torres, F. (1997). Hopf-like bifurcations in planar piecewise linear systems, Publicacions Matem´ atiques 41, pp. 131–148. [41] Fu, X. and Ashwin, P. (2003). Symbolic analysis for some planar piecewise linear maps. Discrete Contin. Dyn. Syst. 9, 6, pp. 1533–1548. [111] Gallegati, M., Gardini, L., Puu, T. and Sushko, I. (2003). Hicks’ trade cycle revisited: Cycles and bifurcations. Math. Comput. Simulation 63, pp. 505–527. [145] Gallian, J. (1998). Contemporary Abstract Algebra. (Houghton Mifflin, Boston). [122] Ganguli, A. and Banerjee, S. (2005). Dangerous bifurcation at border collision: When does it occur? Phys. Rev. E. 71, 5, p. 057202. [11] Garcia, M., Chatterjee, A., Ruina, A. and Coleman, M. (1998). The simplest walking model: stability, complexity, and scaling. ASME J. Biomechanical Eng. 120, 2, pp. 281–288. [5] Gardini, L. (2008). private communication. [162] Gardini, L., Puu, T. and Sushko, I. (2006a). A Goodwin-type model with a piecewise linear investment function. In [Puu and Sushko (2006)], pages 317-333. [12] Gardini, L., Puu, T. and Sushko, I. (2006b). The Hicksian model with investment floor and income ceiling. In [Puu and Sushko (2006)], pages 179-191. [24] Gear, C. and Østerby, O. (1984). Solving ordinary differential equations with discontinuities. ACM. Trans. Math. Soft. 10, 1, pp. 23–44. [83] Giannakopoulos, F. and Pliete, K. (2001). Planar systems of piecewise linear differential equations with a line of discontinuity. Nonlinearity 14, pp. 1611–1632. [3] Glendinning, P. (1999). Stability, Instability and Chaos: An Introduction to the Theory of Nonlinear Differential Equations. (Cambridge University Press, New York). [24, 34, 72, 175, 176]

November 26, 2009

224

15:34



Gon¸calves, J. (2005). Regions of stability for limit cycle oscillations in piecewise linear systems. IEEE Trans. Automat. Contr. 50, 11, pp. 1877–1882. [33] Gon¸calves, J., Megretski, A. and Dahleh, M. (2003). Global analysis of piecewise linear systems using impact maps and surface Lyapunov functions. IEEE Trans. Automat. Contr. 48, 12, pp. 2089–2106. [11] Gouzé, J. and Sari, T. (2002). A class of piecewise linear differential equations arising in biological models. Dyn. Syst. 17, 4, pp. 299–316. [8] Grebogi, C., Ott, E. and Yorke, J. (1983). Crises, sudden changes in chaotic attractors, and transient chaos. Phys. D 7, pp. 181–200. [90] Griffiths, R. and Chou, W. (1986). Effective potentials: A new approach and new results for one-dimensional systems with competing length scales. Phys. Rev. Lett. 56, 18, pp. 1929–1931. [108] Guckenheimer, J. and Holmes, P. (1986). Nonlinear Oscillations, Dynamical Systems, and Bifurcations of Vector Fields. (Springer-Verlag, New York). [34, 57, 70, 72, 173, 175, 176, 188] Hadeler, K. (1992). Periodic solutions of homogeneous equations. J. Diff. Eq. 95, 1, pp. 183–202. [11] Halse, C., Homer, M. and di Bernardo, M. (2003). C-bifurcations and period-adding in one-dimensional piecewise-smooth maps. Chaos Solitons Fractals 18, pp. 953–976. [vi, 31] Halse, C., Wilson, R., di Bernardo, M. and Homer, M. (2007). Coexisting solutions and bifurcations in mechanical oscillations with backlash. J. Sound. Vib. 305, pp. 854–885. [5] Hao, B. and Zheng, W. (1998). Applied Symbolic Dynamics and Chaos. (World Scientific, Singapore). [111, 126] Hartley, B. and Hawkes, T. (1970). Rings, Modules and Linear Algebra. (Chapman and Hall., London). [14, 15] Hartman, P. (1964). Ordinary Differential Equations. (Wiley, New York). [167] Hassouneh, M., Abed, E. and Nusse, H. (2004). Robust dangerous bordercollision bifurcations in piecewise smooth systems, Phys. Rev. Lett. 92, p. 070201. [11] Heemels, W. and Brogliato, B. (2003). The complementarity class of hybrid dynamical systems. Euro. J. Control 9, pp. 322–360. [2] Heemels, W., Schumacher, J. and Weiland, S. (2000). Linear complementarity systems. SIAM. J. Appl. Math. 60, 4, pp. 1234–1269. [2] Henson, M. (2003). Dynamic modeling and control of yeast cell populations in continuous biochemical reactors. Comput. Chem. Eng. 27, pp. 1185–

bifurcations

November 26, 2009

15:34


Bibliography

bifurcations

225

1199. [76] Hirsch, M., Pugh, C. and Shub, M. (1977). Invariant Manifolds., Lecture Notes in Mathematics., Vol. 583 (Springer-Verlag, New York). [151] Hogan, S. (1994). Slender rigid block motion. J. Eng. Mech. 120, 1, pp. 11–24. [5] Hogan, S., Higham, L. and Griffin, T. (2007). Dynamics of a piecewise linear map with a gap. Proc. R. Soc. A 463, pp. 49–65. [27] Holden, A. and Fan, Y. (1992). From simple to complex oscillatory behaviour via intermittent chaos in the Rose-Hindmarsh model for neuronal activity. Chaos Solitons Fractals 2, 4, pp. 349–369. [30] Hommes, C. and Nusse, H. (1991). “Period three to period two” bifurcation for piecewise linear models. J. Economics 54, 2, pp. 157–169. [20] Hommes, C., Nusse, H. and Simonovits, A. (1995). Cycles and chaos in a socialist economy. J. Econ. Dyn. Control 19, pp. 155–179. [7] Ivanov, A. (2000). Stability of periodic motions with impacts. in B. Brogliato (ed.), Impacts in Mechanical Systems: Analysis and Modelling. (Springer-Verlag, New York). [5] Iwatani, Y. and Shinji, H. (2006). Stability tests and stabilization for piecewise linear systems based on poles and zeros of subsystems. Automatica 42, pp. 1685–1695. [11] Jain, P. and Banerjee, S. (2003). Border-collision bifurcations in onedimensional discontinuous maps. Int. J. Bifurcation Chaos 13, 11, pp. 3341–3351. [27] Johansson, M. (2003). Piecewise Linear Control Systems., Lecture Notes in Control and Information Sciences., Vol. 284 (Springer-Verlag, New York). [1] Jones, K. (1995). Cybernetic Modeling of Spontaneous Oscillations in Continuous Cultures of Saccharomyces cerevisiae., Master’s thesis, University of Colorado, Boulder, CO. [78, 81] Jones, K. and Kompala, D. (1999). Cybernetic model of the growth dynamics of Saccharomyces cerevisiae in batch and continuous cultures, J. Biotech. 71, pp. 105–131. [vii, 76, 77, 78, 80, 81, 213] Julián, P., Desages, A. and Agamennoni, O. (1999). High-level canonical piecewise linear representation using a simplicial partition. IEEE Trans. Circuits Systems I Fund. Theory Appl. 46, 4, pp. 463–480. [10] Kang, S. and Chua, L. (1978). A global representation of multidimensional piecewise-linear functions with linear partitions. IEEE Trans. Circuits Systems CAS-25, 11, pp. 938–940. [10, 31] Kapitaniak, T. and Maistrenko, Y. (1998). Multiple choice bifurcations as

November 26, 2009

226

15:34



a source of unpredictability in dynamical systems. Phys. Rev. E 58, 4, pp. 5161–5163. [162] Kapitaniak, T. and Maistrenko, Y. (1999). Riddling bifurcations in coupled piecewise linear maps. Phys. D 126, pp. 18–26. [12] Kawczy´ nski, A. and Strizhak, P. (2000). Period adding and broken Farey tree sequence of bifurcations for mixed-mode oscillations and chaos in the simplest three-variable nonlinear system. J. Chem. Phys. 112, 14, pp. 6122–6130. [vi, 31] Keener, J. and Sneyd, J. (1998). Mathematical Physiology (Springer-Verlag, New York). [8] Killough, D. and Edwards, R. (2005). Bifurcations in glass networks. Int. J. Bifurcation Chaos 15, 2, pp. 395–423. [8] Kolman, B. (1996). Elementary Linear Algebra. (Prentice Hall, Upper Saddle River, NJ). [211] Kompala, D., Ramkrishna, D., Jansen, N. and Tsao, G. (1986). Investigation of bacterial growth on mixed substrates: Experimental evaluation of cybernetic models. Biotech. Bioeng. 28, pp. 1044–1055. [78, 80, 81] Kompala, D., Ramkrishna, D. and Tsao, G. (1984). Cybernetic modelling of microbial growth on multiple substrates. Biotech. Bioeng. 26, pp. 1272– 1281. [78, 80] Kowalczyk, P. (2005). Robust chaos and border-collision bifurcations in non-invertible piecewise-linear maps. Nonlinearity 18, pp. 485–504. [27] Kowalczyk, P. and di Bernardo, M. (2005). Two-parameter degenerate sliding bifurcations in Filippov systems. Phys. D 204, pp. 204–229. [95] Kowalczyk, P., di Bernardo, M., Champneys, A., Hogan, S., Homer, M., Piiroinen, P., Kuznetsov, Y. and Nordmark, A. (2006). Two-parameter discontinuity-induced bifurcations of limit cycles: Classification and open problems. Int. J. Bifurcation Chaos 16, 3, pp. 601–629. [95, 99] Kowalczyk, P. and Piiroinen, P. (2008). Two-parameter sliding bifurcations of periodic solutions in a dry-friction oscillator. Phys. D 237, pp. 1053– 1073. [95] Krupa, M. and Szmolyan, P. (2001). Relaxation oscillation and canard explosion. J. Diff. Eq. 174, pp. 312–368. [93] Kumar, M., Kienle, A., Zeyer, K. and Pushpavanam, S. (2008). Nonlinear analysis of the effect of maintenance in continuous cell cultures. Math. Comput. Simulation 79, 3, pp. 728–748. [82] K¨ upper, T. (2008). Invariant cones for non-smooth dynamical systems. Math. Comput. Simulation 79, 4, pp. 1396–1408. [11] K¨ upper, T. and Moritz, S. (2001). Generalized Hopf bifurcation for non-

bifurcations

November 26, 2009

15:34


Bibliography

bifurcations

227

smooth planar systems. Phil. Trans. R. Soc. Lond. A 359, pp. 2483–2496. [46] Kuznetsov, Y. (2004). Elements of Bifurcation Theory., Appl. Math. Sci., Vol. 112 (Springer-Verlag, New York). [vi, 14, 43, 70, 72, 87, 96, 138, 139, 175, 176] Kuznetsov, Y., Rinaldi, S. and Gragnani, A. (2003). One-parameter bifurcations in planar Filippov systems. Int. J. Bifurcation Chaos 13, 8, pp. 2157–2188. [3, 8] Lagarias, J. and Rains, E. (2005a). Dynamics of a family of piecewise-linear area-preserving plane maps. I. rational rotation numbers. J. Difference Eqn. Appl. 11, 12, pp. 1089–1108. [139] Lagarias, J. and Rains, E. (2005b). Dynamics of a family of piecewise-linear area-preserving plane maps. II. invariant circles. J. Difference Eqn. Appl. 11, 13, pp. 1137–1163. [141] Lagarias, J. and Tresser, C. (1995). A walk along the branches of the extended Farey tree. IBM J. Res. Dev. 39, 3, pp. 283–294. [122] Laugesen, J. and Mosekilde, E. (2006). Border-collision bifurcations in a dynamic management game. Comput. Oper. Res. 33, pp. 464–478. [7] Lázaro, M., Santamar´ıa, I., Pantaleón, C., Sánchez, A., Puente, A. and Fernández, T. (2001). Smoothing the canonical piecewise-linear model: An efficient and derivable large-signal model for MESFET/HEMT transistors. IEEE Trans. Circuits Systems I Fund. Theory Appl. 48, 2, pp. 184–192. [31] Le Calvez, P. (2001). Rotation numbers in the infinite annulus. Proc. Amer. Math. Soc. 129, 11, pp. 3221–3230. [138] Lee, C., Collins, P., Krauskopf, B. and Osinga, H. (2008). Tangency bifurcations of global Poincaré maps. SIAM J. Appl. Dyn. Sys. 7, 3, pp. 712–754. [24] Lee, J. (1992). Biochemical Engineering. (Prentice Hall, Englewood Cliffs, NJ). [79] Leine, R. (2006). Bifurcations of equilibria in non-smooth continuous systems. Phys. D 223, pp. 121–137. [8, 12, 18, 19, 31] Leine, R. and Nijmeijer, H. (2004). Dynamics and Bifurcations of Nonsmooth Mechanical systems, Lecture Notes in Applied and Computational Mathematics, Vol. 18 (Springer-Verlag, Berlin). [1, 4, 8, 12, 18, 19, 31, 47] Leine, R. and Van Campen, D. (2002). Discontinuous bifurcations of periodic solutions. Math. Comput. Model. 36, pp. 259–273. [7, 29] Leine, R., Van Campen, D. and Van de Vrande, B. (2000). Bifurcations in

November 26, 2009

228

15:34



nonlinear discontinuous systems. Nonlinear Dynamics 23, pp. 105–164. [7, 27, 29, 31] Lenci, S. and Rega, G. (2005). Heteroclinic bifurcations and optimal control in the nonlinear rocking dynamics of generic and slender rigid blocks. Int. J. Bifurcation Chaos 15, 6, pp. 1901–1918. [5] Li, T. and Yorke, J. (1975). Period three implies chaos. Amer. Math. Monthly. 82, 10, pp. 985–992. [23, 32] Li, T. and Yorke, J. (1978). Ergodic transformations from an interval into itself. Trans. Amer. Math. Soc. 235, 1, pp. 183–192. [194] Li, X., Wang, S. and Yin, W. (2001). A canonical representation of highdimensional continuous piecewise-linear functions. IEEE Trans. Circuits Systems I Fund. Theory Appl. 48, 11, pp. 1347–1351. [10] Lipscombe, P. and Pellegrino, S. (1993). Free rocking of prismatic blocks. J. Eng. Mech. 119, 7, pp. 1387–1410. [5] Llibre, J., Ponce, E. and Teruel, A. (2007). Horseshoes near homoclinic orbits for piecewise linear differential systems in R3 . Int. J. Bifurcation Chaos 17, 4, pp. 1171–1184. [33, 46] Llibre, J. and Sotomayor, J. (1996). Phase portraits of planar control systems. Nonlin. Anal. TMA 27, 10, pp. 1177–1197. [35] Llibre, J. and Teruel, A. (2004). Existence of Poincaré maps in piecewise linear differential systems in Rn . Int. J. Bifurcation Chaos 14, 8, pp. 2843–2851. [25] López, R., Rodr´ıguez, M., Granero, M., Ojeda, J. and Bruzón, E. (2005). A symmetric piecewise-linear chaotic system with a single equilibrium point. Int. J. Bifurcation Chaos 15, 4, pp. 1411–1415. [4] Lothaire, M. (1983). Combinatorics on Words., Encyclopedia of Mathematics and Its Applications, Vol. 17 (Addison-Wesley, Reading, MA). [125, 126] Lum, R. and Chua, L. (1991). Global properties of continuous piecewise linear vector-fields. 1. Simplest case in R2 . Int. J. Circ. Theor. Appl. 19, 3, pp. 251–307. [33, 36] Luo, A. and Han, R. (1996). The dynamics of a bouncing ball with a sinusoidally vibrating table revisited. Nonlinear Dynamics 10, 1, pp. 1–18. [5] Ma, Y., Agarwal, M. and Banerjee, S. (2006). Border collision bifurcations in a soft impact system. Phys. Lett. A 354, pp. 281–287. [7] Ma, Y., Ing, J., Banerjee, S., Wiercigroch, M. and Pavlovskaia, E. (2008). The nature of the normal form map for soft impacting systems. Int. J. Nonlinear Mech. 43, pp. 504–513. [7]

bifurcations

November 26, 2009

15:34


Bibliography

bifurcations

229

Maggio, G., di Bernardo, M. and Kennedy, M. (2000). Nonsmooth bifurcations in a piecewise-linear model of the Colpitts oscillator. IEEE Trans. Circuits Systems I Fund. Theory Appl. 47, 8. [4] Maistrenko, Y., Maistrenko, V., Vikul, S. and Chua, L. (1995). Bifurcations of attracting cycles from time-delayed Chua’s circiut. Int. J. Bifurcation Chaos. 5, 3, pp. 653–671. [108] Maistrenko, Y., Sushko, I. and Gardini, L. (1998). About two mechanisms of reunion of chaotic attractors. Chaos Solitons Fractals 9, 8, pp. 1373– 1390. [151, 152, 162] Marsden, J. and McCracken, M. (1976). The Hopf Bifurcation and its Applications (Springer-Verlag, New York). [vi] Metropolis, N., Stein, M. and Stein, P. (1973). On finite limit sets for transformations on the unit interval. J. Comb. Theor. A15, p. 25. [110] Milnor, J. and Thurston, W. (1988). On iterated maps of the interval. in A. Dold and B. Eckmann (eds.), Lect. Notes. in Math., Vol. 1342 (Springer-Verlag, New York), pp. 465–563. [111] Mitrovski, C. and Kocarev, L. (2001). Periodic trajectories in piecewiselinear maps. IEEE Trans. Circuits Systems I Fund. Theory Appl. 48, 10, pp. 1244–1246. [33] Morse, M. and Hedlund, G. (1940). Symbolic dynamics II. Sturmian trajectories. Am. J. Math. 62, pp. 1–42. [122] Mosekilde, E. and Laugesen, J. (2007). Nonlinear dynamic phenomena in the beer model. Syst. Dyn. Rev. 23, pp. 229–252. [7] Najafpour, G. (2007). Biochemical Engineering and Biotechnology. (Elsevier, Amsterdam). [75] Namjoshi, A. and Ramkrishna, D. (2001). Multiplicity and stability of steady states in continuous bioreactors: Dissection of cybernetic models. Chem. Eng. Sci. 56, 19, pp. 5593–5607. [81] Nayfeh, A. (1973). Perturbation Methods. (Wiley, New York). [46] Nordmark, A. (1997). Universal limit mapping in grazing bifurcations. Phys. Rev. E 55, 1, pp. 266–270. [29] Nordmark, A. (2001). Existence of periodic orbits in grazing bifurcations of impacting mechanical oscillators. Nonlinearity 14, pp. 1517–1542. [29] Nordmark, A. and Kowalczyk, P. (2006). A codimension-two scenario of sliding solution in grazing-sliding bifurcations. Nonlinearity 19, 1, pp. 1–26. [95] Nusse, H., Ott, E. and Yorke, J. (1994). Border-collision bifurcations: An explanation for observed bifurcation phenomena. Phys. Rev. E 49, 2, pp. 1073–1076. [23, 162]

November 26, 2009

230

15:34



Nusse, H. and Yorke, J. (1992). Border-collision bifurcations including “period two to period three” for piecewise smooth systems. Phys. D 57, pp. 39–57. [20, 142] Nusse, H. and Yorke, J. (1995). Border-collision bifurcations for piecewisesmooth one-dimensional maps. Int. J. Bifurcation Chaos. 5, 1, pp. 189– 207. [22] Osorio, G., di Bernardo, M. and Santini, S. (2008). Corner-impact bifurcations: A novel class of discontinuity-induced bifurcations in cam-follower systems. SIAM J. Appl. Dyn. Sys. 7, 1, pp. 18–38. [29] Ott, E. (1993). Chaos in Dynamical Systems. (Cambridge University Press, New York). [90] Peckham, B. (1990). The necessity of the Hopf bifurcation for periodically forced oscillators. Nonlinearity 3, 2, pp. 261–280. [138] Perko, L. (2001). Differential Equations and Dynamical Systems. (SpringerVerlag, New York). [143] Peterka, F. and Vacik, J. (1992). Transition to chaotic motion in mechanical systems with impacts. J. Sound Vib. 154, 1, pp. 95–115. [5] Piassi, V., Tufaile, A. and Sartorelli, J. (2004). Period-adding bifurcations and chaos in a bubble column. Chaos 14, 2, pp. 477–486. [31] Piiroinen, P., Virgin, L. and Champneys, A. (2004). Chaos and periodadding: Experimental and numerical verification of the grazing bifurcation. J. Nonlinear Sci. 14, 4, pp. 383–404. [5, 31, 86] Plahte, E. and Kjøglum., S. (2005). Analysis and generic properties of gene regulatory networks with graded response functions. Phys. D 201, pp. 150–176. [8] Popp, K. (2000). Non-smooth mechanical systems. J. Appl. Math. Mech. 64, 5, pp. 765–772. [1, 4, 7] Porro, D., Martegani, E., Ranzi, B. and Alberghina, L. (1988). Oscillations in continuous cultures of budding yeast: A segregated parameter anaylsis. Biotech. Bioeng. 32, pp. 411–417. [75] Puu, T., Gardini, L. and Sushko, I. (2006). On the change of periodicities in the Hicksian multiplier-accelerator model with a consumption floor. Chaos Solitons Fractals 29, pp. 681–696. [145] Puu, T. and Sushko, I. (eds.) (2006). Business Cycle Dynamics: Models and Tools. (Springer-Verlag, New York). [7, 145, 223, 232] Rakshit, B., Apratim, M., Jain, P. and Banerjee, S. (2008). Bifurcation phenomena in two-dimensional piecewise smooth discontinuous maps. http://arxiv.org/abs/0809.3121. [27] Ramkrishna, D., Kompala, D. and Tsao, G. (1987). Are microbes optimal

bifurcations

November 26, 2009

15:34


Bibliography

bifurcations

231

strategists? Biotech. Prog. 3, pp. 121–126. [80] Richard, P. (2003). The rhythm of yeast. FEMS Microbiol. Rev. 27, p. 547:557. [76] Robinson, C. (1999). Dynamical Systems. Stability, Symbolic Dynamics, and Chaos. (CRC Press, Boca Raton, FL). [143, 151] Robinson, R. (2004). An Introduction to Dynamical Systems. Continuous and Discrete. (Prentice Hall, Upper Saddle River, NJ). [24, 96, 194] Rosen, R. (1970). Dynamical System Theory in Biology. (WileyInterscience, New York). [8] Roy, I. and Roy, A. (2008). Border collision bifurcations in threedimensional piecewise smooth systems. Int. J. Bifurcation Chaos 18, 2, pp. 577–586. [23] Satroutdinov, A., Kuriyama, H. and Kobayashi, H. (1992). Oscillatory metabolism of Saccharomyces cerevisiae in continuous culture. FEMS Microbiol. Lett. 98, pp. 261–268. [75] Schwartzman, S. (1957). Asymptotic cycles. Annals of Math. 66, 2, pp. 270–284. [138] Senthilkumar, D. and Lakshmanan, M. (2005). Bifurcations and chaos in time delayed piecewise linear dynamical systems. Int. J. Bifurcation Chaos 15, 9, pp. 2895–2912. [2] Seydel, R. (1994). Practical bifurcation and stability analysis: From equilibrium to chaos. (Springer-Verlag, New York). [47] Sharkovskii, A. (1995). Co-existence of cycles of a continuous map of the line to itself. Int. J. Bifurcation Chaos 5, 5, pp. 1263–1273, translation of Ukrain. Mat. Z., 16:61-71, 1964. [23, 32] Sieber, J. (2006). Dynamics of delayed relay systems. Nonlinearity 19, 11, pp. 2489–2527. [2] Sieber, J., Kowalczyk, P., Hogan, S. and di Bernardo, M. (unpublished). Dynamics of symmetric dynamical systems with delayed switching. To appear: J. Vib. Control. [2, 24, 29] Siegel, R., Tresser, C. and Zettler, G. (1992). A decoding problem in dynamics and in number theory. Chaos 2, 4, pp. 473–493. [122] Simpson, D. (2008). Bifurcations in Piecewise-Smooth, Continuous Systems., Ph.D. thesis, The University of Colorado. [vi] Simpson, D. and Kompala, D. (2008). Spontaneous oscillations in yeast chemostat cultures. http://demonstrations.wolfram.com/ SpontaneousOscillationsInYeastChemostatCultures. [77] Simpson, D., Kompala, D. and Meiss, J. (2009). Discontinuity induced bifurcations in a model of Saccharomyces cerevisiae. Math. Biosci. 218,

November 26, 2009

232

15:34



1, pp. 40–49. [ix] Simpson, D. and Meiss, J. (2007). Andronov-Hopf bifurcations in planar, piecewise-smooth, continuous flows. Phys. Lett. A 371, 3, pp. 213–220. [ix] Simpson, D. and Meiss, J. (2008a). Neimark-Sacker bifurcations in planar, piecewise-smooth, continuous maps. SIAM J. Appl. Dyn. Sys. 7, 3, pp. 795–824. [ix, 135] Simpson, D. and Meiss, J. (2008b). Unfolding a codimension-two discontinuous Andronov-Hopf bifurcation. Chaos 18, 3, p. 033125. [ix] Simpson, D. and Meiss, J. (2009a). Shrinking point bifurcations of resonance tongues for piecewise-smooth, continuous maps. Nonlinearity 22, 5, pp. 1123–1144. [ix, 131] Simpson, D. and Meiss, J. (2009b). Simultaneous border-collision and period-doubling bifurcations. Chaos 19, 3, p. 033146. [ix] Sontag, E. (1998). Mathematical Control Theory. (Springer-Verlag, New York). [15] Sparrow, C. (1981). Chaos in a three-dimensional single loop feedback system with a piecewise linear feedback function. J. Math. Anal. Appl. 83, pp. 275–291. [11, 33, 46] Sushko, I., Agliari, A. and Gardini, L. (2005). Bistability and bordercollision bifurcations for a family of unimodal piecewise smooth maps. Discrete Contin. Dyn. Syst. Ser. B 5, 3, pp. 881–897. [111] Sushko, I. and Gardini, L. (2006). Center bifurcation for a two-dimensional piecewise linear map. In [Puu and Sushko (2006)], pages 49-78. [vi, 12, 23, 24, 129, 133, 145, 151] Sushko, I. and Gardini, L. (2008). Center bifurcation for two-dimensional border-collision normal form. Int. J. Bifurcation Chaos 18, 4, pp. 1029– 1050. [129, 133, 145, 148, 151, 156, 162] Sushko, I., Gardini, L. and Puu, T. (2004). Tongues of periodicity in a family of two-dimensional discontinuous maps of real Möbius type. Chaos Solitons Fractals 21, pp. 403–412. [24] Szalai, R. and Osinga, H. (2008). Invariant polygons in systems with grazing-sliding. Chaos 18, 2, p. 023121. [7, 27] Tanaka, G., Murashige, S. and Aihara, K. (2003). Bifurcation structures of period-adding phenomena in an ocean internal wave model. Int. J. Bifurcation Chaos 13, 11, pp. 3409–3424. [30] Teixeira, M. (1993). Generic bifurcation of sliding vector fields. J. Math. Anal. Appl. 176, pp. 436–457. [27] Thamilmaran, K., Lakshmanan, M. and Venkatesan, A. (2004). Hyperchaos

bifurcations

November 26, 2009

15:34


Bibliography

bifurcations

233

in a modified canonical Chua’s circuit. Int. J. Bifurcation Chaos 14, 1, pp. 221–243. [23] Tomita, K. and Tsuda, I. (1980). Towards the interpretation of the global bifurcation structure of the Lorenz system. A simple one-dimensional model. Suppl. Prog. Theor. Phys. 69, pp. 185–199. [30] Trentelman, H., Stoorvogel, A. and Hautus, M. (2001). Control Theory for Linear Systems. (Springer-Verlag, New York). [15] Tse, C. (2003). Complex Behavior of Switching Power Converters. (CRC Press, Boca Raton, FL). [1, 4] Tse, C., Dai, D. and Ma, X. (2005). Symbolic analysis of bifurcation in switching power converters: Practical alternative viewpoint of border collision. Int. J. Bifurcation Chaos 15, 7, pp. 2263–2270. [111] Tung, P. and Shaw, S. (1988). The dynamics of an impact print hammer. J. Vibr. Acoust. Stress, Reliability Design 110, 2, pp. 193–200. [5] Turnbull, H. and Aitken, A. (1932). An Introduction to the Theory of Canonical Matrices. (Blackie, London). [15] Van der Schaft, A. and Schumacher, J. (2000). An Introduction to Hybrid Dynamical Systems. (Springer-Verlag, New York). [1] van Lint, J. and Wilson, R. (2001). A Course in Combinatorics. (Cambridge University Press, New York). [125] Vincent, T. and Grantham, W. (1997). Nonlinear and Optimal Control Systems. (Wiley, New York). [15] von Meyenburg, H. (1973). Stable synchrony oscillations in continuous cultures of Saccharomyces cerevisiae under glucose limitation. in B. Chance, E. Pye, T. Ghosh and B. Hess (eds.), Biological and Biochemical Oscillators. (Academic Press, New York), pp. 411–417. [75] Wechselberger, M. (2005). Existence and bifurcation of canards in R3 in the case of a folded node. SIAM J. Appl. Dyn. Sys. 4, 1, pp. 101–139. [93] White, A. (1968). Real Analysis: An Introduction. (Addison Wesley, Boston). [203] Wiercigroch, M. and De Kraker, B. (eds.) (2000). Applied Nonlinear Dynamics and Chaos of Mechanical Systems with Discontinuities. (World Scientific, Singapore). [1, 4, 5, 7] Wiggins, S. (2003). Introduction to Applied Nonlinear Dynamical Systems and Chaos., Texts in Appl. Math., Vol. 2 (Springer-Verlag, New York). [24, 43] Yang, T. and Chua, L. (2000). Piecewise-linear chaotic systems with a single equilibrium point. Int. J. Bifurcation Chaos 10, 9, pp. 2015–2060. [4]

November 26, 2009

234

15:34



Yang, W.-M. and Hao, B.-L. (1987). How the Arnol’d tongues become sausages in a piecewise linear circle map, Comm. Theoret. Phys. 8, pp. 1–15. [24, 108, 126, 134, 154] Yang, Z., Lu, Q. and Li, L. (2006). The genesis of period-adding bursting without bursting-chaos in the Chay model. Chaos Solitons Fractals 27, pp. 689–697. [30, 94] Yuan, G., Banerjee, S., Ott, E. and Yorke, J. (1998). Border-collision bifurcations in the buck converter. IEEE Trans. Circuits Systems I Fund. Theory Appl. 45, 7, pp. 707–716. [v] Zhang, Y., Zamamiri, A., Henson, M. and Hjortsø, M. (2002). Cell population models for bifurcation analysis and nonlinear control of continuous yeast bioreactors. J. Process Control 12, pp. 721–734. [76] Zhao, X. and Dankowicz, H. (2006). Unfolding degenerate grazing dynamics in impact actuators. Nonlinearity 19, 2, pp. 399–418. [95] Zhao, X. and Schaeffer, D. (2007). Alternate pacing of border-collision period-doubling bifurcations. Nonlinear Dyn. 50, 3, pp. 733–742. [21] Zhao, X., Schaeffer, D., Berger, C., Krassowska, W. and Gauthier, D. (2008). Cardiac alternans arising from an unfolded border-collision bifurcation. J. Comput. Nonlinear Dynam. 3, 4, p. 041004. [7, 21, 31] Zhusubaliyev, Z. and Mosekilde, E. (2003). Bifurcations and Chaos in Piecewise-Smooth Dynamical Systems. (World Scientific, Singapore). [vi, 1, 4, 145] Zhusubaliyev, Z. and Mosekilde, E. (2006a). Birth of bilayered torus and torus breakdown in a piecewise-smooth dynamical system. Phys. Lett. A 351, 3, pp. 167–174. [4] Zhusubaliyev, Z. and Mosekilde, E. (2006b). Torus birth bifurcations in a DC/DC convertor. IEEE Trans. Circuits Systems I Fund. Theory Appl. 53, 8. [4, 24, 111] Zhusubaliyev, Z. and Mosekilde, E. (2008a). Direct transition from a stable equilibrium to quasiperiodicity in non-smooth systems. Phys. Lett. A 372, pp. 2237–2246. [4, 5] Zhusubaliyev, Z. and Mosekilde, E. (2008b). Equilibrium-torus bifurcation in nonsmooth systems. Phys. D 237, pp. 930–936. [24, 133] Zhusubaliyev, Z., Mosekilde, E., De, S. and Banerjee, S. (2008). Transitions from phase-locked dynamics to chaos in a piecewise-linear map. Phys. Rev. E 77, p. 026206. [23, 135, 151] Zhusubaliyev, Z., Mosekilde, E., Maity, S., Mohanan, S. and Banerjee, S. (2006). Border collision route to quasiperiodicity: Numerical investigation and experimental confirmation. Chaos 16, 2, p. 023122. [4, 23, 24,

bifurcations

November 26, 2009

15:34


Bibliography

bifurcations

235

135, 151, 162] Zhusubaliyev, Z., Soukhoterin, E. and Mosekilde, E. (2002). Bordercollision bifurcations on a two-dimensional torus. Chaos Solitons Fractals 13, 9, pp. 1889–1915. [24] Zhusubaliyev, Z., Soukhoterin, E. and Mosekilde, E. (2003). Quasiperiodicity and border-collision bifurcations in a DC-DC converter with pulsewidth modulation. IEEE Trans. Circuits Systems I Fund. Theory Appl. 50, 8, pp. 1047–1057. [24] Zhusubaliyev, Z., Soukhoterin, E. and Mosekilde, E. (2007). Quasiperiodicity and torus breakdown in a power electronic DC/DC converter. Math. Comput. Simulation 73, pp. 364–377. [4, 151] Zou, Y. and K¨ upper, T. (2005). Generalized Hopf bifurcation emanated from a corner for piecewise smooth planar systems, Non. Anal. 62, 1, pp. 1–17. [46] Zou, Y., K¨ upper, T. and Beyn, W.-J. (2006). Generalized Hopf bifurcation for planar Filippov systems continuous at the origin, J. Nonlinear Sci. 16, pp. 159–177. [46]

November 26, 2009

15:34



bifurcations

November 26, 2009

15:34


Index

adjugate matrix, 13, 114, 211–212 adjunct, see adjugate matrix admissibility condition, 112, 145 admissible solution, 13, 21, 34, 35, 37–39, 41, 57–59, 97, 98, 100, 102–106, 112, 120, 128, 132, 159 Andronov-Hopf bifurcation, see Hopf bifurcation Arnold tongue, see resonance tongue

continuous grazing, 28, 29, 59, 62, 63, 68, 70, 84–86 corner collision, 6, 7, 28, 29, 99 curve of discontinuity, 53–57, 72, 84–89 cusp bifurcation, 63, 81, 87 dangerous border-collision bifurcation, 11 discontinuity induced bifurcation, 2 discontinuity map, 24–29, 65–68 discontinuous bifurcation, 3, 18–20, 33–73, 83–89 Hopf bifurcation, 19, 20, 41–47, 49, 55, 59–68, 70–73, 86 Hopf-saddle-node bifurcation, 47–49, 55 saddle-node bifurcation, 19, 20, 47, 49, 55–59

basin of attraction, 47, 139, 156, 161–163 Bautin bifurcation, 70 border-collision bifurcation, 3, 20–24, 32, 95–164 matrix, 113–122, 126–134 boundary equilibrium bifurcation, 3 C-bifurcation, see border-collision bifurcation canard, 93 cardinality, 125–126 center manifold, 2, 57, 69, 103, 104, 106, 129, 172, 182, 195 chaos, 22, 23, 30, 32, 93–94, 100–102, 151–152, 156–157 characteristic polynomial, 14, 17 circuit systems, 4 classical adjoint, see adjugate matrix cofactor matrix, 211 companion matrix, 14–17, 130

economics, 7 eigenvalue path, 18–19 Euler’s totient function, 125 Farey sequence, 122, 145, 156 Feigin’s results, 20–21, 133, 137 Filippov system, 1, 6, 24 friction, 5, 7 grazing -sliding, 27, 28, 99 bifurcation, 27–29 237

bifurcations

November 26, 2009

238

15:34



trajectory, 25, 26, 28, 37–40 homeomorphism, 12, 111, 136, 137 homoclinic bifurcation, 45, 47, 55 orbit, 30, 39, 56, 163 tangle, 23, 151, 157 Hopf bifurcation, 54, 55, 59–70, 83–85, 87–93 Hurwitzian matrix, 11 hybrid system, 1 hystersis, 31 impacting system, 1, 4 invariant circle, 122, 123, 138–141, 150–151, 153–157 polygon, 129, 130, 148–150, 153–155 Lur’e-like form, 10, 32, 210 Lyapunov exponent, 152, 156–157 Lyndon word, 125 Mobi¨ us function, 125 mode-locking, see resonance tongue multiple -crossing bifurcation, 19, 47 attractors, 147, 156, 162–164 Neimark-Sacker bifurcation, 135, 152 nonsmooth fold, 13, 18, 21, 47, 58, 81, 84, 87, 98, 108, 109, 117, 118, 127, 132, 133, 149, 150, 159 observability, 15–16 observer canonical form, 14–18, 34, 42, 60, 64, 135 period adding, 29–31, 93 period doubling bifurcation, 93, 94, 99–106, 121, 142 bifurcation, nonsmooth, 21, 23, 118, 120, 121, 145, 151, 157–160

cascade, 29, 30, 32, 93, 142 persistence, 13, 18, 21, 46, 47, 98, 102, 108, 117, 118, 159 piecewise-linear approximation, 10, 11, 17, 22, 33, 71, 86 piecewise-smooth system, 1 Poincaré map, 24–30, 36–40, 65–68, 169 primitive symbol sequence, 112 rational canonical form, 15 regular grazing, 28 resonance tongue, 5, 24, 30, 107–122, 126–134, 145–160, 208–210 rotation number, 111, 123, 129, 137–139, 145, 148, 149, 153, 155–157, 160 rotational symbol sequence, 122–134, 145, 148, 151 saddle-node bifurcation, 29, 44, 54–59, 83–88, 96–99, 119, 120 shrinking point, 108–110, 115, 126–134, 148–150, 153–155, 208–210 break up, 210 curve, 153–157 single-crossing bifurcation, 19 sliding bifurcation, 27, 28, 95 region, 27, 28 smooth approximation, 31–32, 80, 210 stability matrix, 113–122, 126–134, 145, 148, 152 stability switching bifurcation, 47–49 stick-slip motion, 7, 27 switching manifold, 1 symbol sequence, 111 symbolic dynamics, 109–112 Takens-Bogdanov bifurcation, 87 virtual solution, 13, 38, 43, 47, 87, 109, 112, 133, 143, 144 winding number, see rotation number

bifurcations

Bifurcations in Piecewise-smooth Continuous Systems (World Scientific Series on Nonlinear Science Series a)

Equations of Phase-Locked Loops: Dynamics on the Circle, Torus and Cylinder (World Scientific Series on Nonlinear Science Series a) (World Scientific Series on Nonlinear Science: Series a)

Nonlinear Dynamics in Particle Accelerators (World Scientific Series on Nonlinear Science, Series a)

A Practical Guide for Studying Chua's Circuits (Nonlinear Science, Series a) (World Scientific Series on Nonlinear Science: Series a)

Differential Geometry Applied to Dynamical Systems (World Scientific Series on Nonlinear Science, Series a)

Discrete Systems with Memory (World Scientific Series on Nonlinear Science, Series a)

A Nonlinear Dynamics Perspective of WolframÂ’s New Kind of Science: (Volume III) (World Scientific Series on Nonlinear Science, Series a) (World Scientific ... Science, Series a Monographs and Treatises)

Nonlinear And Parametric Phenomena: Theory And Applications In Radiophysical And Mechanical Systems (World Scientific Series on Nonlinear Science, Series a)

Dynamics and Control of Hybrid Mechanical Systems (World Scientific Series on Nonlinear Science, Series B)

Mathematical Mechanics: From Particle to Muscle (World Scientific Series on Nonlinear Science, Series a 77)

Synchronization in coupled chaotic circuits and systems (World Scientific series on nonlinear science. Series A, Monographs and treatises; v. 41)

Bifurcation and Chaos in Nonsmooth Mechanical Systems (World Scientific Series on Nonlinear Science: Series A) (v. 45)